Home

Toshiba 200L Printer User Manual

1. seeeeeeerreeeee 354 Location Does Not Contain Information About Your Hardware 354 This Portis Currently In Se a scp eee othe a ed ee Re Dot uade 354 Problem with the Current Printer Setup ccccccccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeees 355 Printer Driver General Errors vete eteceecacd etes mese a oe U ERA SN LERUUE 355 Driver Mapped to Wrong Port cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeesaueeseeeeseees 355 Command Line Options Not ProceSsed ccccceeececeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeseeeeeeaes 355 Cannot Remember Document PaSSWOIMG ccccceccseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeees 356 Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed cccceccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeaees 356 10 Printing Guide Table of Contents Cannot Printa Job Using SMB ion ieee ee x Eae dic raa dun eu e abE nudes 356 Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver 356 TopAccessDocMOLD ETITOES iion deose iod od atat a mte as eoe d so an e cubes siu dun 357 TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions cccccceeccccseececeeeeeceeeceeceeeeseueeesseeeesanes 357 The Device is Not Responding ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeereen nennen 357 Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue 357 Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages Warnings Errors 357 TopAccessDocMon Error Messages sccccs
2. eeeessseeseeeeereneenn nn 256 Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet sseseseseeeeeeee 257 Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources 258 Iiterleaving F ages ion eae ueque m bu fables da Deoa te tn VE bg ere 259 PININ dolore dc 260 Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet ccccssseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 263 USING Watermark S 525 cocta ode E eae oce edd vA el Oe M eR 265 Printing with an Overlay File ccccccscecccesseeececesseceeseeseeesesesessseaaeees 267 Pining ora PADI ADS eet 269 Printing from MIoITTtOSD s cecas Lue oen ae Ox ue Lata dete E Ea ageeuce Boater 271 Printing from an Application on Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x seeseeeeseeen 271 How to Print from Mac OS 8 6 or 9 x ccccccsseececeeeseeeecessseeceseseeeseeseeeessaes 271 Selecting the Printer in the Chooser eese 271 Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers 272 Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8 6 9 x 273 Page AMMDUTE S cvi viae rk dedu exu e aiu etaed a RED ed 213 Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8 6 9 x seeseeeseeeeene 274 General T rc md 274 Background MINING is ernst ed ann N adn pant M aUa bud 2 5 Printing Guide Table of Contents Color Mate MING NE T 276 OVC iP AC EHE 276 PONE SUING ce 277
3. sseeeeeeeeeeeeeenen 193 Iistallina the CUPS s od ted M ea Ne e 195 Other instalador Procedures dci odeteutesuad aie sanata semi utet eS E acutus 198 Installing the Client Software from TopAccess seesee 198 So TP FIDEI s e cisci ra aaremansanctove de Do a 203 Protina Trop VVIDIO WS cede cae crete E aN i a AE 204 Printing Guide Table of Contents Before Using the Printer DIriver ccccccccsseeecceesseecceeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeesseneeeeeas 204 Configuring the Options ssseeesssssssseseeeennnenm emnes 204 Configuring the Options Manually cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 205 Configuring the Options Automatically cccccceecccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 206 Setting the Department Code ccccccccseseeecceeeecececeeseceeseeeeeecssesesseaaeeees 208 Copying the PPD File for WiINdOWS cc ssccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeasaeeeeeeaees 210 xiniaiiqegirengg2oo e AMON NE oom 211 Considerations and Limitations ccccccessseeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeensnees 211 mios mem o E 211 snembescdna eencce t 212 ais EioEolilemd e E 213 Setting Initial Values of Print Options sseeeeseeeeeeeeeeenee 213 Setting Print Options for Each Print Job eeseeeeeeseeesesssss 213 Setting Print Options Using Profiles ssee
4. Click the check box next to the port s vou want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer v Local Port TOSHIBA e LPT2 Local Port C LPT3 Local Port COM1 Local Port COM2 Local Port COM3 Local Port zi Add Pott Configure Port Enable printer pooling E Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 5 Click Have Disk Add Printer Wizard Ed xz Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ca installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AGFA AccuSet 1NNNSF vA 3 x Have Disk lt Back Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 6 Click Browse Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK ce selected and then click OK o Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from Im xj Browse e The A is not accessible message appears T Click Cancel Locate File Ed e A is not accessible The device is not ready tBei Cancel e The Locate File dialog box appears 8 Insert the Cl
5. 200 Printer List AppleTalk E Local AppleTalk Zone HB Name Typ ad MFP_00C67861 PostScript printer lt gt amp Character Set Western v Printer Model TOSHIBA_e STUDIO45115eries 4 f Cancel Add gt The printer is added to the Printer List 8 Continue the procedure to configure the installable options P 182 Configuring the Installable Options Configuring the Installable Options Users must configure the installable options before printing Configuring the installable options 1 In the Printer List dialog box select the printer and then select Show Info in the Printers menu Print Center Edit View Msc Jobs Window Help Show Printer List Printer List Make Default 36D Add Printer Delete Printer Add Delete Configure Printet W Status Show Info MFP 00C67861 Show Jobs Stop Jobs e The Printer Info dialog box appears 2 Select Installable Options in the drop down menu Printer Info MFP 00C67861 v Name amp Location Printer Model Printer NOBLE IHE TEE MFP_00C67861 Location Local zone Queue Name MFP_00C67861 Host Name Local Apply Changes 3 182 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh e The Installable Options window is displayed 3 Set the following options MFP_00C67861 lt Installable Options Finisher Multi Position se
6. Desktop Printer Usage Print to LPR 10 10 70 105 With Printer Driver Laser writer 8 172 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 8 Enter the Desktop Printer name and click Save Desktop amp Macintosh HD E a Save desktop printer as 10 10 70 105 e he printer is added to the desktop 9 Double click the desktop printer icon that you created The Desktop Printer utility window opens 10 Click the Printing menu and select Change Setup 5 File Edit View Window Special Busliitig Help v Start Print Queue Stop Print Queue Show Manual Feed Alert Set Default Printer 38L e The LaserWriter setup dialog box appears 11 Select each option item in the Change drop down menu and select installed option in the To drop down menu according to the configuration of this equipment LaserWriter setup for ig 10 10 70 105 p PostScript Printer Description PPD File Y TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511Series p Installable Options TERNG SELETATI Finisher Not Installed Pedestal Pedestal 2 To Not Installed a es sn cus Single Position Stapler Multi Position Stapler Auto Seti Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch Flnisher Not Installed Select this when no finisher is installed Single Position Stapler Select this when the Single staple Finisher only for e STUDIO3511 e S
7. m Y T ENEN P 188 Creating a print queue manually on Solaris P 189 Creating a print queue manually on HP UX P 190 Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX P 191 Creating a print queue manually on Linux P 192 Creating a print queue manually on OpenUnix Creating a print queue manually on Solaris 1 Log on to the root account 2 Open your Linux Unix editor 3 Create the following file etc lp interfaces queue name gt conf 4 Add aline as below in the lt queue name gt conf dest lt IP address gt 5D Save the file 6 Enter the following command chmod x queue name gt conf Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 10 Enter the following command chown lp lp lt queue name gt conf Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series lpadmin p queue name gt v dev null I any i usr lib lp model net est4511 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series lpadmin p queue name v dev null I any i usr lib lp model net estbw Enter the following command accept queue name gt Enter the following command enable queue name gt Creating a print queue manually on HP UX 10 11 Log on to the root account Open your Linux Unix editor Create the following file etc lp interfaces queue name gt conf Add a line as below in the queue name conf dest IP address Save the file Ente
8. Network path or queue name Mfp 00c67861 Sprint Discovery lt Back Next gt Cancel The Select Program Folder screen is displayed 11 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard xj Select Program Folder j Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder TOSHIBA e STUDIO Client Existing Folders Administrative Tools Startup InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f you want to change the program folder rename the folder in the Program Folders field The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed 12 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Files l J Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings TARGET DIRECTORY C Program Files TOSHIBASTOSHIBA e STUDIO Client The following components will be installed to Target Directory of System Top amp ccessDocMon The following components will be installed to System Folder TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCLE TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c gt
9. Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 35 6 Click Browse Found New Hardware Wizard E x Ce Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from C386 e The Locate File dialog box appears T Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 is located select a INF file and click Open Locate File Look in Eusa gt e e E3 eSdcps2k inf File name es Acps2k inf m Files of type Setup Information inf Cancel e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 8 Click OK Found New Hardware Wizard x gt Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from JE w2k_XP_2003 PS USA 36 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 9 Check Next Found New Hardware Wizard E Driver Files Search Results Pate The wizard has finished searching for driver files for your hardware device Sy The wizard found a driver for the following device uy Unknown Windows found a driver for this device To in
10. Add Port Configure Port Enable printer pooling ERE The Printer Ports dialog box appears D Select Local Port and click New Port Printer Ports i21 x Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port New Monitor Cancel The Port Name dialog box appears 6 Enter lt NetBIOS Name gt print in the field and click OK Port Name x Enter a port name MFP 00C67861 Sprint Cancel Help Example NetBIOS Name MFP 00C67861 WMFP 00C67861 print Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows SUPPLEMENT Youcan also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name Example 10 10 70 120 print T Click Close Printer Ports i21 x Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port New Monitor Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer C COMI Local Port CI come Local Port C COM3 Local Port C COM Local Port MI MFP O0C Local Port m Add Port Configure Port Enable printer pooling i Cancel 9 Click Have Disk Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If you
11. Number Pages from Right to Left T If you want to print or insert a front cover check the Use Front Cover box and then select at the Source drop down box the drawer where the front cover is loaded Also at the Print Style drop down box select whether you are inserting a blank cover or printed front cover vw Use Front Cover Source Lower Drawer Print Style Print on both sides of page Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank front cover Print on both sides of page Select this to print the first two pages and last two page of document on both sides of a cover NOTE The last two page will not be printed or printed only one page if there are no remained pages or only a last page for the cover 8 Set other print options you require and click OK 9 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is printed as a booklet NOTE Ifa Saddle stitch Finisher is not installed the output will not be folded But you can create a booklet by folding along the center by yourself 262 Printing Guide Printing from Windows Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet The N up feature allows you to condense and print several pages of a document on one sheet of paper This feature is very useful for browsing a large number of pages for appearance or page order For example to check the navigation path of a number of web pages or review the narrative of a slide present
12. Cancel The confirmation dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 167 4 Click OK Print Server Properties E3 22 Deleting these printer drivers will remove them from the system Are you sure you want to delete the selected printer drivers Yes No The printer drivers are completely deleted 168 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Installing Client Software for Macintosh NOTE e Printing from Macintosh is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on Macintosh computers m Y hh H P 169 About Client Software for Macintosh m Y hh Lt P 169 Planning for Installation m Y T LJ P 169 Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x m Y WN Hl P 176 Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later About Client Software for Macintosh B PostScript Printer Description File The Macintosh PPD PostScript Printer Description file contains information about control ler specific features There are two PPD files provided in the Client CD ROM one is for Mac OS 8 6 9 x and the other is for Mac OS X Information within the PPD file for Mac OS 8 6 9 x works in conjunction with the standard Macintosh LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8 6 5 or later This Macintosh PPDs are sup plied for Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x and it
13. Conventions e The term this equipment in this manual refers to the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series e The term e Filing in this manual is an abbreviation of electronic filing About Other Manuals Other guides are included in the User Documentation CD ROM provided with this system Network Operator s Guide explains how to set up and manage network functions using the TopAccess user functions such as network job management and template registration from client computers via a network Network Administrator s Guide explains the basic configuration and administration of the equipment in supported platform and network environments It also includes guidelines for set ting up network servers to provide various network services e Filing Guide explains how to operate the e Filing features by using the TWAIN driver File Downloader and e Filing web utility Network Fax Guide explains how to use the network fax features that enable users to operate fax and internet fax sending from a client computer via network Printing Guide Preface 5 Table of Contents SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT scosncsesvtcacectainesicderiesdieentaisicoiewoatiaeedees 2 TRADEMARKS AND COPY RIGHT 22 cnacdiskxdx E ud bed cont itas ales vue QU vetu vate is 4 icio 5 ADOUC TINS OUG eea Hm 5 Gros inier e LE 5 About Other Manuals lssessessssseessee
14. 9 Description list box below Printer Information This highlights the method of recovery for the alert selected above 10 Add Device Click this to add a new device to be monitored The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears P 342 Adding Devices Changing Monitoring Devices You can change the device to display the details in the TopAccessDocMon window To change the device click the Printer menu Change Printer and select the device name of which the details are displayed in the TopAccessDocMon window SUPPLEMENT You can add the device name in the Change Printer menu by clicking Add Device in the Device Status tab P 342 Adding Devices Adding Devices You can add the devices to be monitored by TopAccessDocMon To add the new device you can use the TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery function You can add the printer by automatically searching the printer in your network or entering the printer address manually 342 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon Adding new device by searching the printer automatically 1 Click Add Device in the Device Status tab amp f TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Oj x Printer Document View Help Device Status print queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Fiing Invalid Printer Information Gil Drawer Status Counter Name MFP 00C67861 Upper Drawer Letter Plain
15. ITA D SPA oam To view any subfolders click a plus sign above e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 6 Click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options e Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D w2K_XP_2008 PCL5C USA Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware e It starts copying files T Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for my TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c tem Click Finish to close the wizard Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 39 8 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure t
16. Installing Client Software for Windows 4 Click Yes TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS UNLESS A SEPARATE LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE SUPPLIER OF APPLICABLE SOFTWARE IN WHICH CASE SUCH SEPARATE LICENSE SHALL APPLY IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS YOU MAY NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE AND YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT GRANT OF LICENSE xl Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you select No the setup will close To install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client you must accept this agreement InstallShield e The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed D Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder r Destination Folder ES ATOSHIBASTOSHIBA e STUDIO Client Browse InstallSh
17. Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other network users Indicate whether you want this printer to be available to other users If you share this printer you must provide a share name Do not share this printer C Share as lt Back Cancel 52 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 14 Select Yes to print a test page and click Next Add Printer Wizard Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do you want to print a test page Yes C No lt Back Cancel 15 Click Finish Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard Y ou have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Shared as lt Not Shared Port LPT1 Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Default Yes Test page Yes To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel e Start copying files 16 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installing the Client Software for USB Printing This section describes how to set up the printer drivers when this equipment is connected with USB cable To set up th
18. Select this when only the first drawer is installed Drawer amp Large Capacity Feeder Select this when the first drawer and the Large Capacity Feeder is installed 246 Printing Guide Printing from Windows e 1 Drawer amp Pedestal 1 Select this when the first drawer and the upper pedestal is installed e 1 Drawer amp Pedestal 2 Select this when the first drawer and both upper pedestal and lower pedestal are installed e 2 Drawers Select this when the first and second drawers are installed e 2 Drawers amp Large Capacity Feeder Select this when 2 drawers and the Large Capacity Feeder is installed e 2 Drawers amp Pedestal 1 Select this when 2 drawers and the upper pedestal is installed e 2 Drawers amp Pedestal 2 Select this when 2 drawers and both upper pedestal and lower pedestal are installed 2 Finisher This sets whether or not the optional finisher is installed e None Select this when finisher is not installed Hanging Finisher Select this when the Single staple Finisher is installed e Finisher Select this when the Multi staple Finisher is installed for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO4511 Series only e Saddle Stitch Finisher Select this when the Saddle stitch Finisher is installed e Job Separator Select this when the Job Separator is installed for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series only e Offset Stacker Select this when the Offset Stacker i
19. Windows 2000 Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows 2000 1 Power on this equipment and your computer 2 Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer e The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install a device driver for a hardware device To continue click Next TN 60 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 4 Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recom mended and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard E Install Hardware Device Drivers e device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with Sy an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this device oy Unknown 4 device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific driver lt Back Cancel 5 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e W
20. NOTES The printer driver automatically detects whether the document uses only color or only black and white and it prints the document accordingly Additionally you can select black and white mode manually to print a color document in gray scale to reduce the print cost and consumption of color toners e This is only available for PCL5c printer driver and PS3 printer driver For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series This is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Printing a color document in gray scale 1 Display the Setup tab and select Mono at the Color drop down box Color Automatic Staple Mono 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is printed in gray scale Stapling and Hole Punching You can staple and punch the paper e Stapling is not available if a finisher is not installed e Hole Punching is not available if a hole punch unit is not installed Stapling the paper 1 Display the Setup tab and select how to staple at the Staple drop down box Staple Hale Punch Sided Frintinn Upper Left Select this to staple in the upper left and print Center Top Select this to staple double in the upper side and print Upper Right Select this to staple in the upper right and print Middle Left Select this to staple double in the left and print Cen
21. Name of printer or print queue on that server field and click OK Add LPR compatible printer x Name or address of server providing Ipd E 0 10 70 120 s z E Name of printer or print queue on that server print Cancel Help e When your network uses DNS or WINS server enter the printer name of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the Name or address of server providing lpd field 76 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box Printer Ports i2 x Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port Local Port New Monitor 8 Make sure that the created LPR Port is selected in the Avail able ports list and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer M 10 10 70 1 C LPT1 Local Port TOSHIBA e C LPT2 Local Port L LPT3 Local Port L1 COMI Local Port L COM2 Local Port zi Add Pott Configure Port Enable printer pooling j Cancel 9 Click Have Disk ash Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an i installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer docume
22. Other EA 8 50 in x 11 0 in Orientation UE Scale 100 G eoo OO Q 1 Format for This select the printer to be used for printing 2 Paper Size This selects the size of a document to be printed Available original paper sizes are listed below e Letter A4 e Folio e Ledger e A3 e 13inch LG e Legal e A3 Wide e 8 5inch SQ e Statement e AS e 8K e Computer e A6 e 16K e Ledger Wide B4 e B5 e Ledger wide and A3 wide are not available when the Single staple Finisher is installed For e STUDIOA50 Series and e STUDIO280 Series A3 Wide and Ledger Wide are not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 3 Orientation This sets the paper printing direction e Portrait The document is printed in the portrait direction e Landscape 90 degree The document is printed in the landscape direction from left Landscape 270 degree The document is printed in the landscape direction from right 4 Scale This changes the size of the printed image on the page Enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce an image You can set any integer from 25 to 400 96 for the zoom ratio Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the Print command from the File menu of the application In the Print dialog boxes you can specify the Copies amp Pages settings Lay
23. Port Settings Hel Cancel e The Add Port dialog box appears 5 Select Other and Local Port and click OK Add Port HEI Select the type of port you want to add C Network Specify the network path to the printer Other Click the type of port you want to add Local Port e The Port Name dialog box appears 6 Enter lt NetBIOS Name gt print in the field and click OK Port Name 24 x Enter a port name MFP 00C67861 Sprint Cancel Example NetBIOS Name MFP 00C67861 WMFP 00C67861 print SUPPLEMENT Youcan also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name Example W10 10 70 120 print 106 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Click OK to save settings TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 24x Image Quality Fonts Configuration About General Details Color Management Sharing Setup PrintJob Layout Effect S TOSHIBA e STUDID4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port ww FP DOCB7851 print Unknown local p i UI Delete Port Print using the following driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c New Driver Capture Printer Port End Capture r Timeout settings Not selected 5 seconds Transmission retry seconds Spool Settings Port Settings OK Cancel Apply Help Windows NT 4 0 REQUIREMENT Youmustlog
24. Resolution option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 4 Smoothing Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly NOTE The Smoothing option is only available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 5 Distinguish Thin Lines Check this to print thin lines clearly 6 Black Over Print Check this to print background contents and then overlay black content on it If this is not checked the background of the black content is not printed It may remain a white because the black content may shift and be printed When you print a document that has any content on the background with black texts overlayed check this option NOTE The Black Over Print option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Black Over Print option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 7 Pure Black Check this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all color cyan magenta and yellow is 100 C M Y 100 gt K 100 NOTE The Pure Black option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box in the Setup tab For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Pure Black option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 8 Pure Gray Check this to print the contents in gra
25. 1 Devices Find TOSHIBA Devices Check on this to search only for TOSHIBA devices in your network such as the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series e STUDIO280 Series GL 1020 GL 1010 and SC 2 2 Devices Find All Devices on the Network Check on this to search for all compatible devices can be detected 346 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 3 Network Enable IPX SPX Search Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX SPX network This is available only when the IPX SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer and the computer is connected to the NetWare server 4 Network Enable TCP IP Search Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP IP network This is available only when the TCP IP protocol is installed in your computer When this is enabled select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in the TCP IP network e Search local subnet Select this to search for printers in local subnet e Specify a range Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IP addresses When this is selected enter the IP addresses in the From field and To field to specify the range Monitoring Queues Each of the TopAccessDocMon job status tabs display essentially the same information The Queue tabs on the TopAccessDocMon window are vary depending on the monitoring device e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO
26. 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 2 Click the Macintosh PPD Files link Install Client Software Drivers Unix Filters Macintosh PPD Files Please click on the link s below to download the Windows Installer Files File Name Size Install Clienti 45088 KB Install Client2 19995 KB e The software components list is displayed 3 Click the File Name link that you want to download Install Client Software Drivers Unix Filters Macintosh PPD Files Please click on the link s below to download the Macintosh PPD Files File Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series sit TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series gz For e STUDIO4511 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511Series sit Click this link to download the PPD file Size 16 KB 82 KB for Mac OS 8 6 9 x and Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 Classic mode Printing Guide Other Installation Procedures 200 TOSHIBA_e STUDIO4511Series gz Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later For e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO450Series sit Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS 8 6 9 x and Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 Classic mode TOSHIBA e STUDIOA450Series gz Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later For e STUDIO280 Series TOSHIBA_e STUDIO280Series sit Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS 8 6 9 x and Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 Classic mode TOSHIBA_e STUDIO280Series gz C
27. Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears e If the installer does not automatically start double click Setup exe in the Client CD ROM Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 25 2 Select your language and click OK Choose Setup Language x Select the language for the installation from the choices below Cancel The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard xj Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TOSHIBA e STUDI04511 Series Client The InstallShield Wizard will install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer To continue click Next lt Back Cancel e The License Agreement screen is displayed 4 Click Yes TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS UNLESS A SEPARATE LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE SUPPLIER OF APPLICABLE SOFT
28. Browse 86 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 17 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use xg Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation Ca disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows Update Have Disk tees NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Use Existing Driver driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want to keep the existing driver or use the new one C Keep existing driver recommended Replace existing driver lt Back Cancel 18 Change the name if desired and click Next Add Printer Wizard Name Your Printer You must assign a name for this printer Supply a name for this printer Some programs do not support server and printer name combinations of more than 31 characters Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer Yes C No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any
29. Duplex In the Duplex menu you can set 2 Sided printing printing on both sides of a sheet NOTES This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10 3 or later When you want to enable 2 Sided printing on Mac OS X 10 3 or later set the Two Sided Printing option in the Layout menu P 292 Layout e 2 sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed Printer MFP 00C67861 E Presets Standard Hd Duplex zz D Print on Both Sides Binding Preview Save As PDF X Cancel X 1 Print on Both Sides Check this to print on both sides of the paper When this is checked select the binding direc tion at the Binding option 2 Binding This sets the type of binding for 2 sided printed pages e Long Edge Binding Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper The direc tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation Portrait Landscape e Short Edge Binding Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper The direc tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation Portrait Landscape 294 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh Output Options In the Output Options menu you can save a print job as a file Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard i E Output Options a Save as File Format PDI i Preview Save As PDF 1 Save
30. IP address Save the file Enter the following command mkque q queue name sa oScsUustfilter yusr lib Ipd bsdshort X a up TRUE a host IP address gt a rq dssc Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series mkquedev q queue name gt d dev queue name gt a backend opt toshiba tap bin est4511Backend Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 10 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series mkquedev q queue name gt d dev queue name gt a backend opt toshiba tap bin estbwBackend Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series cp Jusr lib lpd plo predet hnet est4511 X opt toshiba tap filter queue name For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series cp usr lib lpd pio predef net estbw opt toshiba tap filter queue name Creating a print queue manually on Linux 1 10 Enter the following command ls opt toshiba tap interface If the above directory does not exist enter the following com mand mkdir opt toshiba tap interface As root open your Linux Unix editor Open your Linux Unix editor Create the following file opt toshiba tap interface queue name conf Add a line as below in the queue name conf dest IP address Save the file Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series cp opt toshiba tap model net est4511l opt toshiba tap interface queue name For e
31. Name IPAPX Address Location Model Er Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection Device Information Gk Cancel Help e TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network SUPPLEMENTS You can quit the process by clicking Stop Discovery e t may not find the device that is located in the different segment If a device cannot be found find a device manually from the Manual Selection button P 336 Finding a printer by entering printer address manually Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 335 e If the process continues for a long time it is because too many network clients are in the network Also you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a printer in the IPX SPX network In these cases please configure the discovery set tings using the Advanced button P 338 Configuring Discovery Settings e When th equipment is connected to the IPX SPX network of the NDS or NDPS envi ronment the equipment cannot be discovered on Windows 98 Me In this case please configure the connection manually P 336 Finding a printer by entering printer address manually 3 When the process is complete the printers that have been found are listed in the list 4 Select the printers that you want to monitor from the list and click OK TTopaccessDocMon Local Discovery x S MFP O0C67861 10 1
32. Network Utility ODBC Administrator Print Center e The Printer List dialog box appears 2 Click Add e808 Printer List I gt a a Name 4 Status Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 177 3 Select IP Printing in the drop down box Printer List IP Printing H Printer s Address Internet address or DNS name v Use default queue on server Queue Name Printer Model Generic H Cancel Add 4 Enter the IP address or DNS name of this equipment in the Printer s Address field Printer List IP Printing H Printer s Address 110 10 70 105 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address v Use default queue on server Queue Name Printer Model Generic he ne ED 5 Uncheck the Use default queue on server box and enter Print in the Queue Name field Printer List IP Printing Printer s Address 10 10 70 105 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address f Use default queue on server Queue Name Print Printer Model Generic 178 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 6 Select Other at the Printer Model drop down box Printer List IP Printing H Printer s Address 10 10 70 105 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address f Use default queue on server Queue Name Print Printer Model Y Gene
33. Pedestal LCF Hd Apply Changes Finisher Not Installed Select this if a finisher is not installed Single Position Stapler Select this when the Single staple Finisher only for e STUDIO3511 e STUDIO350 and e STUDIO280 Series is installed Multi Position Stapler Select this when the Multi staple Finisher or Sad dle stitch Finisher is installed Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch Select this when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed Job Separator Select this when the Job Separator only for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series is installed Offset Tray Select this when the Offset Tray only for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series is installed Lower Drawer only for e STUDIO280 Series Not Installed Select this when the Lower Drawer is not installed Installed Select this when the Lower Drawer is installed Pedestal Not Installed Select this when no pedestal is installed Pedestal 1 Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal is installed Pedestal 2 Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal and Drawer Module are installed LCF Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed ADU only for e STUDIO280 Series Not Installed Select this when the ADU is not installed Installed Select this when the ADU is installed NOTE Ifyou are using the Mac OS X 10 3 0 or earl
34. Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows SUPPLEMENT It searches the equipment within the local subnet in your network If the equipment is located in the different subnet from your computer or you want to specify the IP address range to be searched click Advance The Discovery Settings dialog box appears and you can specify the advanced settings for searching the equipment Discovery Settings X Devices M Find e STUDIO4511 Series Lad Network F Enable IPX BPX Searc v Enable TCP IP Search Search local subnet C Specify a range From To OK Cancel e Devices You can specify the device models to be searched This sets to search the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series so you do not have to change this options Network Enable IPX SPX Search Check on this to search printers which con nect to the IPX SPX network This is available only when the IPX SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer and the computer is connected to the NetWare server Network Enable TCP IP Search Check on this to search printers which con nect to the TCP IP network This is available only when the TCP IP protocol is installed in your computer When this is enabled select how it searches printers in the TCP IP network Search local subnet Select this to search printers in local subnet Specify a range Select this to s
35. You can also delete the profile that you no longer require Printing Guide Printing from Windows 213 P 215 Deleting profile Saving profile You can create up to 20 profiles for a printer driver 1 Configure the print options on each tab e Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a document P 216 Print Options 2 Click Save As at the Profile group TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 x Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Original Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 x 11 m Manual Scale 100 ew z Print Paper Size Same as Original Size m Paper Source Automatic hel Paper Type Plain m Orientation Portrait z Letter Number of Copies E Eo E Copy Handling Sort Copies bd Graphics Text golor Automatic Profile None 1 None v Save As Delete ole Punch None v Restore Defaults 2 Sided Printing M Cancel Apply Help The Profile Name dialog box appears 3 Enter the profile name and click OK x Profile N ame filet OK Cancel ok e The file name can be up to 32 characters long SUPPLEMENT If you enter the existing profile name it prompts whether overwrite the existing pro file or not If you want to overwrite the existing profile click OK 4 The setting profile is saved 214 Printing Guide Printi
36. at the Device drop down box and click Continue Enter the IPP URL address http lt IP address gt 631 Print for the equipment in the Device URL field and click Continue Select TOSHIBA at the Make drop down box and click Continue Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 17 Select the model name for this equipment in the Model list and click Continue 18 Click the printer name link 19 When you want to configure the print options click Config ure Printer 20 Change the settings as you require and click Continue in each area to save settings Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 197 Other Installation Procedures Installing the Client Software from TopAccess If the system administrator has uploaded the driver software to this equipment you can use TopAccess to install the software on your workstation Installing client software from TopAccess for Windows 1 In TopAccess click the Install Software link at the bottom of the screen Top A Cccess e Filing Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Administration Device afe Device Information Status Ready Name MFP 00C67861 Location Copier Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 1 Hard Disk Space Available 14985 MB Contact Information Phone Number Message Alerts spine Drawer sie Wwe owes Sis Upper Orawer tr Pen so Emoy Fax Not einen Pedestal Upper Drawer A4
37. ment on both sides of the cover NOTE Print on both sides of page is available only when 2 Sided printing is enabled at the Setup tab 5 If you want to print or insert a back cover check the Use Back Cover box and then select at the Source drop down box the drawer where the back cover is loaded Also at the Print Style drop down box select whether you are inserting a blank cover or printed back cover v Use Back Cover Source Lower Drawer Print Style Print on both sides of page Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank back cover Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the first page of document on the front side of the back cover Print on both sides of page Select this to print the last pages of document on both sides of the back cover NOTE Print on both sides of page is available only when 2 Sided printing is enabled at the Setup tab Only one page will be printed on the back cover when only one page is remained for the back cover page even if Print on both sides of page is selected 264 Printing Guide Printing from Windows 6 If you want to insert sheets between every page check the Interleave Pages box and select the drawer where the inter leaved sheets are loaded at the Source drop down box v Inteleave Pages Source Pedestal Upper Drawer r v Duplicate e If you want to print every previous page on interleaved
38. select Settings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Programs Favorites PR Taskbar amp Start Menu F older Options 40 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2 Double click the Add Printer icon File Edit View Go Favorites Help EJ Back Forward Up Map Drive Disconnect Cut Copy Address a Printers Add Printer TOSHIBA Printers e STUDIO4 Add Printer The dd Printer wizard walks you step by step through installing a printer Just follow the instructions on each screen e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard This wizard will help you to install your printer quickly and easily To begin installing your printer click Next How is this printer attached to your computer If itis directly attached to your computer click Local Printer If it is attached to another computer click Network Printer Local printer Linie e C Network printer lt Back Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 5 Click Have Disk gA Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ca installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers ABFA AccuSet 1000 AGFA AccuSet 10005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet
39. 1 Select the printer driver in the Printers folder Then click File and select Properties for Windows 98 Me select Document Defaults for Windows NT 4 0 or Printing Pref erences for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 3 Printers E E mi x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Open earch Folders 4 WG GS X x Eg Add Printer TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA 28 MU 3M e STUDIOF e STUDIO4 1 Series PCLSc Set as Default Printer Printing Preferences Pause Printing Cancel All Documents Sharing Use Printer Offline T TopAccessDocMon Server Properties Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Close J Displays default document settings For this printer e The printer driver properties dialog box appears Printing Guide Printing from Windows 209 210 2 Display the Print Job tab and enter your department code in the Department field d TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences Al xl Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Mormal Print Scheduled Print C Private Print C Proof Print C Print to Overlay File Letter EO C Store to eFiling Graphics Text Profile None Destination Inner Tray Save As Delete Department xxxs Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Help e Inthe Department field only numeric characters can be entered The Departme
40. 2 Change the current directory to where the print file is located 3 Type following command and press the Enter key ftp lt IP Address gt e Inthe lt IP Address gt section enter the IP address of this equipment 4 If it prompts you to enter the user name enter the FTP Print User Name and press the Enter key NOTE It prompts you to enter the user name if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an administrator Ask your administrator for the FTP Print User Name D If it prompts you to enter the password enter the FTP Print Password and press the Enter key NOTES It prompts you to enter the password if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an administrator Ask your administrator for the FTP Print Password e If the FTP Print User Name has been assigned but the FTP Print Password blank do not enter when it prompts you to enter the password and press the Enter key 6 Type following command and press the Enter key binary 324 Printing Guide Other Printing Methods T Type the following command and press the Enter key put file name gt For example of the print file name is sample ps put sample ps 8 The file is sent to this equipment and spooled in the queue Email Printing Email printing is available when enabled on this equipment You can print a document by sending the print file as an email attachment to this equipment using the mail client software This equipment can accept fo
41. Default t2 First page from Auto Default Remaining from Auto Default 1 Copies This sets the number of printed copies You can set any integer from 1 to 9999 2 Collated Check this for sort printing 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 Pages This sets the pages to be printed e All Select this to print all pages e From To Select this to specify the pages to be printed Enter the page range in the From and To field 4 Paper Source This selects the source for feeding paper Please select a paper source that correlates with the printing size e All pages from Select this to use the same paper source for all pages Select the paper source or paper type at the pop up menu on the right 274 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh e First page from Select this to use the different paper source for the first page from the remaining pages Select the paper source or paper type for the first page at the pop up menu on the right Remaining from Select the paper source or paper type for the remaining pages at the pop up menu on the right when you select the First page from option Background Printing In the Background Printing menu you can set how the print job is spooled E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Background Printing T D Printin Foreground no spool file amp Background Print Time Urgent amp No
42. LL P 101 Windows 98 Me LL P 103 Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 100 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows NOTE Itassumes using SMB printing by Point and Print in a small network If you can use the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 as a print server it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server For further information about setting up printing via a Windows print server see the Net work Administrator s Guide SUPPLEMENTS TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing To install TopAccessDocMon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately e The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Windows 98 Me Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print 1 Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer and double click a queue in which the printer driver should be installed see below Mfp 00c67861 File Edit View Go Favorites Help e t Gm X EE 5 Back Fonvard Up Map Drive Disconnect Cut Copy Address E Network Neighborhood 5j
43. NOTE Novell printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed Available for Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Connecting with a NetWare Environment over TCP IP or IPX SPX Network NetWare 4 x NetWare 5 x NetWare 6 x Setting up the Novell printer connection Setting up the SMB printer connection to Novell print queue Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP SS Windows Server 2003 24 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows When this equipment is configured to manage printing with NetWare 4 x or 5 x over TCP IP or IPX SPX you can print through the NetWare print server from Windows 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 In this case install the printer driver and set up the SMB printer connection to a print queue created in the NetWare server P 132 Installing the Client Software for Novell Printing SUPPLEMENT To print with a Novell connection the NetWare server must be configured for print ing and this equipment must be configured to enable NetWare Print Service Installing the Client Software for Parallel Printing This section describes how to install the client software when this equipment is connected with a printer cable There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for parallel printing e Using the installer
44. Touch Panel Display Please refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for this instruction Creating An Overlay File You can print a document as an overlay file The created overlay file can then be merged into another document during printing P 267 Printing with an Overlay File NOTES If the print job has several pages in the document only the first page of the docu ment will be saved as an overlay file e Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image must be created at the same size orientation color mode and resolution Printing a document as an overlay file 1 Display the Print Job tab and select Print to Overlay File Print to Overlay File 2 Set other print options you require and click OK Printing Guide Printing from Windows 251 e The Create Page Overlay dialog box appears 3 Browse the folder where you want to save an overlay file enter a file name and then click OK Saveas 21x File name Folders OK fileo o5c Cc Amydocu 1 overla mom Cancel ES sese DOCUME 1 Network E ADMINI 1 Neto x MYDOCU 1 f OVERLA 1 Read only Save file as type Drives Overlay Files D5C C e The file name must be up to eight characters long not including the extension 4 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The document is saved as an overly file SUPPLEMENT You can use created overly fi
45. Windows XP Server 2003 LL LL SUPPLEMENTS TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is only connected using the printer cable However when this equipment and your computer are connected to the local area network as well as this equipment is connected to the parallel port of your computer you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs To install TopAccessDocMon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately e The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit NOTE The Plug and Play function is not supported in the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 98 Me Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play The following describes an installation on Windows 98 The procedure is the same when Win dows Me is used 1 Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com puter and then power on the equipment and your computer e The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears 2 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard This wizard searches for new drivers for TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 device driver is a software program that ma
46. aa Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an j installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c lt Back Next gt Cancel 11 Select LPT1 and click Next Add Printer Wizard Click the port you want to use with this printer and then click Next Available ports Communications Port Communications Port Creates a file on disk Virtual printer port for USB Add Port Configure Port N You can type a name for this printer or you can use the name supplied below When you have finished click Next Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes e No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 43 13 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizard After your printer is installed Windows can print a test Page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel e Start copying files 14 The installation is
47. in Opera tor s Manual for Basic Function Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors 365 366 Paper Empty The Out of Paper error icon shows that drawer is empty A paper out condition does not nec essarily terminate a print or copy job If Auto select options are configured printing and copying may continue by drawing paper from a different drawer Refer to the TopAccess online Help for instructions on setting up Auto Select mode For information on resolving the error condition refer to ADD PAPER SYMBOL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function Paper Jam The Paper Jam icon indicates that you need to remove jammed paper from the equipment For information on resolving the error condition refer to CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function Staple Empty The Add Staples error icon indicates you need to add staples to the finisher For information on resolving the error condition refer to ADDING STAPLES OPTIONAL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function Serviceman Calls The Service Call error icon indicates that a call for service is needed Contact your service representative Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors 6 APPENDIX Printing Guide 6 Appendix 367 Managing Fonts with Font Manager The Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 program can be used to manage your fonts in Win dows This program can be launch by clicking Run Font Manager on the Fonts tab of the printer drive
48. printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Have Disk Cancel 10 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 147 SUPPLEMENTS 148 Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard The procedure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard differs depending on the version of the Windows being used P 148 Windows 98 Me P 151 Windows NT 4 0 P 156 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 BBE TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing To install TopAccessDoc Mon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Windows 98 Me Installing the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard The following describes an installation on Windows 98 The procedure is th
49. scroll bar NOTE The Saturation option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 6 Smoothing Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly NOTE The Smoothing option is only available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 7 Distinguish Thin Lines Check this to print thin lines clearly 8 Pure Gray Check this to print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color cyan magenta and yellow is the same percentage C M Y n gt K n NOTE The Pure Gray option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box in the Setup tab 9 Use Black for All Text Check this to print all texts in 10096 black except white texts 240 Printing Guide Printing from Windows For PCL6 Printer Driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 Printing Preferences 2 x Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About Halftone Resolution 600 600 dpi E v Smoothing Distinguish Thin Lines o Go Use Black for All Texts Letter EO E Tet Profile None gt Saveds Delete Restore Defaults Graphics 1 Halftone This sets how halftone are printed e Smooth Select this to print halftone smoothly 2 Resolution This sets the resolution for printing 600 x 600 dpi is only available for the PCL6 printer driver For e STUDIO450 S
50. to send a print job e Sheets are interleaved between every page Printing Booklets Printing in normal booklet mode produces a document that when folded becomes a properly paginated booklet or magazine style publication You can even create bound booklets that are folded and stapled in the center For example if you create a document on letter size paper 82 x 11 inches and then print in booklet mode the yield is a 55 x 85 inch booklet Each page has been scaled to fit on half a sheet and reordered so that the booklet is properly paginated when folded To retain your original document size when printing booklets select the booklet size same as your original document size Then your 82 inch document is printed on ledger size paper 11 x 17 inches and reordered so that when folded the yield is an 8 5 x 11 inch booklet You can select from the following page size options when printing a tiled booklet e Letter Booklet on Ledger e A4 Booklet on A3 e B4 Booklet on B5 Creating a booklet 1 Display the Booklet window of Layout tab Printing Guide Printing from Windows 2 Select the a booklet size at the Output Document Layout drop down box Standard Booklet C Multiple Pages per Sheet Center Margin A5 on A4 Select this to print a A5 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on A4 paper to fit on half a sheet A5 A4 on A3 Select this to print a A4 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on A3 p
51. 1000SF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 1500 AGFA AccuSet 1500SF v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA ArcuSet ANNSF v N13 108 z Have Disk lt Back Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 6 Click Browse E Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from m Y Browse e The Open dialog box appears T Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 8 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98 Me is located and click OK Open HEI File name Folders Jes 4c5c9x inf d A8 me pcl5c susa Cancel Network Drives 2 d e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PS lt language gt 42 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 9 Click OK Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from Dx ME SPULSCAUSA z Browse 10 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard
52. 1010 e SC 2 e TopAccessDocMon also can monitor the device status of the devices that support MIB II Host Resource MIB and Printer MIB e To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon the equipment and your com puter must be connected in the TCP IP or IPX SPX network e To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon the SNMP Network Service must be enabled using TopAccess Information about setting up the SNMP Net work Service from the TopAccess is provided in the Network Administrator s Guide e TopAccessDocMon is only available for Windows To monitor and manage print jobs via a network environments use TopAccess Information about monitoring print jobs from the TopAccess is provided in the Network Operator s Guide Features and Functions The document monitor TopAccessDocMon follows the progress of each job from your com puter desktop until it is printed on this equipment TopAccessDocMon consists of the document monitor and a printer status component B The document monitor provides event notification alerts This means that if an event interrupts printing such as a paper out condition the monitor displays an alert You can control which events cause TopAccessDocMon to display an alert B Printer status provides device summary information and access to the print queues Print queue Private Print queue Proof Print queue Scheduled Print queue Fax queue e Filing queue and Invalid queue How to Use TopAcc
53. 20 Bodoni BoldItalic 2 Bodoni Poster 22 Bodoni PosterCompressed 23 Bookman Light 24 Bookman LightItalic 25 Bookman Demi 26 Bookman DemiItalic 27 Candid 28 Chicago 29 Clarendon Light 30 Clarendon 21 Clarendon Bold 32 CooperBlack 33 CooperBlack Italic 34 Copperplate ThirtyTwoBC 35 Copperplate ThirtyThreeBC 36 Coronet Regular 37 Courier 38 Courier Oblique 39 Courier Bold 40 Courier BoldOblique 41 Eurostile 42 Eurostile Bold 43 Eurostile ExtendedTwo 44 Eurostile BoldExtendedTwo Printing Guide Internal Fonts List 45 46 47 48 49 50 od 52 S5 54 S 56 5 58 39 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Zu 72 5 74 Ta 76 77 78 19 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 Geneva GillSans Light GillSans LightItalic GillSans GillSans Italic GillSans Bold GillSans BoldItalic GillSans ExtraBold GillSans BoldCondensed GillSans Condensed Goudy Goudy Italic Goudy Bold Goudy BoldItalic Goudy ExtraBold Helvetica Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Helvetica BoldOblique Helvetica Condensed Helvetica Condensed Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Helvetica Condensed BoldObl Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique HoeflerText Regular HoeflerText Italic HoeflerText Black HoeflerText BlackItalic HoeflerText Ornaments JoannaMT JoannaMT Italic JoannaMT Bold JoannaMT BoldItalic LetterGothic LetterGothic Slanted LetterGothic Bold LetterGothi
54. 9 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard ag Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ca installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c lt Back Next gt Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 143 NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c A driver is already installed for this printer Would you like to keep the existing driver or use the new one Your programs may print differently if you use the new driver C Keep existing driver recommended lt Back Cancel 10 Change the name if desired select whether you are using this printer as a default printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard You can type a name for this printer or you can use the name supplied below When you have finished click Next Printer name Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes e No lt Back Cancel After your printer is installed Windows can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a
55. 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Network Environment over TCP IP Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 L Windows 2000 Setting up SMB Printer SSS Windows XP Connection Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows This equipment can be used with an SMB printer connection that allows you to connect to this equipment using File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks service SMB printing is the common method used to set up the printer However SMB printing is not suitable for printing a large amount of documents P 89 Installing the Client Software for SMB Printing NOTE It assumes using SMB printing in a small network If you can use the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 as a print server it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server For further informa tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server see the Network Adminis trator s Guide Using Peer to Peer Utility NOTE Peer to Peer printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed Available for Windows 98 Windows Me Connecting over TCP IP Network Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 98 Windows Me Setting up th
56. Cancel TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver For e STUDIO280 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series Client InstallShield Wiza rd x Select Components i Select the components setup will install Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install v Top amp ccessDocMon Description TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Setup will install the TOSHIBA TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PSL3 e STUDID280 Series PSL3 printer driver on your computer 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14753 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield TN TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver e The Select Port dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series e The PCLSc printer driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series e Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner K
57. Chooser window e The LaserWriter 8 printer driver remains selected as the current printer until you choose a new printer Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 271 Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers In Mac OS applications print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box Printing from Macintosh applications 1 Open a file and select Page Setup from the File menu of the application 2 Select the name of the equipment at the Format for drop down box and specify the Page Setup settings for your print job LaserWriter 8 Page Setup Page Attributes Format for MFP_00C67861 gt Paper Y Orientation Scale 100 e Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document P 273 Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8 6 9 x 3 Click OK to save the Page Setup settings 4 Select Print from the File menu of the application 5 In the dialog box that appears make sure the name of the equipment is selected at the Printer menu and specify the Print settings for your print job 22 8 7 Printer MFP_00C67861 Destination copies 1 4 Collated Pages All Paper Source amp All pages from Auto Default Q First page from Auto Default Remaining from Auto Default e Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document P 274 Print Options f
58. Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is output separately for each copy Output with grouping of each page within a set For example assume that you have a three page job A B C and you want three copies of each page in this order AAA BBB CCC 1 Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be printed at the Number of Copies field Then select Group Copies at the Copy Handling drop down box LX x Number of Copies 5 E Sort Copies wi Opies Copy Handling Color 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is output separately for each page Output in a different direction for each copy NOTE Rotated Sort Copies can be enabled only when printing on Letter A4 or B5 1 Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be printed at the Number of Copies field Then select Rotated Sort Copies at the Copy Handling drop down box Number of Copies 5 m Copy Handling Group Copies bl Sort Copies Group Copies Color Rotated Sort Copies 254 Printing Guide Printing from Windows 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is output in different direction for each copy Enlarge Reduce Printing You can automatically enlarge or reduce a document image to fit a specif
59. Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Installing the Client Software for Novell Printing This section describes how to install the client software for Novell printing on NetWare print server environments There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for Novell printing e Using the installer in the Client CD ROM 132 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows When you insert the Client CD ROM into your CD ROM drive the installer automatically starts You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer If you want to install printer drivers as well as other client software this method is convenient P 133 Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer e Using Point and Print You can install the printer driver by double clicking network queues on the NetWare If the NetWare has been set up for NDPS printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so that the Client CD ROM is not required However other client software cannot be installed using this method P 140 Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print e Using Add Printer Wizard When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment using Point and Print install the printer drivers using the A
60. Client Software for Windows 117 16 Click Finish Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard fou have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Shared as lt Not Shared Port MFP 00C67861 print Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Default Yes Test page Yes To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel e Start copying files 17 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installing the Client Software for Peer to Peer Printing This section describes how to set up the client software for Peer to Peer printing which is avail able for the local area network over TCP IP You can set up the printer drivers for Peer to Peer printing by installing the printer drivers using the installer in the Client CD ROM Then you install and configure the peer to peer port using the Peer to Peer utility to configure the connection PREPARATION Before operating the following setup check with your system administrator to make sure of the following This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The TCP IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer NOTE Peer to Pee
61. Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command rm opt toshiba tap filter queue name 3 Enter the following command rm opt oshiba tap filter queue name conf 4 Enter the following command fZmquedev q queue name d dev queue names 194 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 5 Enter the following command rmque q queue name gt Deleting a print queue manually on Linux 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command rm opt toshiba tap interface queue name 3 Enter the following command rm opt toshiba tap interface queue name conf 4 Enter the following command opt toshiba tap bin modPrintcap d queue name D Enter the following command ls opt toshiba tap bin flag queue name gt 6 If the above file exists enter the following command opt toshiba tap bin printconf import d queue name rm opt toshiba tap bin flag queue name T Restart your Ipd Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUnix 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command lpadmin x queue name gt 3 Enter the following command rm etc lp interfaces queue name conf Installing the CUPS The Admin s Client CD ROM also includes the CUPS files that enable the CUPS print system Installing the CUPS 1 Insert the Admin s Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Log on to
62. Envelope DL e Statement e A5 e 8K e Envelope Cho 3 e Computer e A6 e 16K e Envelope You 4 e 12x 18 e B4 e B5 SUPPLEMENTS The default paper size will be Letter or A4 according to the regional setting in the Windows e A3 Wide is displayed only for the european version and 12 x 18 is displayed only for the US version e 12 x 18 and A3 Wide are not available when the Single staple Finisher is installed For e STUDIOAS11 Series Envelope COM10 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope Cho 3 and Enve lope You 4 are not available for e STUDIO4511 Series For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series A3 Wide and 12 x 187 are not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 218 Printing Guide Printing from Windows 2 Manual Scale Check this box to manually enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce an image You can set any integer from 25 to 400 for the zoom ratio This is not available when you enable the Booklet printing 3 Print Paper Size Select this to enlarge or reduce a page image to fit exactly in the selected paper size If you do not enable enlarge or reduce printing select Same as Original Paper Size Also when you want to enable Tab printing select Letter Tab or A4 Tab here When you select Letter Tab or A4 Tab the Primary Tab dialog box appears B Primary Tab Dialog rz Select a Tab manufacturer for your tab pr
63. Font Keys r Font Downloading Changes from the Default Settings may affect printing performance or appearance Preferred Format amp Type 1 TrueType mTl Always download needed fonts E Never generate Type 42 format OOG 1 Annotate Font Keys Check this to annotate font keys for printing 2 Preferred Format This sets the whether Type 1 fonts or TrueType fonts are used for printing e Type 1 Select this to print fonts using Type 1 fonts e TrueType Select this to print fonts using TrueType fonts 3 Always Download needed fonts Check this to always download fonts for printing 4 Never generate Type 42 format Check this not to generate the Type 42 format Job Logging In the Job Logging menu you can set the error handling and generate job logs E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 m Destination r Job Logging D lfthereis aPostScript error p Job Documentation Folder amp No special reporting 2 Summarize on screen t2 Print detailed report Job Documentation Generate Job Copy O Generate Job Log Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 217 1 If there is PostScript error This sets whether reporting the error or not e No special reporting Select this not to report an error e Summarize on screen Select this to report on the screen when a PostScript error occurs e Print detailed report Select this to print a
64. Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 1 Finisher Tray 2 Paper Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 2 Inner Tray Paper Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Inner Tray Hole Punch Full in Finisher Please Clear Hole Punch Dispose the punched paper bits Refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for instruction Job Separator Upper Paper Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper form the Job Separator Upper Tray Job Separator Lower Paper Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Job Separator Lower Tray Offset Tray Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Offset Tray Printer Output Error Please Contact Service Technician Contact your service representative Printer Input Error Please Contact Service Technician Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors Contact your service representative 363 Details Description Contact Ser Auto Document Feeder Error Contact your service representative vice Techni Please Contact Service cian Technician Alignment Error in Auto Contact your service representative Document Feeder Please Contact Service Technician Motor Error in Auto Docu Contact your service representative ment Feeder Please Contact Service Technician I F Error in Auto Document Contact your service representative Feeder
65. Halftone This sets how halftone is printed e Detail Select this to print halftone in detail e Smooth Select this to print halftone smoothly For e STUDIOAS11 Series The Halftone option is not available for e STUDIO4511 Series 5 Smoothing Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly 6 Toner Save Check this to print in the toner save mode 308 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh Printing from UNIX Printing from an Application This section describes how to print from a UNIX workstation NOTE Before attempting to print from a UNIX workstation make sure all the UNIX Filters are installed in your workstation P 185 Installing Client Software for UNIX Considerations and Limitations B This equipment acts only as a filter and not as a complete driver The size and order of the printed pages cannot be modified B The UNIX filters do not support the following engine supplied features e Enlarge Reduce printing e Rotate Sort e N up printing e Watermarks e Cover Sheets e Sheet Insertion e Scheduled Print e Print to Overlay File e Store to e Filing e Use Overlay Image B Linux uses the lptap command to send a file to this equipment Since Ip is not supported in all versions of Linux the Iptap command should be used instead B AIX supports printing using the qdaemon This can be invoked by the user with the com mands Ip lpr or qprt In order to use the filter either Ip or qprt shou
66. High res Transparency Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 307 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Color Resolution Type option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 2 Pure Black amp Gray Select whether printing the document in gray scale e Off Select this to print the document in color mode e Pure Black only Select this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all colors cyan magenta and yellow is 100 e Pure Black and Pure Gray Select this to print the contents in black where the per centage of all color cyan magenta and yellow is 100 C 100 gt K 100 M 100 gt K 100 Y 100 gt K 100 and print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color cyan magenta and yellow is the same percentage C M Y n gt K n For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Pure Black amp Gray option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 3 Black Over Print Select this when printing background content that has black text overlayed on it If this is not enabled the background of the black content will not print When you print a document that has any of its content on background with black text overlayed enable this option For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Black Over Print option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 4
67. InstallShield lt Back Cancel e fany printer drivers have been installed on your computer the confir mation message appears Continue to next step 94 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e If no printer driver has been installed on your computer it starts copy ing files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed when copying is completed Skip to Step 14 13 If the following message appears click Yes to set the indi cated printer driver to be the default printer driver or click No to not change the default printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client X p Do you want to set the Following Printer as the Default Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 mm NN 14 Click Finish TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer Setup will launch the Read Me file and the TopAccessDocMon Choose from the options below IV Yes want to view the Read Me file IV Yes want to launch the Top amp ccessDocMon now e Ifyou selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation the system may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAccessDocMon NOTE The Installer may ask you to restart your computer If it does select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish to r
68. Installing the Client Software for Parallel Printing eeseessssesssss 25 Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer 25 Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play sese 31 Windows 99 Mg ia gp edt coU ME me obese a seas 31 WINGOWS ZOO 0 MER cT PEE PTEAN 34 Windows XP Server 2009 eet aa esc oes tas Cete eoe cete seated n edia 37 Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard 40 Windows 99 MB ix ence E ea pensum T s D UM PEL es 40 WIndows NT A0 M 44 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 esses nnne 48 Installing the Client Software for USB Printing eeeseeeseeeeeeees 53 Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play seeseseeeeess 54 WV OWS DOU Csaba hi ect A eicit ocu t testi os VF I Ru um 54 WVIFIDOWS 2000 MM p 60 Windows XP Server 2003 5 2 reed eared eet eee ees 63 Installing the Client Software for LPR Printing cccccsssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeees 66 Installation for LPR Printing Using the Installer ssssssessse 66 Windows NT 4 0 sessssssssesseeeeennenenen nennen nennen nennen nennen 66 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 sse 69 Installation for LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard esses 14 bAdIg
69. Letter Select this to print a 1 2 Letter size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet e LT on LD Select this to print a Letter size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Led ger paper to fit on half a sheet Letter e A6 on A5 Select this to print a A6 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on A5 paper to fit on half a sheet A6 Printing Guide Printing from Windows e B6 on B5 Select this to print a B6 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on B5 paper to fit on half a sheet B5 e 1 2 LG on LG Select this to print a 1 2 Legal size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet 1 2 Comp on Comp Select this to print a 1 2 Computer size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet e 1 2 Folio on Folio Select this to print a 1 2 Folio size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet e 1 2 Statement on Statement Select this to print a 1 2 Statement size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet e 1 2 1P LG on 13 LG Select this to print a 1 2 13inchLG size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet e 1 2 8 5SQ on 8 5 SQ Select this to print a 1 2 8 5inchSQ size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on 8 5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet e 32K on 16K Select this to print a 32K size booklet Every
70. Mens aaa t Mee tete 271 Collated Mac OS GOOI oreet ies votos 274 MICOS A ta oscint neon calde ists ESO 29 COLON obiecto esteso cud 22 256 Color Matching 2s eese ihres rubeo ipu 276 Color Mode trouien a a 310 Color Resolution Type Mac OS 8 6 0r 9 cene 287 IMAG OSA aea A 307 Compress Bitmap ccccccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeees 238 Configuration sssess 206 207 246 Configuring the Options ssss 204 Copies Mac O9 5 0 Of OX aseo ossis 274 MIC B0 dT TEM ER 29 Copies amp Pages sasuke esheets 291 CO py Handini oeiee 221 254 Cover Page MaG OS S20 OF 9X aeda va aocseo edet 276 IMAC 8 85 dir 297 Cover Page Paper Source suss ZA COV Cr Paice Ty Be o nsasu clou sectae etos debitas 297 D DC Department Code 300 Department Code Mae OS S OOL IK acri osdlpscub etched ae 284 MICOS X reae e e 300 UND io n udebo qudd cedes 315 W 1G OWS sc eod eso ep ERE ede Cree orna ded ds 208 226 Department Code DC On 306 Destination Mac 5 8 0 0r 9 X sciscceiciniacasdctasiesatnaieas 280 IMAC QN P haia 302 INS faecal artesian Mian hematin 311 Mandos steels a 225 IJevice Status ED ies oeste Io toes abet empate nus 341 DIN Document ID Number 301 Discovered De VICE eec Sastre imet 343 Printing Guide INDEX INDEX Discovery Settings Local Discovery Network D
71. PCLSc Bl xl Printer Document View Help Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing Invalid Printer Information G3 Drawer Status Counter Name MFP 00C67861 Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Location Status ide Hole Punch Hoes x Physical Address 00 40 4F 7E 28 55 Add Device Idle 10 10 70 120 g Upper Drawer Letter Plain Paper Available Lower Drawer A3 Plain Paper Available Pedestal Upper Drawer 44 Plain Empty Pedestal Lower Drawer Not Available Stack Feed Bypass Unknown Thick 1 Empty Large Capacity Feeder Not Available e The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears 2 Click Manual Selection TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery f 3 x Monitoring Device Name IPAPXAddrss Location Model CSS TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 CSS TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 CH TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 a Add Discovered Device Name iP PxAddess Location Mode Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection OK Cancel Help e The Manual Selection dialog box appears 3 Enter each item to specify the printer address Manual Selection x IP Address 10 10 70 105 IP Address Name MFP 00C67661 Location Cancel IP Address Enter the IP ad
72. PS EONS ient e ni LM E 373 PS5 Printer DEI Vet serenana Decide Dade bes 19 Pure Black UND a cactudettcustutee det a doit ote fac cu II oTt 319 WANGOWS ooceebioduesos i eads a a aE 243 Pure Black amp Gray Mac OS 8 6 OF Q X assets aes e eet eas 287 IVI ACO A sae HP 308 Printing Guide INDEX Pure Gray INXS Sacts coaacaeeaaneetanine tan aedis tui boenis 319 bun SC 240 243 Q Quality Mac OS 8 608 OU osse cmn EH 286 IVIAC S OS RRND arn ene ene er Pe osi 306 R Refresh Rates cccceecceecccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 330 331 Document Notification eseesss 332 Print Quelle a5 es RE Sd uie Onde 333 Printet Stas obse iisdesees o d open OQU EDS RUIN 332 Remaining from soiein ees ioca ean eec nn tenr 299 Resolution PE EOC Aah yeu Lt ase aide etedes etia 239 DOT aE ence 241 PO Los dutobassis toa titeuaGabea N NE 242 Restore AIS TAUIES uet ee h detis Send id 217 Reverse page order 0 e eee eR 296 IS ht Wat Oli coe Mies edis asta eS Meu 320 Rotate 180 degrees 1 ete 236 Rotated Sort Copies susssee 221 254 Run Font Manager eeessss 245 368 S DO UE IO TT doc Dos cae be iso tesa t etusb Ea dd 240 Save AS TIC a 295 Scale MacOS SOOT OD asaeisusesiende d cmo GR CR 274 MI BP qp 290 Scheduled Print o S bs 224 249 scheduled Print tab idet es reus 347 Scheduler IFAC Bs PM A 295 DEL Divina dane sas E E oa da ito POL AUS taa tuUE 218 SMI Par 25 tent
73. Part Capture Printer Port End Capture Timeout settings Not selected fi 5 seconds Transmission retry 45 seconds Spool Settings Port Settings Cancel 10 Click OK to save settings NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installing the Client Software for IPP Printing This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for IPP printing which is available for Internet connection To set up the printer drivers for IPP printing install the printer drivers by Add Printer Wizard and then install the other software that you require PREPARATION Before installing the printer driver for IPP printing check with your system adminis trator to make sure of the following This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The TCP IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer NOTE IPP Printing is only available for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard Installing the printer driver for IPP printing by Add Printer Wizard The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrator
74. Printer Name or IP Address field e Inthe Port Name field the port name is automatically entered according to the IP address or DNS name entered in the Printer Name or IP Address field Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 71 8 Select Custom and click Settings Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard E Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The detected device is of unknown type Be sure that 1 The device is properly configured 2 The address on the previous page is correct Either correct the address and perform another search on the network by returning to the previous wizard page or select the device type if you are sure the address is correct m Device Type C Standard Generic Network Card Custom Settings lt Back Cancel e The Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor dialog box appears 9 Select LPR at the Protocol option enter Print in the Queue Name field at the LPR Settings option and then click OK Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor D 21x Port Settings Port Name P_i 0 10 70 105 Printer Name or IP Address D 10 70 105 Protocol C Raw LPR m Raw Settings Port Number g 00 LPR Settings Queue Name Pint LPR Byte Counting Enabled r1 SNMP Status Enabled Community Name pubiic SNMP Device Index e The sc
75. Printer name combination may not be supported by some applications Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes e No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT If any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 155 17 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name C Shared Not shared Share Name Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT When you select Shared you can also select the operating systems of printer driv ers that you want to install for clients If you select any operating systems repeat the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems 18 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizard x After your printer is installed you can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel 19 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driv
76. RM MFP 00C67861 Upper Drawer Letter Plain Paper Available 9 Lower Drawer A3 Plain Paper Available Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Pedestal Upper Drawer A4 Plain Empty Pedestal Lower Drawer Not Available Llc Stack Feed Bypass Unknown Thick 1 Empty lees Large Capacity Feeder Not Available Status idle Hole Punch 2 Holes rl Physical Address 00 40 4F 7E 28 55 Add Device QWOOGOCH Idle 10 10 70 120 p yg The printer information includes Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 341 1 Printer Image This displays a visual representation of the printer showing the device status icon when an error condition occurs P 364 Device Status Indicators 2 Name This displays the name of the printer 3 Model This displays the printer model name 4 Location This displays the printer s physical location 5 Status This tells you if the machine is ready for printing 6 Hole Punch This displays the type of hole punch unit installed 7 Physical Address This displays the printer s machine address a unique ID provided by the printer s network card also referred to as the hardware address 8 Printer Information This displays the drawer status icon along with the errors and warnings that have been recorded for the printer Shows drawer status and provides machine information such as toner low door open paper jam etc Also it provides the alert and counter information
77. SNMP Device Index 84 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 10 Click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The detected device is of unknown type Be sure that 1 The device is properly configured 2 The address on the previous page is correct Either correct the address and perform another search on the network by returning to the previous wizard page or select the device type if you are sure the address is correct m Device Type C Standard Generic Network Card Custom Settings lt Back Next gt Cancel 11 Click Finish Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard X Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You have selected a port with the following characteristics SNMP No Protocol LPR print Device 10 10 70 120 Port Name IP 10 10 70 120 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel 12 Click Have Disk Add Printer Wizard P Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use P a Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation Nr disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v5
78. STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series Client InstallSheild Wizard x Select Components E Select the components setup will install l Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install O TopAccessDocMon areas TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PCLE Setup will install the TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 v TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 printer driver on your computer 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14753 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back Cancel TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver For e STUDIO280 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series Client InstallShield Wizard X Select Components im Select the components setup will install Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install Top amp ccessDocMon p Description TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Setup will install the TOSHIBA TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PSL3 e STUDID280 Series PSL3 printer driver on your computer 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14753 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield TN TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Docume
79. Series is installed NOTE When you select Multi Position Stapler or Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch the saddle stitching function will be selectable for printing However saddle stitch ing is available only when the Saddle stitch Finisher is installed Lower Drawer only for e STUDIO280 Series Not Installed Select this when the Lower Drawer is not installed Installed Select this when the Lower Drawer is installed Pedestal Not Installed Select this when no pedestal is installed Pedestal 1 Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal is installed Pedestal 2 Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal and Drawer Module are installed LCF Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed ADU only for e STUDIO280 Series Not Installed Select this when the ADU is not installed Installed Select this when the ADU is installed 5 Close the Chooser Dialog box e The Printer icon is created on the desktop Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Install and configure the printer by the following steps LL P 176 Installing the Macintosh PPD File LL P 177 Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X LL P 182 Configuring the Installable Options Installing the Macintosh PPD File This equipment supports printing from Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Copying the PPD file to Mac OS X 1 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and open y
80. Series Client InstallShield Wizard Welcome Maintenance Program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below Select new program components to add or select currently installed components to remove Repair SP Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup C Remove E Remove all installed components a InstallShield Cancel 4 Uncheck the components that you want to uninstall and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard Add Remove TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Select the components you want to install on your computer Deselect the components you want to remove from your computer ET op4ccessDocMon Description J TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCLB Setup will install the TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c ee te on your J TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 P wi amp gfa TrueType Fonts 13 81 MB of space required on the C drive 4054 37 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back Cancel e Deleting files starts 5 Click Finish TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished updating TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer NOTE If you select all components to be uninstalled the Installer may ask you to restart your computer If it does
81. Series and e STUDIO280 Series 4 Halftone This sets how halftone is printed e Detail Select this to print halftone in detail e Smooth Select this to print halftone smoothly For e STUDIOAS11 Series The Halftone option is not available for e STUDIO4511 Series 5 Smoothing Select whether printing the texts and graphics smoothly 6 Toner Save Select this to print in the toner save mode Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Once you have installed the PPD file as described in Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later on page 176 you can print directly from most Mac OS applications How to Print from Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later In Mac OS X 10 2 4 all writers are managed within the Print Center utility and there is no need to switch the printer Once you add a printer to the Printer List all printers can be selected directly from Print Setup dialog box Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers In Mac OS applications print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box Printing from Macintosh applications 1 Open a file and select Page Setup from the File menu of the application 288 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 2 Select the name of the equipment at the Format for drop down box and specify the Page Setup settings for your print job Page Setup Settings Page Attributes Format for
82. Service Pack 6a e Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 e Windows XP Service Pack 1 e Windows Server 2003 B SMB Printing e Windows 98 Windows 98 Second Edition Recommended e Windows Me e Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 6a e Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 e Windows XP Service Pack 1 e Windows Server 2003 E Peer to Peer Printing e Windows 98 Windows 98 Second Edition Recommended e Windows Me Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 19 20 NOTE B IPP Printing e Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 e Windows XP Service Pack 1 e Windows Server 2003 About Installation Procedure Please find the installation procedure suited to your environment from the following P 20 Parallel Port Connection P 21 USB Connection P 21 Local Area Network over TCP IP P 23 Internet Connection P 24 Novell Printing BBBBE Parallel Port Connection Available for Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Connecting with Parallel cable Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Setting up the LPT1 Printer Connection When this equipment is connected to your computer with a printer cable you can install the printer drivers from the Client CD ROM and set up the printer connection with LPT1 port P 25 Installing the Client Software for Parallel Printing e Parallel printing is available only when t
83. The events list is displayed and you can check on off events that enable or disable notification 330 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon e Document has been printed successfully Check this to notify you when the printer is finished printing the document e Private print document is being held Check this to notify you when a private print job that you have sent is ready for you to walk over to the printer and release e Proof set has been printed Check this to notify you when the printer has printed the first copy of your multi copy job which is ready for your review before releasing and printing the remaining copies e Fax has been transmitted successfully Check this to notify you when the printer has sent a fax when you have sent using the N W Fax driver This is only available when the Fax option is installed to the devices e Document has been cancelled by the printer Check this to notify you when the printer has cancelled the job This can happen when a paper size is not available and the timeout has expired This event occurs only when catastrophic circumstances force the printer to cancel the job such as a missing byte or memory failure Expired private print or proof print jobs are never cancelled by the printer e Document cannot be printed due to error Check this to notify you when the printer is unable to print the job e Printer has a paper jam Check this to notify you when the
84. Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 as a print server it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server For further informa tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server see the Network Adminis trator s Guide SUPPLEMENT You can also perform FTP printing over the TCP IP network For more information about FTP printing please refer to following section P 324 FTP Printing Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 21 22 NOTE SUPPLEMENT NOTE LPR Printing e LPR printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed Available for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Connecting over TCP IP Network Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Setting up the LPR printer connection This equipment allows you to connect using LPR which is available for Windows NT 4 0 Win dows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 If you use Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 LPR printing may be most suitable P 66 Installing the Client Software for LPR Printing e To print with a LPR connection this equipment must be configured to enable LPD Print Service Ask your administrator if the LPD Print Service is enabled SMB Printing e SMB printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed Available for Windows
85. also supports Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 Classic mode Information within the PPD file for Mac OS X works in conjunction with the Print Center on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Planning for Installation NOTE System Requirements To install the printer drivers on a Mac OS computer the following environment is required Display Resolution 1028 x 768 dots or more OS Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x Mac OS X 10 1 Classic Mac OS X 10 2 Classic Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Protocol TCP IP or AppleTalk Ethernet Printer Driver LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8 6 5 or later not required for Mac OS X e Mac OS X 10 2 and its earlier versions of Mac OS X are supported in Classic mode using the PPD file for Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x This equipment also provides the PPD file for Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x Installing the Macintosh PPD File The Macintosh PPD file that is provided in the Client CD ROM can be installed by copying it to the System Folder Extensions Printer Descriptions folder This PPD file supports printing from Mac OS X 8 6 or 9 x and these operating systems running on the Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 Classic Mode Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 169 Copying the PPD file to Mac OS 8 6 or 9 x 1 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and open your language folder in the MacPPD folder 2 Copy the Stufflt file sit to the desktop and extract the Mac i
86. as File Check this to save a print job as a file When this is checked select the file type at the For mat drop down box 2 Format This sets the format of a file to be saved e PDF Select this to save a print job as a PDF file e PostScript Select this to save a print job as a PS file Scheduler In the Scheduler menu you can set when a print job will be sent to the equipment NOTE This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard Scheduler C1 Print Document Now At 10 43 AM C On Hold 2 Priority Medium me 2 Preview Save As PDF 1 Print Document This sets when a print job will be sent to the equipment Now Select this to send a print job now e At Select this to specify the time to send a print job When you select this specify the time to be send The print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until the speci fied time has been reached or you resume the print job to be sent from the queue on Mac OS Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 295 296 On Hold Select this to hold a print job in the queue on Mac OS When you select this the print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until you resume the print job to be sent from the queue on Mac OS 2 Priority Select the priority of a print job Paper Handling In the Paper Handling menu you can set Reverse page order printing and Od
87. as the default printer C Yes e No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT If any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 111 17 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name C Shared Not shared Share Name Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT When you select Shared you can also select the operating systems of printer driv ers that you want to install for clients If you select any operating systems repeat the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems 18 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizard x After your printer is installed you can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel 19 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows 200
88. box appears 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections To continue click Next Bach Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 157 158 4 Select Local printer uncheck the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Local or Network Printer Is the printer attached to your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer Local printer Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer C Network printer lt Back Cancel 5 Select Create a new port and select Local Port in the Type drop down box Then click Next Add Printer Wizard E Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port C Use the following port Pot Description Hae Printer Port TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Seri DEDE Printer Port LPT3 Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM2 Serial Port FAMI Serial Part zi Note Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer Create a new port Type lt Back Cancel e The
89. change the order of fonts to be displayed in the Available Font and Installed Fonts list Sorting by Name Click the Sort menu and click Sort by Name The fonts are listed alphabetically by the font family name Sorting by Font Type Click the Sort menu and click Sort by Font Type The fonts are grouped according to their technology type TrueType Type 1 or screen bitmap and within each group the names will be listed alphabetically Inverting the alphabetical Order The lists can be inverted by clicking on the Sort menu and Inverse Sort Printing Guide Managing Fonts with Font Manager 371 Internal Fonts List Internal PCL Fonts List 0 Courier 1 CG Times 2 CG Times Bold 3 CG Times Italic 4 CG Times Bold Italic 5 CG Omega 6 CG Omega Bold 7 CG Omega Italic 8 CG Omega Bold Italic 9 Coronet TO Clarendon Condensed T4 Univers Medium 12 Univers Bold 13 Univers Italic 14 Univers Bold Italic 15 Univers Medium Condensed 16 Univers Condensed Bold E7 Univers Medium Condensed Italic 18 Univers Condensed Bold Italic 19 Antique Olive 20 Antique Olive Bold 24 Antique Olive Italic 22 Garamond Antiqua 23 Garamond Halbfett 24 Garamond Kursiv 25 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 26 Mrigold 2 Albertus Medium 28 Albertus Extra Bold 29 Arial 30 Arial Bold 531 Arial Italic 32 Arial Bold Italic 33 Times New Roman 34 Times New Roman Bold 35 Times New Roman Italic 36 Times New Roman Bold Italic
90. completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows NT 4 0 REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows NT 4 0 as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start select Settings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Programs CN Documents 3 Control Panel i A Taskbar e ab Ww Lu v A 44 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2 Double click the Add Printer icon Ls Printers iof x File Edi View Help CA Printers Hae xe ext d Add Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIOA 1 objects selected A e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Select My Computer and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ea This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by All settings will be managed and configured on this computer C Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator Cancel 4 Select LPT1 and click Next Add Printer Wizard x
91. detailed report when a PostScript error occurs 2 Job Documentation This sets whether job logs or job copies are generated or not e Generate Job Copy Check this to generate a job coy If enabled a job coy is gener ated in the folder which 1s specified at the Job Documentation Folder e Generate Job Log Check this to generate a job log If enabled a job coy is gener ated in the folder which 1s specified at the Job Documentation Folder 3 Job Documentation Folder The folder where job copies and job logs are stored is displayed To change the folder click Change and select a different folder Layout In the Layout menu you can set N up printing and 2 Sided printing E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Print on Both Sides Binding Ge oO opo 1 Page per sheet This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet The pages are reduced to fit the selected paper size automatically e 1 Select this if do not wish to enable N up printing e 2 Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet e 4 Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to bottom on one sheet e 6 Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to bottom on one sheet e 9 Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to bottom on one sheet e 16 Select this to
92. er E ceci 239 DS toad E m cadis Gain ufi A 242 Toser Page c EE 228 Insert Pages iussu Dicdasmdesttoresi dus need tugs 259 Installed ctis eotbadesotsel ou Ses rede toas 330 333 Installing IPP PEIDUDP iu ee detto 127 LPRPEODLDU TS 65i peces rbmEu eset seb a aep EEDUE 66 Mag OSC 0 08 DX yanii idonei cxdds 169 MICOS d Pe ME DONS 176 Novell Printing eR Os 132 Parallel Prine 15 uia put ied VN 25 Peer to Peer Printing 4 dt 118 SMB Prnt ceo ets teet Rn 89 TONA CCCI ati Diedede eH Re OU AN 198 INT XS FIETS irni uates sNE 186 WS Be Pin aasenso tue uon E tat 53 Irit BE ocean tossed efogosse Dati betoc ha Poe dedot 276 Interleave Pages Multiple Pages per Sheet 234 265 Standard poissunses eun sedebat 230 259 Internet Connection sass ns ote snais ness lacdeniterticatentade 23 Nig ANCA ooo N 347 INDEX J Job Documentation io hectic Oats 278 Job Documentation Folder 278 JOb EOPBIDIp coo etal ERR RP E ERR US 2T L Larse CAD ACY mirnih as alte dot aur sd ors 247 I dsetWEHGE 8 oot eee 271 Layout Mac OS 8 6 OT 9X acest ep E 278 DAC OS pt T 292 WIN OW Sousa iom eee cae FER 230 WV ACO W S uistiessieodei m eu oett et bius 226 233 Layout Direction DAC OS D p ro 293 Layout CIRC C HOD eR DERE NR tbe 279 LOI MEET booten eR een 320 Left to Right Page Layout DAC B p dcr 290 Local Area Network over TCP IP 21 Local Discovery sedes er ena RU Rn cians 335 336 Lower Draw
93. file net est4511 1 for e STUDIOA4511 Series estbw 1 for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series This is an input file for the man command that supplies online documentation for the printer specific options This file will be installed in opt toshiba tap man man1 A symbolic link will be installed in the usr man man1 directory that will point to the actual location of this file Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 185 Planning for Installation System Requirements For UNIX workstation the following environment is required OS Sun Solaris v2 5 1 2 6 2 7 7 8 8 9 HP UX Version 10 20 11 x IBM AIX 4 1 5 4 3 3 5L SCO UnixWare 7 SCO OpenUnix 8 Red Hat Linux 6 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 8 0 SuSE Linux ver 7 0 8 1 Mandrake Linux ver 7 1 9 Turbo Linux 8 Protocol TCP IP Module Python must be installed NOTE The Python module must be installed on your Unix workstation to enable printing The Python module is usually installed in the usr bin directory Check this direc tory whether the Python module is installed Installing the Printer on UNIX Installing the UNIX Filters UNIX Filters are provided as TAR files for each Operating System You can install them by copying the TAR file into the root directory and extract the file Copying the UNIX filters 1 Insert the Admin s Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Log on to the root account and copy the TAR file into the root folder e A TAR
94. file for each operating system is included in following folders For Solaris CD ROM solarisfilter usa For HP UX CD ROM hp uxfilter usa For AIX CD ROM aixfilter usa For Linux CD ROM linuxfilter usa For OpenUnix CD ROM openunixfilter usa 3 Enter the following command and check the output e For Solaris uname a Output on screen should be SunOS 186 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX e For HP UX uname a Output on screen should be HP UX e For IBM AIX uname a Output on screen should be AIX e For Linux uname a Output on screen should be Ic m e For OpenUnix uname a Output on screen should be OpenUNIX NOTE Ifthe output is not as above ask your administrator 4 Change to the root directory D Enter the following command e For Solaris tar xvf solaris tar e For HP UX tar xvf Dpuxebar For IBM AIX tar xvf aix tar e For Linux tar xvf linx tar e For OpenUnix tar xvf openunix tar 6 The command extracts all the required files and installs them in the correct locations Continue the procedure for configur ing the print queue P 187 Configuring the Print Queue Configuring the Print Queue After you copy UNIX Filters you can configure the print queue There are two ways to configure the print queue one is creating a print queue using est4511add estbwadd and the other is creating a print queue manually without using est4511add estbwadd LL
95. following This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The TCP IP setting is correct LPD Printing Service is enabled on this equipment 170 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 1 Start the Desktop Printer Utility Assistants e The folder where contains the Desktop Printer Utility differs depend ing on the Mac OS version If you cannot locate the Desktop Printer Utility search it in the book disk e The New Desktop Printer dialog box appears 2 Make sure LaserWriter 8 is selected in the With drop down menu select Printer LPR and click OK New Desktop Printer With LaserWriter 8 Create desktop printer for printer using LPR e The Macintosh LPR Printer Selection dialog box opens 3 Click Change in the PostScript Printer Description PPD File area oO Untitled 1 E PostScript Printer Description PPD File LPR Printer Selection Desktop Printer Usage Print to LPR lt lt unspecified gt gt With Printer Driver Laser Writer 3 The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears 4 Select the PPD file for the equipment and click Select e he PPD file varies depending on the equipment TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511Series for e STUDIO4511 Series Printing Guide Installing Client Sof
96. for each file even if a number of copies of the job are requested The banner page is sent to the equipment as a separate sub job so that it is never stapled to the document The banner page is printed with the following settings e Copies 1 e Stapling off e Orientation portrait e Duplex off e Paper size as requested by the o parameter or the printer s default value Printing Guide Printing from UNIX 321 e The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different values than the job s paper source and media type e Auto paper source selection or the requested banner page source or media type e Output bin as requested by the o parameter or the printer default value e 6 lines per inch e Auto wrap on e Automatic carriage return when a line feed is sent NOTES The banner page is designed to fit Statement A5 and bigger paper If the paper selected is smaller the banner page may wrap onto two 2 pages e The default is that the banner page is printed before the job so that it is in the correct stacking order e When the language is set to raw the banner is always disabled e The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different values than the job s paper source and media type If a banner paper source is not specified then the auto source command is sent If a banner media type is not spec ified then no banner media type command is sent so the
97. have installed on this equipment you can choose to sort group fold and staple your documents including saddle stitching and punch binding holes along the top or side edge B Sophisticated Document Layout and Assembly Options You can choose whether to print your document as you have set it up in the application or to impose printer driven document layout options such as printing in Book Format or printing Mul tiple Pages per Sheet Additionally the printer drivers provide the ability to print selected pages on different media This includes printing front and back covers inserting sheets at predefined positions within the document or interleaving pages so that every other page is inserted blank or printed on a differ ent type of media B Watermark and Image Overlay Support Watermarks are a great way to subtly convey useful information about your printed documents Common watermarks are Confidential Draft and Original Several watermarks have been pre defined for use with your documents or you can create and save your own custom watermarks Watermarks consist of text Image Overlays can be any combination of text graphics or other document elements Printing watermarks consumes fewer resources than using Image Overlays so you should use watermarks wherever possible particularly when printing speed is an issue Printing Guide Features and Functions About the Client CD ROM For Windows The contents
98. in Auto Docu ment Feeder Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Toner Full Used Toner Container Full Please Replace Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Toner Container Toner Empty Black Toner Empty Please Refill Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Black Toner Cyan Toner Empty Please Refill Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Cyan Toner Magenta Toner Empty Please Refill Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Magenta Toner Yellow Toner Empty Please Refill Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Yellow Toner 361 362 Toner Near Empty Details Black Toner Cartridge Depleted Please Install New Cartridge Before System is Empty Description Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Black Toner Cyan Toner Cartridge Depleted Please Install New Cartridge Before System is Empty Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Cyan Toner Magenta Toner Cartridge Depleted Please Install New Cartridge Before System is Empty Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Magenta Toner Yellow Toner Cartridge Depleted Please Install New Cartridge Before System is Empty Re
99. in a vertically direction so the pages can be bound and turned over right and left Tablet Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertical reversal motion so the pages can be bound and turned over up and down 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is printed on both side of paper in the specified direction Printing Guide Printing from Windows 257 Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources You can print paper for covers back covers or for insert between pages by feeding from differ ent paper source This is useful when you want to print or insert a color cover and color sheets in front of every chapter in a document SUPPLEMENTS _ A front cover can be also printed or inserted for booklet printing by setting it in the 258 Booklet window P 260 Printing Booklets e A front cover and back cover can be also printed or inserted for N up printing by set ting it in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window P 263 Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet Printing or inserting a front cover and back cover 1 Display the Standard window of the Layout tab 2 To print or insert a front cover check the Use Front Cover box and select the drawer where the cover paper is loaded at the Source drop down box Then select whether inserting a blank cover or printed front cover at the Print Style drop d
100. installer in the Client CD ROM Then you install and configure the LPR port to configure the connection P 66 Installation for LPR Printing Using the Installer Using Add Printer Wizard When you want to install the printer drivers without using the installer or when you want to install the same printer driver for another equipment install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard P 74 Installation for LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard Before operating the following setup check with your system administrator to make sure of the following This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The TCP IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer LPR Printing is only available for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Installation for LPR Printing Using the Installer Install the client software using the installer in the Client CD ROM first then configure the LPR port in each printer driver The procedure to configure the LPR port differs depending on the version of Windows used LL LL P 66 Windows NT 4 0 P 69 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4 0 Configuring the LPR port for Windows NT 4 0 1 Install the client software using the installer in the Client1 CD
101. job Front Cover printing is also available with Booklet printing If can be set in the Book let window Front Cover printing Back Cover printing and Inserting Page are also available with N up printing They can be set in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window Printing Guide Printing from Windows NOTE Cover printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled amp f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 3 x Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About Standard C Booklet C Multiple Pages per Sheet Use Front Cover vA Ya Use Back Cover iull Letter Insert Pages Ice Automati 8 ES EO Pit s D Text j pecity the page number t nsert f mmas t pe ry more than one page Profile None Interleave Pages 3OUrce Automatic 4 Save As J Restore Defaults Graphics Cancel Help 1 Use Front Cover This sets front cover printing which allows you to insert or print a cover on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab To enable cover printing check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used Source Select the location from where a cover sheet 1s to be fed NOTE The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration t
102. listed in the printer driver can also be set from an application for example collation However using collation in the application may cause problems In that case use the driver option to perform the function rather than setting it from the application But depending on the application settings such as the orientation may need to be set in the appli cation or the printer driver or both The application may not set up the file properly for printing on this equipment and may also take longer to process In order to print properly from the application that you are using please see the section about printing in the applica tion s manual How to Print Once you have installed the printer driver and configured it properly you can print directly from most Windows applications Simply choose the Print command from within your application You can print using the various functions by setting print options on the printer driver Printing from Windows applications 1 Open a file and select Print from the File menu of the appli cation e The Print dialog box appears 2 Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and Click Properties RS Ab xl Printer Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c fxg Properties Status Ready Type TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Where IP 10 10 70 120 Comment Printto file Print range Copies All Number of copies 1 H C Page from ef 3 3 F2 l3 v Co
103. low resolution and detailed image quality Mono Low res Smooth Select this to print in black and white with low resolution and smoothing image quality Color Low res General Select this to print in color with low resolution and general image quality Color Low res Photo Select this to print in color with low resolution and photo image quality Color Low res Presentation Select this to print in color with low resolution and pre sentation image quality Color Low res LineArt Select this to print in color with low resolution and line art image quality Color High res General Select this to print in color with high resolution and general image quality Color High res Photo Select this to print in color with high resolution and photo image quality Color High res Presentation Select this to print in color with high resolution and presentation image quality Color High res LineArt Select this to print in color with high resolution and line art image quality Color Low res Transparency Select this to print in color with low resolution on the transparency sheet Color High res Transparency Select this to print in color with high resolution on the transparency sheet NOTE When the optional expansion memory is not installed the job will not be printed if 5 tt you select Color High res General Color High res Photo Color High res Presen tation Color High res LineArt or Color
104. lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT If any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 79 17 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name C Shared Not shared Share Name Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT When you select Shared you can also select the operating systems of printer driv ers that you want to install for clients If you select any operating systems repeat the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems 18 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizard x After your printer is installed you can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel 19 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 The following describes an inst
105. of error For more details on resolving the error refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function or consult your network administrator 358 Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors Message Description The yellow toner is Empty One of the toner cartridges is empty Replace it The magenta toner is Empty The cyan toner is Empty The black toner is Empty The used toner container is The toner bag is full Replace the toner bag full TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages The following table shows the printer status messages displayed in the Device Status tab and helps you to find more information about resolving it Status Details Description Paper Empty Paper Empty in Upper Add paper in the Upper Drawer Drawer Please Add Paper Paper Empty in Lower Add paper in the Lower Drawer Drawer Please Add Paper Paper Empty in Pedestal Add paper in the Pedestal Upper Drawer Upper Drawer Please Add Paper Paper Empty in Pedestal Add paper in the Pedestal Lower Drawer Lower Drawer Please Add Paper Paper Empty in Large Capac Add paper in the Large Capacity Feeder ity Feeder Please Add Paper Paper Empty in Stack Feed Add paper in the Stack Feed Bypass Bypass Please Add Paper Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors 359 360 Cover Open Details Platen Cover Open Please Close Cover Description Close the Platen Cover Front Cover Ope
106. page source cannot be set to manual feed The paper size always has priority over the paper source Example The command to specify that the banner page paper source is the LCF is lp o btandem filename Banner Media Type The banner page paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value bmtype Plain The paper source that contains Plainl paper is requested l bmtype Tran The paper source that contains transparency slides is requested sparency bmtype Thic The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is requested k1 bmtype Thic The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is requested k2 bmtype Thic The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is requested k3 The paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used to print the banner page The command to specify that the banner page should print on a colored media type is lp o bmtype Plainl filename PS Specific Options Some of the options only apply to the PS files Black Over Print The black over print mode can be set using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value blackoverprint Disable the black over print mode 0 blackoverprint Enable the black over print mode Example Th
107. pooling i Cancel 9 Click Have Disk Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AGFA ArcuSet 1NNNSF vA 3 z Have Disk lt Back Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 10 Click Browse Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK cas selected and then click OK LOK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from Eo 2 Browse e The A is not accessible message appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 153 11 Click Cancel Locate File Ed C3 A is not accessible The device is not ready Retry Cancel e The Locate File dialog box appears 12 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 13 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT 4 0 is located and click Open Look in a Usa e File name eS4c5cNT at Cancel Files of type Setup Information in e
108. print images from 16 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to bottom on one sheet 4 Down Before Across Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet e 6 Down Before Across Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet 278 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh e 9 Down Before Across Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet e 16 Down Before Across Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged verti cally from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet 2 Layout direction This sets pages to be printed from left to right or right to left It is available only when the N up printing printing a page on multiple sheets is set 3 Border Select whether a border line is to be drawn on each page It is available only when the N up printing printing a page on multiple sheets is set e None Select this if no border line to be drawn Single hairline Select this to draw a single hairline for the border Single thin line Select this to draw a single thin line for the border e Double hairline Select this to draw a double hairline for the border e Double thin line Select this to draw a double thin line for the border 4 Print on Both Sides Check this to print on both sides of the
109. printed on the inserted sheet e When you select Print on both sides of page specified page and the next page will be printed on the both sides of the inserted sheet D Set other print options you require and click OK 6 Click OK or Print to send a print job e A front cover and back cover are printed or inserted for output Interleaving Pages This feature is useful when you want to insert paper of a different type or from another source between every page of your print job For example you could use this option to insert blank colored sheets between overhead transparencies SUPPLEMENTS interleaving pages can also be enabled for N up printing by setting it in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window P 263 Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet Inserting sheets every page of a print job 1 Display the Standard window of Layout tab 2 To insert sheets between every page check the Interleave Pages box and select the drawer where the paper for a cover is loaded at the Source drop down box v Interleave Pages Source Lower Drawer Duplicate 3 To print the previous page on interleaved sheets check on Duplicate box e This equipment prints every previous page on interleaved sheets which are inserted after the page so that you can duplicate a docu ment Printing Guide Printing from Windows 259 260 4 Set other print options you require and click OK 5 Click OK or Print
110. program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder Existing Folders Administrative T ools Startup InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f you want to change the program folder rename the folder in the Program Folders field e The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed 10 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files f Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings TARGET DIRECTORY C Program Files TOSHIBASTOSHIBA e STUDIO Client The following components will be installed to Target Directory of System Top amp ccessDocMon The following components will be installed to System Folder TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCLE TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c b InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f any printer drivers have been installed on your computer the confir mation message appears Continue to next step e f no printer driver has been installed on your computer it starts copy ing files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed when copying is completed Skip to Step 12 11
111. search for the device TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows is now ready to install the best driver for this device Click Back to select a different driver or click Next to continue Location of driver z E S_MESPCLSC USASES 4CSCSS INF You can type a name for this printer or you can use the name supplied below When you have finished click Next Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Your Windows based programs will use this printer as the default printer lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer 18 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizard After your printer is installed Windows can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel e Start copying files Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 59 19 Click Finish agg TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c ii Windows has finished installing the software that your new hardware device requires E Cancel 20 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver
112. searching the equipment the SNMP communication will be enabled For the instructions on how to search the equipment refer to the instructions of TopAccessDocMon P 335 Searching for a Printer 3 If you want to update option settings automatically when the Configuration tab is opened check on Update Automati cally amp f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 2 x General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About Pedestal Pedestal 1 m Finisher Finisher Hole Punch Unit 2 Holes Upper Drawer Letter Sd Paper Type Plain Y Lower Drawer A3 Y Paper Type Plain Y Pedestal Upper A4 Paper Type Plain m lain ad Large Capacity Letter Paper Type Plain Y Bypass Feeder Automatic m Paper Type Plain z Profile Ne rj Memory 256MB Save As D elete TM v Enable SNMP Communication Restore Defaults Update Now Update Automatically DK Cancel Apply Help 4 Click Apply and OK to save settings e For more information about each item see descriptions about the Configuration Tab P 246 Configuration Tab Setting the Department Code When this equipment is managed by department codes you have to enter your department code on the printer driver This allows a network administrator to check the number of copies printed from specific depart ment members Als
113. select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish to restart your computer 166 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard If only printer drivers are installed by Add Printer Wizard or Point and Print you can uninstall them by deleting the printer icons from the Printers folder Deleting printer drivers 1 Open Printers folder select the printer icon that you want to delete and press the Delete key e When using Windows 98 Me or Windows NT 4 0 uninstallation has finished e When using Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 continue to the next step 2 Click the File menu and select Server Properties ioi x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ei Open Asearch GyFolders Um GE X A Ea Server Properties Create Shortcut Delete Rename 4dd Printer Properties Close The Add Printer wizard gives you step by step instructions for installing a printer To install a new printer double click the Add Printer icon Windows 2000 Support B e The Print Server Properties dialog box appears 3 Display the Drivers tab Select the printer drivers that you want to delete and click Remove Forms Ports Drivers Advanced gy T TAKE02 Installed printer drivers Name Environment Version Acrobat PDF Writer Intel Windows NT 4 0 or 2000 2000 Intel Add Remove Update Properties
114. space available on the C drive InstallShield TN TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Check this to install the PCL5c printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver Agfa TrueType Fonts Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts For e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series Client InstallSheild Wizard x Select Components am Select the components setup will install a Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to instal r Description wi TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PCLG e ete yer the TOSHIBA e 50 Series PSL3 m TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 s printer driver on your computer 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14753 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield TN TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver 136 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows For e STUDIO280 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO2Z80 Series Client InstallShield Wizare x Select Components Select
115. teen e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 8 Click Browse Install From Disk E x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from m z Browse e The Locate File dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 159 9 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 10 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 is located and click Open Look in ausa E Ck EJ My g File name es 4c5c2k inf Y My Network P Cancel Files of type e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 11 Click OK Install From Disk 3 X Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from E NW2K XP 2003XPCLBCNUSA Se Browse 12 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which prin
116. test page lt Back Cancel 12 The printer driver is installed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver 144 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network with Windows Explorer and double click a queue When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode open the NetWare file server and double click the queue for the equipment loxi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ei Back gt j Qsearch Gyrolders C MG Ui X A Address 1 Nwsry s MNwsrv mfp queue 1 object s selected AL When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode browse the NDS tree and context and double click the queue for the equipment ixi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ei Back gt GSearch L Foders C4 x Ui X wa Ed Address fa depti org O dea Li T depti org Org mfp_queue depti org n object s sel
117. the equipment ct Dept Ml x File Edt View Go Favorites Help e A 8 X EB s Back Forward Up Map Drive Disconnect Cut Copy Address IE Network Neighborhood m Mfp printer Depti ndsX cn mfp quet gt l 1 object s selected e The Printers dialog box appears 2 Click Yes Printers i Before you can use the printer nds cn mfp_queue ou dept o org it must be set up on your computer Do you want Windows to set up the printer and continue this operation e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 141 3 Select whether printing MS DOS based programs and click Next Add Printer Wizard Do you print from MS DOS based programs gesessen Cancel e When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for each Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker the printer driver is automatically installed Skip to Step 10 e Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker the Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears Continue to the next step 4 Click Have Disk ag Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ca installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Print
118. the network click Network printer Local printer v Automatically detect and insta Network printer lt Back Cancel 5 Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intra net and enter http IP address 631 Print in the URL field Add Printer Wizard 3 Locate Your Printer How do you want to locate your printer If you don t know the name of the printer you can browse for one on the network What do you want to do Type the printer name or click Next to browse for a printer Name Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet URL http 771 0 10 70 105 631 Print lt Back Cancel Enter the IP address of this equipment instead of IP address Example IP address 10 10 70 105 http 10 10 70 105 631 Print e f your network uses a DNS or WINS server enter the printer name of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS instead of IP address Example Print Server Name Mfp 00c67861 http Mfp 00c67861 631 Print e When you connect from the Internet enter the FQDN of this equip ment provided from DNS instead of IP address Example URL mfp 00c67861 toshiba com http mfp 00c67861 toshiba com 63 1 Print SUPPLEMENT If an administrator has enabled the IPP Port80 Enabled option on this equipment you can exclude the port number from the URL i e http 192 168 255 48 Print 6 Click Next e The Connect to Printer dialog box appear
119. the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Print Style This selects how you want to print a cover e Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank cover e Print on both sides of page Select this to print the first two pages and last two pages on both sides of a cover Printing Guide Printing from Windows 231 NOTE If Print on both sides of page is selected but there is only one page for the last page printed on the cover the last page is printed inside of the back cover page and the back cover page will be blank 232 Printing Guide Printing from Windows Layout Tab Multiple Pages per Sheet Window In the Multiple Pages per Sheet window you can enable N up printing NOTE N up printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled amp f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 xl Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About C Standard C Booklet Multiple Pages per Sheet Number of pages per sheet 2 Pages Left to Right M Draw Borders Around Pages Use Front Cover f Letter Ad a Jas Use Back Cover ICE Automati Text Profile None Save As Delete Restore Defaults Graphics Interleave Pages O0 Oo Cancel Apply Help 1 Number of pages per sheet This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet The pages are reduced to fi
120. the root account and copy the GZIP file into the usr share cups model directory e A GZIP file is included in the CUPS USA folder in the CD ROM 3 Enter the following command Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 195 196 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 For e STUDIO4511 Series cp TOSHIBA EST4511 CUPS gz usr share cups model For e STUDIO450 Series cp TOSHIBA EST450 CUPS gz usr share cups model For e STUDIO280 Series cp TOSHIBA EST280 CUPS g2 usr share cups model Enter the following command service lpd stop e When using the Red Hat Linux continue to the next step e When using other than the Red Hat Linux skip to step 8 When using the Red Hat Linux enter the following command fusr oan redhat swicCch printer e The redhat switch printer dialog box appears Select CUPS and click OK e The information dialog box appears Click OK Enter the following command Service cups start Enter the following command usr bin cupscontig e he Common UNIX Printing System page appears Click the Manage Printers link e The Printer page is displayed Click Add Printer e The Prompt dialog box appers Enter the user name and password that has the Super User privilege and click OK e he Admin page is displayed Enter the printer name in the Name field and click Con tinue Select Internet Printing Protocol http
121. x Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Y ou have selected a port with the following characteristics SNMP Yes Protocol LPR Print Device 10 10 70 105 Port Name IP 10 10 70 105 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel e The screen returns to the Printer Ports dialog box Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 13 NOTE SUPPLEMENTS 74 12 Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box Available port types New Port Type Mew Port 13 Make sure the created LPR port is checked in the Print to the following port list and click Close TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties x 2 xl General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About ye TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port s Documents will print to the first free d port checke L COM1 Serial Port lCOM2 Serial Port lCOM3 Serial Port lCOM4 Serial Port O FILE Print to File IP_10 Standard TCP IP Port Add Pott Delete Port Configure Port T Enable bidirectional upport Enable printer pooling e Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installation for LPR Printing by Add Pri
122. z Fatwa tint 2 Sided Printing Book Cancel Apply Help e The Confirm Profile Delete dialog box appears 2 Click Yes to delete the selected profile Printing Guide Printing from Windows 215 Print Options This section describes print options in each tab of the printer driver This section will help you to find the description of specific print options or understand the functions for each print option TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences D Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About l 2 Original Paper Size Letter 8 172 x 11 3 Manual Scale 100 2 Print Paper Size Same as Original Size v Paper Source Automatic v ul Paper T ype Plain Orientation Portrait M Letter Number of Copies 1 E EO i Copy Handling Sort Copies m Graphics Color Automatic v Profile None z Staple None Y Cave s JEIBIE Hole Punch None m Restore Defaults 2 Sided Printing None z 5 1 Printer Name Displays the name given to the printer driver when it was installed or the name it displays on the icon in the Printer folder 2 Menu Tabs The menu items of the printer driver are displayed as tabs Clicking on a tab will display the contents of the selected tab The tabs displayed vary depending on the way the print proper ties are displayed e Setup Tab The Setup tab contains bas
123. 0 Bypass Feeder Paper Type This sets the paper type set in the Stack Feed Bypass Printing Guide Printing from Windows 247 11 Memory Select the size of memory installed For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only 32MB is selectable for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 12 Enable SNMP Communication Check this to enable obtaining the configuration information from this equipment 13 Update Now Click this to obtain the configuration information from this equipment immediately This is available only when Enable SNMP Communication is checked NOTE If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly the message The address of your printer could not be located Would you like to find it will be displayed when you click Update Now If it is displayed click Yes and search for the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box After searching the equipment the SNMP communication will be enabled For the instructions on how to search the equipment refer to the instructions of TopAccess DocMon P 335 Searching for a Printer 14 Update Automatically Check this to update the configuration information every time the printer driver is opened This is available only when Enable SNMP Communication is checked NOTE If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly the message The address of your printer could not be located
124. 0 70 105 TOSHIBA e STU Er Select a printer for your printer Consult with your administrator for more Start Discovery information Advanced Manual Selection Device Information http 10 10 70 105 8080 OK Cancel Help e TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and displays the TopAccessDocMon window NOTE If you select a different device from the default printer driver when you run TopAc cessDocMon by selecting TopAccessDocMon from the Document Monitor menu in the task bar or the selected printer driver when you run TopAccessDoMon by selecting a printer driver in the Printers folder and selecting TopAccessDocMon in the File menu the message This printer is different from default printer Continue to open TopAccessDocMon please click Yes is displayed If this message is dis played click No and select a correct device Finding a printer by entering printer address manually 1 Click Yes in the message dialog box to find a printer TopAccessDocMon E X The address of your printer could not be located Would you like to search for it 59 e e The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears 336 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 2 Click Manual Selection TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery E x Name IPAPX Address Location Model Er Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discove
125. 0 Series Select a PostScript Printer Description File C3 Printer Descriptions LaserWriter Pro 405v2011 110 LaserWriter Pro 600v2010 130 LaserWriter Pro 630v2010 130 Laserwriter Pro 810 LaserWriter Pro 810f LaserWriter Select 360 LaserWriter Select 360f LaserWriter Select 610 7 TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 1Series Printer Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 1 Series PS 4 Select each option according to the configuration of this equipment and click OK Current Printer Description File PPD Selected TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511Series nstallable Options Finisher Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch Pedestal Pedestal 2 Finisher Not Installed Select this if a finisher is not installed Single Position Stapler Select this when the Single staple Finisher only for e STUDIO3511 e STUDIO350 and e STUDIO280 Series is installed Multi Position Stapler Select this when the Multi staple Finisher or Sad dle stitch Finisher is installed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 175 Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch Select this when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed Job Separator Select this when the Job Separator only for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series is installed Offset Tray Select this when the Offset Tray only for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280
126. 0 XP Server 2003 The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 112 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start and select Printers in Settings Windows 2000 or select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Server 2003 Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults The Printers folder is opened 2 Double click the Add Printer icon ox Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help q Back gt fg search Gyrolders Ug Ui Xx A E adres mites 0 mj A o TS 1s TOSHIBA LJ dd Printe Printers e STUDIO4 Add Printer The Add Printer wizard gives you step by step instructions For installing a printer To install a new printer double click the Add Printer icon Windows 2000 Support n object s selected e When using the Windows XP Server 2003 click Add a printer in the Printer Tasks menu e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections To continue click Ne
127. 2 Original Paper Size sssse 218 255 Outer Margin UND Qiestsuatu deos ette ona odo fie tado oed 318 Windows sonia einen 231 262 OUT DUG Bil gione tots ooo tati bres cas idu 311 Output Document Layout 230 261 OUIpUL POLIT siicc dial eco Lodel R 238 Output Options eeeeseseeen 295 P Page Attributes Mac O5 5 0 0f 9 Xc dust miris interius 273 Mac OSX esc 290 Page Nemeth 12er ra er rh 319 Page per Sheet Mac O5 5 0 0f 9 X derese dene deiode 278 MACOSX cottsssss doe t Does presi tempus 292 PAPC CC nodos uiis et uitetrets 298 Paper Handling MacOS Kup 296 Paper Soure d ain bs aste n ud 220 Paper Type CAD tecta Seco ang MD dacao bei Oboe dedo 312 WAG OWS aoo Siar sedan iodtesertiedaten tials 220 Parallel Port Connection 20 CTAB ON S idiot edetct ptos aculeo etim dos dreded 372 PCL Oe Printer DAVET eee 19 PCLO Printer Driver 5 uii tries a 19 Pedestal iiiter samonmencubanseanenamunmaactesies 246 Pedestal LOWED ieusssenedtesmediee ideas pad auus 247 Pl edestal D DDeE anean eniin isdes 247 Peer to Peer Utility 5 oii RO irren 18 Plug and Play Parallel Printing oia reete deut 31 CSBOPTIBIUIS det tes nte tite nen 54 Point and Print uberes 100 140 Printing Guide INDEX INDEX POSTS CIDE ETOF 255 doit o eu 298 PostScript Printer Description File 169 PostScript Settings 1 237 238 Preferred POrmial 2 ate
128. 2 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AREA ApeiGet 1NNNGE WR 2 fad Windows Update Have Disk tees The Install From Disk dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 85 13 Click Browse Install From Disk E E x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive m selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from m Browse e The Locate File dialog box appears 14 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 15 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 is located and click Open Look in ausa fe e E3 File name es 4c5c2k inf m Cancel Files of type e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 16 Click OK Install From Disk E xj Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive cas selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from E5w2K XP 2003NPCLSCAU SA
129. 2 pages are printed on 16K paper to fit on half a sheet 16K on 8K Select this to print a 16K size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on 8K paper to fit on half a sheet 2 Center Margin This sets the gutter on the center of two sided page You can enter up to 0 500 inch 12 700 mm 3 Outer Margin This sets the gutter on the right side and left side on the paper You can enter up to 1 00 inch 25 40 mm 4 Units Select the unit for the Center Margin and Outer Margin option The default unit varies depending on the regional setting in the Windows 5 Staple Down the Center Check this to staple double in the center NOTES Staple Down the Center is available only when A5 on A4 A4 on A3 B5 on B4 1 2 LT on LT LT on LD or 16K on 8K is selected at the Output Document Lay out drop down box and the Saddle stitch finisher is installed 6 Number Pages from Right to Left Check this to print a booklet that can be read from right to left 7 Use Front Cover This sets front cover printing for a booklet which allows you to insert or print a cover on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab To enable cover printing check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed and the print style Source Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed NOTE The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on
130. 280 Series Print Queue Pri vate Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing and Invalid GL 1020 Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax TopAccessComposer and Invalid GL 1010 Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax TopAccessComposer and Invalid SC 2 Device Status Print Queue Private Print and Proof Print E Job status information e Document Name is the name of the document that is printing e Status is the state or condition of the job e Scheduled for Scheduled Print jobs this item displays the date and time the job is sched uled to print in localized form e User Name identifies who submitted the job e Pages shows the pages in the job and number of pages printed e Submitted is the date and time that the print job was submitted e Copies this item contains the number of copies requested In each queue tab you can delete a print job that you originally submitted In addition in the Proof Print tab you can print the remaining copies of proof print jobs In the Scheduled Print tab you can print the selected scheduled job immediately In the Invalid tab you can print the selected job by entering the department code Deleting print jobs 1 Display the queue tab and select a print job that you want to delete NOTE You can delete the print job only that you originally submitted Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs
131. 37 Helvetica 38 Helvetica Bold 39 Helvetica Oblique 372 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 sui 52 53 54 55 56 SF 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 13 74 45 76 Far 78 79 Helvetica BoldOblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique Palatino Roman Palatino Bold Palatino Italic Palatino BoldItalic ITC AvantGarde Book ITC AvantGarde BookOblique ITC ITC ITC ITC ITC ITC NewCenturySchlbk Roman NewCenturySchlbk Bold NewCenturySchlbk Italic NewCenturySchlbk BoldItalic AvantGarde Demi AvantGarde DemiOblique Bookman Light Bookman LightItalic Bookman Demi Bookman DemiIltalic Times Roman Times Bold Times Italic Times BoldItalic ITCZapfChancery MediumItalic Symbol Symbol PS Wingdings ITCZapfDingbats Courier Bold Courier Italic Courier Bold Italic Letter Gothic Regular Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS BoldOblique Printing Guide Internal Fonts List Internal PS Fonts List 1 AlbertusMT Light 2 AlbertusMT 3 AlbertusMT Italic 4 AntiqueOlive Roman 5 AntiqueOlive Italic 6 AntiqueOlive Bold 7 AntiqueOlive Compact 8 Apple Chancery 9 ArialMT 10 Arial ItalicMT 11 Arial BoldMT 12 Arial BoldItalicMT 13 AvantGarde Book 14 AvantGarde BookOblique 15 AvantGarde Demi 16 AvantGarde DemiOblique 17 Bodoni 18 Bodoni Italic 19 Bodoni Bold
132. 4c5c2k inf m My Network P EN Files of type Setup Information inf Cancel e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 115 e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 11 Click OK x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from E NW2K XP 2003XPCLSCNUSA Browse 12 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use P a Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation ar disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows Update Have Disk tees NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E E Use Existing Driver driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5
133. 72 Menal PSFehls DISE aides tee e inet tah Fera o teshotant oue std eae ea dites 373 TINDE X aT PEE ENOR 375 Printing Guide Table of Contents 11 12 Printing Guide Table of Contents 1 OVERVIEW Printing Guide 1 Overview 13 Features and Functions 14 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The printing features are available only when the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed B Extensive Client Platform Support This equipment supports printing from IBM compatible PC Macintosh and Unix workstations Not all features are supported on all platforms however M Various Port Options You can map this equipment to print to a SMB Peer to Peer IPP or LPR port B Multiple Job Types Job Types refer to the way this equipment handles a print job e Normal mode requires no special handling and is the most frequently used printing mode e Scheduled Print lets you specify the time and date at which to print a job e Private Print mode allows you to hold a job in the print queue until you enter a Document Identification Number DIN at the copier front panel to print the job e Proof Print mode prints the first copy of a multi copy job then awaits your approval before printing the remaining copies e Overlay Image File prints a document element such as text or graphics to a file for superim posing on other documents B Professional Finishing Options Depending on the type of finishing units you
134. 7861 WMFP 00C67861 print SUPPLEMENT Youcan also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name Example W10 10 70 120 print 114 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Click Have Disk add Printer wizard E 2 Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use ash Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation a disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers Agfa AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 j A GFEA A cousa 1NNNCE o5 2 Windows Update Have Disk mee e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 8 Click Browse Install From Disk E X Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from m Browse e The Locate File dialog box appears 9 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 10 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 is located and click Open Look in ausa e e E3 File name es
135. CL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 9 Click OK xl AoA Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from JE w2k_XP_2003 PS USA 10 Check Next Found New Hardware Wizard LL Driver Files Search Results ee The wizard has finished searching for driver files for pour hardware device SY The wizard found a driver for the following device oy Unknown Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next A D e w2k_xp_2003 ps usa es4cps2k inf E Cancel e t starts copying files 62 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 11 Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Windows has finished installing the software for this device To close this wizard click Finish 12 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows XP Server 2003 Installing the printer driver fo
136. D ROM NT PCL6 lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows NT 4 0 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard e Client CD ROM AW2K XP 2003 PCL6 lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play PS3 Printer Drivers PostScript e Client CD ROM 9X_ME PS lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 98 Me for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play e Client CD ROM NT PS lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows NT 4 0 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard e Client CD ROM AW2K XP_2003 PS lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play Printing Guide About the Client CD ROM 15 SUPPLEMENT Peer to Peer Utility for Windows 98 Me e Client CD ROM PtoP This includes the setup files to install the Peer to Peer Utility on the Windows 98 Me USB Driver for Windows 98 e Client CD ROM USB lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the USB driver on the Windows 98 for each language version Printer Driver Setup files Zip Compressed Client CD R
137. DE file_share pcl Mfp 00c6786 AMEP 00C67861 Apcl5 ps3 Cloc pcl5c Double click this queue to install the PCL5c printer driver pcl6 Double click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver ps3 Double click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver e The Printers dialog box appears NOTE The pcl5c queue is displayed only for e STUDIO4511 Series 2 Click Yes Printers i Before you can use the printer MFP 00C67861 pcl5c it must be set up on your computer Do you want Windows to set up the printer and continue this operation e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 101 3 Select whether printing MS DOS based programs and click Next Add Printer Wizard Do you print from MS DOS based programs gesessen Bact Cancel 4 Change the name if desired select whether you are using this printer as a default printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard You can type a name for this printer or you can use the name supplied below When you have finished click Next Printer name Your Windows based programs will use this printer as the default printer lt Back Cancel After your printer is installed Windows can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Ba
138. DF Cancel X 1 Destination This selects the destination tray e Inner Tray Select this to route the output to the inner tray e Job Separator Upper Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep arator e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only e Job Separator Lower Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep arator e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only e Tray 1 Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher e Tray 2 Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher NOTE Tray 1 and Tray 2 are only available when the Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher are installed e When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration tab you can select Job Separator Upper and Job Separator Lower instead of Inner Tray 2 Hole Punch This sets whether a print job is hole punched e Off Select this to print without hole punches e Long Edge Punch without rotation Select this to punch holes on the left side for a portrait document or on the top for a landscape document o o 302 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh e Short Edge Punch without rotation Select this to punch holes on the top for a por trait document or on the right for a landscape document TE e Long Edge Punch with 180 degree ro
139. E It assumes using SMB printing in a small network If you can use the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 as a print server it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server For further informa tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server see the Network Adminis trator s Guide TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing To install TopAccessDocMon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately e The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Windows 98 Me Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard The following describes an installation on Windows 98 The procedure is the same when Win dows Me is used 1 Install the printer driver by Add Printer Wizard Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e Please install the printer driver following the instruction of the installa tion for parallel printing P 40 Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard 2 After installing the client software click Start select Set tings and click Printer
140. ED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGE MENT TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY RELATING TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IF THE SOFTWARE PROVES DEFECTIVE YOU AND NOT TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NEC ESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN THAT IS PROVIDED BY TTEC AND ITS AFFILIATES PURSUANT TO A EULA IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE EXCEPT PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH RESULTING FROM NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS LOST DATA LOST SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDEN TAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO 2 Printing Guide SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOR FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS U S Government Restricted Rights The Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Govern ment is
141. HIBA e STUDIO4511 S COLPT2 Printer Port COLPT3 Printer Port O COMI Serial Port LlCOM2 Serial Port LlCOM3 Serial Port L COM4 Serial Port z Add Part Delete Port Configure Port Enable bidirectional support Enable printer pooling Cancel Apply Help e The Printer Ports dialog box appears 5 Select Standard TCP IP Port and click New Port Available port types Local Port New Port Type Cancel e The Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears 70 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 6 Click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next TN T Enter the IP address of this equipment in the Printer Name or IP Address field and click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard j x Add Port RS For which device do you want to add a port NS Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address fi 0 10 70 105 Port Name IP 10 10 70 105 lt Back Cancel f your network uses a DNS or WINS server enter the printer name of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the
142. IBA 2 38 E938 e STLIDIO4 e STUDIO4 1 Series PCLSc Pause Printing Cancel All Documents Sharing Use Printer Offline T TopAccessDocMon Server Properties Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties a evice status information 7 e The TopAccessDocMon window for the selected printer appears 334 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon NOTE If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver a mes sage dialog box appears In this case click Yes to search for a printer and main tain the connection P 335 Searching for a Printer Searching for a Printer When you activate TopAccessDocMon if the printer driver you select is not connected correctly to the printer a message dialog box appears In this case you can use the printer discovery functions to search the printer automatically in the network or enter the printer address manually LL P 335 Finding a printer by searching automatically LL P 336 Finding a printer by entering printer address manually Finding a printer by searching automatically 1 Click Yes in the message dialog box to find a printer TopAccessDocMon 4 x The address of your printer could not be located Would you like to Find it Ce e e The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears 2 Click Start Discovery to begin the process Top ccessDocMon Local Discovery l x
143. ITAL SYSTEMS Printing Guide F srupio3511 4511 srupio350 450 F srupio230 280 F srupio2001 230L TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 1 1 KANDA NISHIKI CHO CHIYODA KU TOKYO 101 8442 JAPAN R03072037405 TTEC 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Ver05 2004 09
144. If the following message appears click Yes to set the indi cated printer driver to be the default printer driver or click No to not change the default printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client x P Do you want to set the Following Printer as the Default Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 mm MN Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 139 NOTE NOTE SUPPLEMENTS 140 12 Click Finish TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer Setup will launch the Read Me file and the Top amp ccessDocMon Choose from the options below IV Yes want to view the Read Me file IV Yes want to launch the Top amp ccessDocMon now e Ifyou selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation the system may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAccessDocMon e The Installer may ask you to restart your computer If it does select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish to restart your computer 13 The installation is completed e Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print The proced
145. IpLinux sh Linux filter only This file is a shell script that simulates the command line functions of lp After processing the command line options the e STUDIO filter 1s invoked in the same way as a System V print filter This file is installed in opt toshiba tap bin A symbolic link to this file will be installed in the usr local bin directory as Iptap est4511 Backend for e STUDIO4511 Series estbwBackend for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series AIX filter only This is an executable program that is called by the AIX qdaemon It receives the arguments from the qdaemon interrogates it for copy information etc then calls the queues copy of net_est4511 or net_estbw to run the print This program will be installed in opt toshiba tap bin est4511add for e STUDIO4511 Series estbwadd for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series This file is a shell script that is used to create a printer description This file will be installed in opt toshiba tap bin A symbolic link will be installed in the bin directory that will point to the actual location of this file est4511rm for e STUDIO4511 Series estbwrm for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series This file is a shell script that is used to remove a printer description This file will be installed in opt toshiba tap bin A symbolic link will be installed in the bin directory that will point to the actual location of this
146. Ipd under Linux Deleting a Print Queue Manually You can also configure the print queue by adding a print queue manually The procedure varies depending on the operating systems m Y hh LJ P 194 Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris n Y N LJ P 194 Deleting a print queue manually on HP UX LL P 194 Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX m Y hh LJ P 195 Deleting a print queue manually on Linux m Y hh LJ P 195 Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUnix Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 193 Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command lpadmin x lt queue name gt 3 Enter the following command rm etc lp interfaces lt queue name gt conf Deleting a print queue manually on HP UX 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command ps eet grep losched grep iv grep gt dev null 2oel 3 Enter the following command Echo 9 4 If 0 outputted on the screen turn the scheduler OFF Enter the following command usr sbin lpshut gt dev null 2 amp 1 D Enter the following command usr sbin lpadmin x queue name 6 Enter the following command rm etc lp interfaces queue name gt conf T If 0 was outputted on the screen in step 3 turn the sched uler ON Enter the following command usr sbin lpsched gt dev null 2 gt amp 1
147. Lower Right Portrait Lower Left Landscape Select this to staple in the lower right for a portrait document or in the lower left for a landscape document AEN e Middle Top Portrait Middle Right Landscape Select this to staple double in the top for a portrait document or in the right for a landscape document a 304 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 1 e Middle Bottom Portrait Middle Left Landscape Select this to staple double in the bottom for a portrait document or in the left for a landscape document qm e Saddle Stitch Portrait Saddle Stitch Landscape Select this to staple double in the center for a booklet but only when booklet printing is required 1 di NOTES Donotselect this option if a finisher is not installed e Only Upper Left Portrait is available when the Single staple Finisher is installed Do not select other options when the Single staple Finisher is installed e Double stapling is available only when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Fin isher is installed Do not select the double stapling options when neither the Multi staple Finisher nor Saddle stitch Finisher is installed e Saddle Stitching is available only when the Saddle stitch Finisher is installed Do not select the saddle stitching options when the Saddle stitch Finisher is not installed Printing Modes In the Printing Modes me
148. MFP_00C67861 e STUDIO3511 4511 Paper Size Other 8 50 in x 11 0 in Orientation Scale e Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document P 289 Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later 3 Click OK to save the Page Setup settings 4 Select Print from the File menu of the application 5 In the dialog box that appears make sure the name of the equipment is selected at the Printer menu and specify the Print settings for your print job Print Printer MFP_00C67861 Presets Standard Copies amp Pages n Copies j M Collated Pages All 3 From 1 to 162 9 Preview Save As PDF b Cancel Print gt e Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document P 291 Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later 6 Click Print to print a document Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the Page Setup command from the File menu of the application In the Page Setup dialog boxes you can specify the Page Attribute settings Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 289 NOTE SUPPLEMENT 290 e The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications Page Attributes Page Setup Settings Page Attributes H4 Format for MFP 00C67861 FH e STUDIO3511 4511 Paper Size
149. Mono Select this to print a document in monochrome mode NOTE Only Mono can be selected for PCL6 printer driver because the PCL6 printer driver only supports black and white printing For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Color option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 10 Staple This sets whether a print job is printed with staples e None Select this to print without staples e Upper Left Select this to staple in the upper left and print 222 Printing Guide Printing from Windows SUPPLEMENT NOTES e Center Double Select this to fold and staple double in the center When you select this the pages will be printed on the sheets according to the print option settings and then simply fold and staple double in the center of the sheets Center Double can be used to create a booklet from a document that has been already created as a paginated booklet To create a paginated booklet from a nor mal document perform the booklet printing P 230 Layout Tab Booklet Window The selectable options vary depending on the paper size None can only be selected if a finisher is not installed Upper Left and Upper Right can be selected only when the Single staple Fin isher Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab Center Top and Middle Left can be selected on
150. OM PandP lt language gt This includes the compressed zip files that contain the setup files to install each printer driver for each language version e Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter P 18 About Client Software for Windows For Macintosh SUPPLEMENT For UNIX 16 SUPPLEMENT The contents of the Client CD ROM Macintosh PPD files e Client CD ROM MacPPD lt language gt This includes the PPD file for Apple LaserWriter8 to enable printing from Macintosh on the Mac OS 8 6 Mac OS 9 x and Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 Classic Mode the PPD file to enable printing from Macintosh on the Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Further information about user software for Macintosh is described in next chapter P 169 About Client Software for Macintosh The contents of the Admin s Client CD ROM Solaris Filter e Admin s Client CD ROM J SolarisFilter language This includes the Tar file for Solaris v2 6 2 7 7 8 8 9 HP UX Filter e Admin s Client CD ROM HP UXFilter language This includes the Tar file for HP UX ver 10 20 11 x AIX Filter e Admin s Client CD ROM J AIXFilter language This includes the Tar file for AIX 4 1 5 4 3 3 5L Linux Filter e Admin s Client CD ROM J LinuxFilter language This includes the Tar file for Red Hat 6 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 8 0 SuSE Linux 7 0 8 1 Mandrake Linux 7 1 9 and Turbo Linux 8 SCO Unix Filter e Admin s Client CD ROM OpenUnixFilte
151. ONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND SUPER SEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT ORAL OR WRITTEN OR ANY OTHER COM MUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT TOSHIBA TEC Corporation 2 4 1 Shibakoen Minato ku Tokyo 105 8524 Japan Printing Guide SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 3 TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT Trademarks e The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System e The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Me Operating System e The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System e The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System e The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System e Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft prod ucts are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries e Apple AppleTalk Macintosh Mac TrueType and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc in the US and other countries Postscript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation e IBM AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e NOVELL NetWare and NDS are trademarks of Novell Inc e Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respe
152. Overlay Image Check on this to print a job with an overlay image This feature allows you to print an image on the background of a print job although the watermark allows only a text To enable Overlay Image check the check box and click Browse to select the overlay file NOTE Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image must be created at the same size orientation color mode and resolution SUPPLEMENT f you want use an overlay image in your job you must first create an overlay file 236 To create an overlay image create an overlay image with most applications and print it as an overlay file You can enable creating an overlay file on the Print Job Tab P 225 Print to Overlay File 3 Rotate 180 degrees Check on this to perform rotation printing of an image 4 Mirror Check on this to perform mirror printing of an image This print option is available only for the PS3 printer driver NOTE The mirror printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the application s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings 5 Negative Positive Check on this to perform negative printing of an image This print option is available only for the PS3 printer driver NOTES The Negative Positive option is not available when Automatic is selected at the Color drop down box in the Setup tab e The negative printing may not be applied when the application gives p
153. P 188 Creating a Print Queue Using est4511add estbwadd LLI P 188 Creating a Print Queue Manually Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 187 SUPPLEMENTS 188 Creating a Print Queue Using est4511add estbwadd You can create a print queue using est4511add estbwadd Creating a print queue 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series est45lladd queue name host name or IP address gt For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series estbwadd queue name host name or IP address gt This command creates a print queue using the system s Ipadmin command It also creates a configuration file that has the destination IP address or host name Use the configuration file to change print queue parameters The Ipadmin command stores the printer interface file in the etc Ip interfaces direc tory in a file with the same name as the print queue The configuration file is stored in the etc Ip interfaces directory in a file named queue name gt conf Under Linux the printtool or equivalent utility must be used to add the printer into the Ip printing system after executing the est4511add or est 450add command Creating a Print Queue Manually You can also configure the print queue by adding a remote printer manually The procedure varies depending on the operating systems m Y hh CNN n Y N ENEN m Y TN ENN m Y T ENN
154. P 329 Configuring TopAccessDocMon e View gt Refresh Renews the window display e View gt Status Bar Check or uncheck to display or hide the status bar e Help gt Contents and Index Accesses the online help application e Help gt About TopAccessDocMon Displays copyright version and other information about the Document Monitor B Document Monitoring Tabs The tabs on this window vary depending on the monitoring device e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing and Invalid GL 1020 Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax TopAccessComposer and Invalid GL 1010 Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax TopAccessComposer and Invalid SC 2 Device Status Print Queue Private Print and Proof Print Other devices that supports MIB II Host Resource MIB and Printer MIB Device Status e Device Status tab Displays the printer information e Print Queue tab Displays a list of all current jobs Using this tab you can display all the jobs in the print queue pause and resume printing and cancel a print job e Private Print tab Lists the confidential print jobs Using this tab you can display all your private print jobs and cancel jobs as needed e Proof Print tab Displays details of proof print jobs Proof
155. POO Logging TE E E I SU SE 217 EU eT 2 8 FIIS MING ODOM S522 PTT 280 PANG MOG T 283 Booklet Mode Options cccccceccccseceeceeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeesesseeeesseeeeeseeeeees 284 Watermark ODLIUONS 3ueseuioiohru eoe Suse utes tee aost eet obese Do Fete op atean 285 aer ETE 286 Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later 288 How to Print from Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later seseseseeeeeeeeeeeee 288 Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers 288 Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later 289 Page Attributes acnctasstucsnezasterteuadnek ex tevantindsaausedndeavinaniagesuduatertaetsueunesoontend 290 Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later 291 COPIES Ou PAGS Six TT ELEME 291 PUY OU ME M 292 IB Ye lt gt eet e SNe en a NO OSE eR wee 294 COUPDUE Golem T tects 295 ne p pea m 295 Raper ANC UNINC EN tages an ETE 296 COVer P ade caute eu dodo vee asta we le E 297 ide dim inioliae er TTE TE 298 Papel Feed cisci acest teeta Hetuaien liis Lu decisa e a EDENE 298 Printer Features esses nennen nennen nnn nra snas nn nns 299 IMIG TOM p deci RT 309 Printing from an Application ccccccccceceecceceeceecese
156. PT1 Printer Port v Add Port 10 10 70 105 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 COM1 Communications Port Delete Port COM2 Communications Port FILE Creates a file on disk New Driver LPT1 Printer Port Capture Printer Port End Capture Timeout settings Not selected fi 5 seconds Transmission retry jas seconds Spool Settings Port Settings Help Cancel 8 Click OK to save settings NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Configuring the peer to peer port by entering IP address manually You can configure the peer to peer port by entering the IP address of this equipment manually 1 Click Add ra IP PeerT oPeer Setup Version 3 12 i OF x Available Printers UnitName UntlP Pot Description Flags Cancel M Manual Entry Add Delete Unit Name Column based on Find Printers Clear List Select Help C SerialNumber DNS Name _Find Printers _ Dear List_ Select H z Permanent Bou Number of hops 2 _Bermanent IP Address C Unit Name e The Add Printer dialog box appears SUPPLEMENT Ifthe IP PeerToPeer Setup Version 3 12 dialog box does not appear click Start and select IP P2P in the IP P2P folder in the Program
157. Paper Available Lower Drawer A3 Plain Paper Available Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Pedestal Upper Drawer A4 Plain Empty Pedestal Lower Drawer Not Available EET Stack Feed Bypass Unknown Thick 1 Empty ierat Large Capacity Feeder Not Available Status ide Hole Punch 2 Holes ha Physical Address 00 40 4F 7E 28 55 Add Device 10 10 70 120 4p i e The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears 2 Click Start Discovery to begin the process TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery E X Monitoring Device Os TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 L13 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 DS TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 Discovered Device Name CL IPAPX Address Location Mode 3 Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection OK Cancel Help e TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network SUPPLEMENT You can quit the process by clicking Stop Discovery e It may not find the device that is located in the different segment If a device cannot be found find a device manually from the Manual Selection button P 345 Adding new device by entering the printer address manually 3 When the process is complete the printers that have been found are listed in the Discovered Device list Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 343 SUPPLEMENT I
158. Paper Size drop down box For e STUDIOA4S11 Series and e STUDIO450 Series Envelope is not available for e STUDIO4511 Series and e STUDIO450 Series 6 Orientation This sets the paper printing direction e Portrait The document is printed in the portrait direction Landscape The document is printed in the landscape direction 7 Number of Copies This sets the number of printed copies You can set any integer from 1 to 999 8 Copy Handling This sets how to sort the printed sheet when numerous copies are made for printing e Sort Copies Select this for sort printing 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 NOTE Group Copies and Rotated Sort Copies can be selected only when more than 2 copies are entered at the Number of Copies option e Rotated Sort Copies can be selected only when Letter A4 or B5 is selected at the Output Paper Size option e When Rotate Sort Copies is selected the Resolution option in the Image Quality tab will be 600 x 600 dpi and the selection will be disabled 9 Color This sets whether a print job is printed in color mode or monochrome mode e Automatic Select this to determine the color mode automatically When a print job is a black and white document the system automatically prints the document in mono Printing Guide Printing from Windows 221 chrome mode When a print job is a color document it prints the document in color mode e
159. Please Contact Ser vice Technician Fatal Error Please Contact Contact your service representative Service Technician Main Motor Error Please Contact your service representative Contact Service Technician Fuser Error Please Contact Contact your service representative Service Technician Scanner Error Please Con Contact your service representative tact Service Technician Motor Error Please Contact Contact your service representative Service Technician HDD Error Please Contact Contact your service representative Service Technician The Time for Periodic Main Contact your service representative tenance Please Contact Ser vice Technician Device Status Indicators The Printer Image area for the TopAccessDocMon Device tab window displays visual Device Status Indicators in the event of a device malfunction e Printer Error 1 The above printer error icon indicate that non recommended toner is being used For infor mation on resolving the error condition refer to REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYM BOL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function e Printer Error 2 The above printer error icon indicates You need to remove paper from standard output tray 364 Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors You need to remove paper from Job Separator You need to remove paper from Finisher tray You need to remove staples jammed in the Finisher For informati
160. Port Name dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 6 Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net Ware file server in the Enter a port name field and click OK If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode enter as the following in the Network path or queue name field lt NetWare file server name gt lt queue name gt Example NetWare file server name Nwsrv queue name mfp_00c67861 Nwsrv mfp 00c67861 Enter a port name MNwsrvsmfp queue Cancel If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode enter as the follow ing in the Network path or queue name field lt Tree gt lt queue name gt lt Context gt lt Tree gt Example Tree ORG queue name mfp_00c67861 Context Dept1 Org mfp 00c67861 deptl org Enter a port name M rg mfp queue dept org Cancel T Click Have Disk nad printer Wizard m Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use BE Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation i disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F 52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 x AREA Acna 1NNNCE wR 2 Windows Update Have Disk
161. Printer Driver For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The PCLSc Printer Driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 xl Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About O General C Photograph Presentation C Line Art Halftone Default z h 4 T I Resolutior 600 x 600 dpi Brightness 0 100 H 0 Text Saturation 0 Ki H 0 100 Graphics Profile None v md smoothing C TTE Delete Distinguish Thin Lines 7 v Restore Defaults IV Pure Gray Use Black for All Texts Cancel Apply Help 1 Image Quality Type This sets how colors are printed by selecting the job type The printer driver automatically applies proper color quality for selected job type e General Select this to apply proper color quality for printing a general color docu ment e Photograph Select this to apply proper color quality for printing photos e Presentation Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a vivid document Line Art Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a document contains a lot of characters or line arts NOTE The Image Quality type option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 2 Halftone This sets how halftone col
162. R Plain 600 Paper Available 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved e The Install Client Software page opens 2 Click the Install Client1 link to download the installer file Install Client Software Drivers Unix Filters Macintosh PPD Files Please click on the link s below to download the Windows Installer Files File Name Size Install Clienti 45088 KB Install Client2 19995 KB 3 Download the installer file on your desktop by following the prompts 4 Double click the InstallClient1 exe file that you down loaded e The installer starts and the InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears 5 Follow the installation procedure using the Client CD ROM described in following section P 18 Installing Client Software for Windows 198 Printing Guide Other Installation Procedures Installing client software from TopAccess for Macintosh 1 In TopAccess click the Install Software link at the bottom of the screen Device e Filing REFRESH Device Information Status Ready Name MFP O0C67861 Location Copier Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Hard Disk Space Available 14985 MB Contact Information Phone Number Message Alerts Paper options Drawer i Drawer Type Capacit Finisher 2 Holes Size yp Owel awel ear Em Pedestal Upper Drawer AAR Plain nassaan e The Install Client Software page opens Paper Available
163. ROM Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e Please install the client software following the instruction of the instal lation for parallel printing P 25 Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer 2 After installing the client software click Start select Set tings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Programs cy Documents jw Control Panel E A Taskbar c D n T Kal pz 3 Select the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select Properties in the File menu J Printers alx Edit View Help m amp sele xxl esr Pause Printing Pe a Set As Default Cie Document Defaults OSHIBA e TOSHIBA e Sharing eres PSL3 Series PCL5c fi Purge Print Documents T TopAccessDocMon Server Properties Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties e The printer driver properties dialog box appears 4 Display the Ports tab and click Add Port r d TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 Properties i21 x General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security Fonts Configuration About gt TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PELE Print to the following port s Documents will print to the first free checked port Port Description Printer vi Local Port TOSHIBA e STUDI L LPT2 Local Port L LPT3 Local Port COMI Local Port COM2 Local Por
164. STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series cp opt toshiba tap model net estbw opt toshiba tap interface queue name Enter the following command opt toshiba tap bin modPrintcap a queue name IP address gt Enter the following command ls opt toshiba tap bin flag queue name Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 191 11 If the above file exists enter the following command opt toshiba tap bin printconf import a queue name gt IP ADDRESS rm opt toshiba tap bin flag queue name 12 Restart your Ipd Creating a print queue manually on OpenUnix 1 Log on to the root account 2 Open your Linux Unix editor 3 Create the following file etc lp interfaces queue name gt conf 4 Add a line as below in the queue name conf dest IP address 5D Save the file 6 Enter the following command chmod x queue name conf T Enter the following command chown lp lp queue name gt conf 8 Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series lpadmin p queue name v dev null I any i usr lib lp model net est4511 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series lpadmin p queue name v dev null I any i usr lib lp model net estbw 9 Enter the following command accept squeue name gt 10 Enter the following command enable queue name gt Changing the Default Values You can change the default values of a print queue by the fo
165. Service is enabled from the Network Setup page in the TopAccess Administrator mode 2 Wait for a couple of minutes Most of the time the connection is reestablished automati cally If the broken connection condition persists exit and restart TopAccessDocMon 4 If upon restarting TopAccessDocMon you receive a message that the address cannot be resolved manually discover and select the device P 335 Searching for a Printer Go Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue Problem Description After submitting a job to print there are several reasons why you may not see the job in the print queue e The wrong device selected e The job is queued on the Windows operating system print spooler e The job may be held in the Novell print queue e A copier error prevents printing Corrective Action e Check the device location to see if there really should be any jobs listed e Check the Jobs Log in TopAccess to see if the status of the job is listed as Done Deleted or Unserviceable e Ifthe job is very small it may have already been serviced and moved to the Jobs Log as a terminated job If the job was unserviceable for some reason it no longer appears in the under Current Jobs list e Look at the Touch Panel Display for error messages For instance a prompt to load paper holds up subsequent jobs in the queue Ina Peer to Peer environment the job may be queued on the Microsoft Windows operating system print spooler an
166. TE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 48 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start and select Printers in Settings Windows 2000 or select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Server 2003 Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults The Printers folder is opened 2 Double click the Add Printer icon ioi xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 4m Back b v GQsearch Gyrolders 4 R GS X A E adres mites OOO mj A o TS 1s TOSHIBA LJ dd Printe Printers e STUDIO4 Add Printer The Add Printer wizard gives you step by step instructions For installing a printer To install a new printer double click the Add Printer icon Windows 2000 Support n object s selected e When using the Windows XP Server 2003 click Add a printer in the Printer Tasks m
167. TOSHIBA MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS Printing Guide F srupio3511 4511 F srupio350 450 f svupio230 280 I srUDIO2001 230L SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS UNLESS A SEPARATE LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE SUPPLIER OF APPLICABLE SOFTWARE IN WHICH CASE SUCH SEPA RATE LICENSE SHALL APPLY IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS YOU MAY NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE AND YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THIS PRODUCT INCLUDES NUMEROUS INDIVIDUAL SOFT WARE COMPONENTS EACH HAVING ITS OWN APPLICABLE END USER LICENSE AGREE MENT EULA INFORMATION RELATING TO THE EULAS MAY BE FOUND IN AN ELECTRONIC FILE INCLUDED ON THE USER DOCUMENTATION CD ROM INCLUDED HERE WITH HOWEVER ALL SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION DEVELOPED OR CREATED BY OR FOR TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION TTEC ARE PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF TTEC AND ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAWS INTERNATIONAL TREATY PROVISIONS AND OTHER APPLICABLE LAWS Grant of License This is a legal agreement between you the end user You and TTEC and its suppliers This software fonts including their typefaces and related documentation Software is licensed for use with the system CPU on which it was installed System in accordance with the terms contained in this Agreement This Software is pr
168. TUDIO350 and e STUDIO280 Series is installed Multi Position Stapler Select this when the Multi staple Finisher or Sad dle stitch Finisher is installed Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch Select this when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed Job Separator Select this when the Job Separator is installed only for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 173 NOTE PREPARATION 174 Offset Tray Select this when the Offset Tray is installed only for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series e When you select Multi Position Stapler or Multi Position Stapler and Hole Punch the saddle stitching function will be selectable for print ing However saddle stitching is available only when the Sad dle stitch Finisher is installed Lower Drawer only for e STUDIO280 Series Not Installed Select this when the Lower Drawer is not installed Installed Select this when the Lower Drawer is installed Pedestal Not Installed Select this when no pedestal is installed Pedestal 1 Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal is installed Pedestal 2 Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal and Drawer Module are installed LCF Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed ADU only for e STUDIO280 Series Not Installed Select this when the ADU is no
169. The user has to enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel Display 2 Department Code DC On Check this if a department code is required for printing When this 1s enabled specify the 5 digit department code in the DC menu Enabling the department code depends on whether this equipment is managed with depart ment codes or not Please ask your administrator for your department code 3 Distinguish Thin Lines Check this to print thin lines clearly 4 Do not Print Blank Pages Select whether you require printing blank pages Quality In the Quality menu you can specify various image quality features B For e STUDIO4S511 Series Printer MFP 00C67861 HH Presets Standard 3 Printer Features ac Feature Sets l Quality E Color Resolution Type Color Low res General Pure Black amp Gray Pure Black and Pure Gray i Vi Black Over Print y Smoothing c 9 eo f Toner Save Preview Save As PDF _ Cancel X Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh B For e STUDIO4S0 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard Printer Features re Feature Sets Quality Halftone Smooth E vi Smoothing 000 C Toner Save Preview X Save As PDF 1 Color Resolution Type Select the combinations of color resolution and type Mono Low res Detail Select this to print in black and white with
170. To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PS lt language gt 14 Click OK Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK m selected and then click OK Copy manufacturer s files from DANTAPCLSCAU SA 154 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 15 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed es Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ce installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers Have Disk lt Back Cancel NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c driver is already installed for this printer Would you like to keep the existing driver or use the new one Your Programs may print differently if you use the new driver C Keep existing driver recommended Type in the name of this printer When you have finished click Next Note Exceeding 31 characters in the Server and
171. WARE IN WHICH CASE SUCH SEPARATE LICENSE SHALL APPLY IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS YOU MAY NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE AND YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT GRANT OF LICENSE x Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you select No the setup will close To install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client you must accept this agreement InstallShield e The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows D Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files E aa Setup will install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder m Destination Folder CS STOSHIBASTOSHIBA e STUDIO Client Browse InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f you want to change the location where the programs are installed click Browse In the dialog box that appears select the folder and click OK e The Setup Type screen is displayed 6 Select Custom and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard _ xj Setup Type T Select the Setup Type to Install at Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Next Typic
172. Would you like to find it will be displayed when the Configuration tab is displayed If it is displayed click Yes and search for the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box After searching the equipment the SNMP communication will be enabled For the instructions on how to search the equipment refer to the instructions of TopAccess DocMon P 335 Searching for a Printer 248 Printing Guide Printing from Windows About Tab The About Tab contains information about the printer driver s version The following figure 1s the About Tab for e STUDIO4511 Series f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 2 xl General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About TOSHIBA srUDIO45 1 series Printer Driver Version 1 7 8 0 Localize Version 013 000 Copyright c 20033 2004 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved Copyright c 1998 2004 Agfa Monotype Corp All Rights Reserved Copyright c Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved Cancel Apply Help Printing with Extended Print Functionality In this section procedures are given to print various types of print Job using the layout and fin ishing options This section can help you to find a print method that you desired Printing Various Print Job Types The printer drivers provide various ways to handle such jobs as Scheduled Print Private Print Proof Prin
173. ab Print Style This selects how you want to print a cover e Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank cover e Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the first page image on the front side of a cover e Print on both sides of page Select this to print the first two page images on both sides of a cover This is available only when the 2 Sided Printing option is enabled on the Setup tab NOTE If Print on 1 side of page is selected while 2 Sided Printing is performed the first page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and the back side of the cover will be blank 2 Use Back Cover This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab To enable back cover printing check on the box and select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used Source Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed NOTE The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Print Style This selects how you want to print a back cover Printing Guide Printing from Windows 22 228 NOTES NOTE e Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank cover e Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the l
174. able the pure black mode on pureblackgray Enable only the pure gray mode on for PCL jobs 2 Enable the pure black and pure gray mode on for PS jobs Printing Guide Printing from UNIX 319 320 Example The command to set the pure black mode is lp o pureblackgray 1 filename For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Pure Black and Pure Gray option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series PCL5e Specific Options Some of the options only apply to plain text or PCL5e files Text Wrapping The following options control text wrapping when it reaches the right margin Option Value Alternate Description Value wrap Enable automatic text wrapping nowrap Disable automatic text wrapping If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to specify wrapping is Ip o wrap filename Left Margin The left margin position can be specified with the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value Im value Set the left margin to value columns If the left margin is set to the right of the right margin it will be ignored If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to set the left margin to five columns is lp o Im 5 filename Right M
175. al Discovery sinus Mae 336 338 Network Discovery 344 346 Agfa Font Manager eeeeseeese 18 368 AJ PAGES TOMI 2otui dete eni XR RR RUE 298 Always Download needed fonts 2T Annotate Font Keys di reir daro uds 2T AUuUto DUpleXx tr urinare E REGNI 247 B Background Printing esss 275 Banner Media Type 323 Banner OPO ees DRE ROMs 322 Banner Pare ooo aat Heu sa bas nuo Pave as UpEEN Ms 321 Banner Paper Source ccccseessssseseeeeececetees 227 Binding MacOS DOOLIN abstinet Eats 2779 luper EP due 294 Black Over Print Mac 5 6 0 OF 9X pelien 288 MOCOS T 308 UNI deese 323 WdoWa e Se OE SES 243 Booklet MICOS A oeiia fonda dit hd ds 290 UNDE cp 316 MID S credicedtodou to bistunteos toes prd bob 230 Booklet Center Margin IV3e O5 5 0 401 D X aoo a endet toes 285 MIC OS X dr ER 299 Booklet Mode Options 284 Booklet Outer Margin MacOS T OOrI X arana 285 Mac OS X e abu rd Redi dd 299 Booklet Page Layout Geste no bb ett 285 Booklet Page Size IN3C ONS 6 0 0E 9X ous uds y mb Exod tete 284 MIC OS X uS 299 Border Mac OS 6 6 OF 9X ooie 279 MICOS A RENDER OE RUN 293 376 I3t19 DtfleSS anueiai No UNE RE 240 Bypass Feeder siaii oren aE REA 247 C Center Margin UND ie bean OMISEORNR 318 W 1G OWS T 231 261 Chane Bate ausit tes nean buie rtet dene 332 TIO OSCR vane betta
176. al Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users C Complete Program will be installed with all options Custom You may choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users InstallShield lt Back Cancel e The Select Components screen is displayed T Check the software that you want to install and click Next For e STUDIO4511 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard X Select Components Select the components setup will install i Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install TopAccessDocMon r Description iwi TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCLE Setup will install Agfa Fonts on wj TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c your computer v 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14759 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back Cancel TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2f 28 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Check this to install the PCL5c printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver Agfa TrueType Fonts Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts For e
177. allation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 80 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Installing the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start and select Printers in Settings Windows 2000 or select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Server 2003 Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults The Printers folder is opened 2 Double click the Add Printer icon ox Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help q Back gt fg search Gyrolders Ug Ui Xx A E adres mites 0 mj A o TS 1s TOSHIBA LJ dd Printe Printers e STUDIO4 Add Printer The Add Printer wizard gives you step by step instructions For installing a printer To install a new printer double click the Add Printer icon Windows 2000 Support n object s selected e When using the Windows XP Server 2003 click Add a printer in the Printer Tasks menu e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections To continue click Next Bach Cancel Printing Guide In
178. alue will be used Department Code The department access code can be set using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value dept code Set the department access code The code is a 5 digit numeric value SUPPLEMENT How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job which no department code or invalid department code is specified varies depending on the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis trator mode When the Department Code Enforcement is enabled the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled the invalid department code print job will be printed Smoothing The smoothing mode can be set using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value smoothing Set the smoothing mode on smoothing Cancel the smoothing mode off Example The command to set the smoothing mode is Ip o smoothing on filename Distinguish Thin Lines The thin line limit mode can be set using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value thinlinelimit Set the thin line limit mode on thinlinelimit OFF Cancel the thin line limit mode off Example The command to set the thin line limit mode is lp o thinlinelimit on filename Printing Gui
179. anent 3 Click OK 4 Click Start select Settings and click Printers to open the Printers folder a Programs Favorites Documents Find gt MQ Taskbar amp Start Menu y Folder Options Hel VS A Active Desktop Run B windows Update Log Off Take 5 Select the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select Properties in the File menu L2 Printers TOT File Edit View Go Favorites Help Ga o X Gr Pause Printing v Set as Default Purge Print Documents E M T xi T Sharing Add Printer TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CXssalsEERE e STUDIO4 e STUDIO4 Series PCL5c Capture Printer Pott End Capture Create Shortcut Delete Rename v Printers Work Offline Close a Displays the properties of the selected items e The printer driver properties dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 123 6 Display the Details tab T Select the created peer to peer port in the Print to the follow ing port drop down box TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c HEI Image Quality Fonts Configuration About General Details Color Management Sharing Setup Print Job Layout Effect 7 TOSHIBA e STUDID4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port L
180. anged vertically from top to down and then right to left on one sheet 3 Border Select 1f a border line is to be drawn on each page This is available only when the N up printing printing a page on multiple sheets is set e None Select this if no border line is to be drawn e Single hairline Select this to draw single hairline for the border e Single thin line Select this to draw single thin line for the border e Double hairline Select this to draw double hairline for the border e Double thin line Select this to draw double thin line for the border 4 Two Sided Printing This sets whether or not you want to print on both sides of the paper e Off Select this when you do not want to print on both sides of the paper e Long Edge Binding Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper The direc tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation Portrait Landscape e Short Edge Binding Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper The direc tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation Portrait Landscape NOTES This option is not displayed for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 When you want to enable 2 Sided printing on Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 set the Duplex settings in the Duplex menu P 294 Duplex e 2 sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 293
181. angle for rotating the watermark text If there is not a preferred angle in the list enter the degrees from 90 to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree 5 Watermark Gray Level Select the gray level of the watermark text color If there is not preferred gray level in the list enter the percentage from 1 to 100 in units of 1 6 Watermark Font Select the font family for the watermark text 7 Watermark Position Select the position of the watermark text If there is not preferred position in the list enter the X position and Y position manually 8 Watermark Outline Select the outline points or Filled to print a watermark as a solid text If there is not a pre ferred point listed enter from 0 1 points to 20 points in units of 0 1 points Quality In the Quality menu you can specify various image quality features B Fore STUDIO4511 Series E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Color Resolution Type Color Low res General T P Pure Black amp Gray Pure Black and Pure Gray T Black Over Print Smoothing Toner Save OOOO B For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series E2 8 T Printer MFP 00C67861 Destination l Halftone Smoothing Toner Save 6 6 286 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 1 Color Resolution Type Select the combinations of color resolution and type e Mono Low res Detail Select this to print in black and white with low resolution an
182. aper to fit on half a sheet A4 B5 on B4 Select this to print a B5 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on B4 paper to fit on half a sheet B5 Letter Half on Letter Select this to print a 1 2 Letter size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet LT on LD Select this to print a Letter size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Ledger paper to fit on half a sheet Letter A6 on A5 Select this to print a A6 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on A5 paper to fit on half a sheet A6 B6 on B5 Select this to print a B6 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on B5 paper to fit on half a sheet B5 1 2 LG on LG Select this to print a 1 2 Legal size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet 1 2 Comp on Comp Select this to print a 1 2 Computer size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet 1 2 Folio on Folio Select this to print a 1 2 Folio size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet 1 2 Statement on Statement Select this to print a 1 2 Statement size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet 1 2 13 LG on 13 LG Select this to print a 1 2 13inchLG size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet 1 2 8 5 SQ on 8 5 SQ Select this to print a 1 2 8 5inchSQ size booklet Every 2 pages are printed o
183. aple 7 Put 2 staples on the top side of a portrait page or the right side of a landscape page printed on short edge feed large format A3 Ledger paper This command has no affect when the paper is fed from the long edge side or small paper size staple 8 Put 2 staples on the bottom side of a portrait page or the left side of a landscape page printed on short edge feed large format A3 Ledger paper This command has no affect when the paper is fed from the long edge side or small paper size staple 9 Put 2 staples in the middle of a landscape page and fold the paper in half vertically along the staple line saddle stitching This command works in conjunction with booklet printing This command has no affect when the paper is fed from the long edge side If this option is not specified the printer s default value will be used Example The command to staple in the upper left corner of a long edge feed portrait page is lp o staple 1 filename The value for the stapling position depends on the paper size the paper feed direction and the print direction This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the copier manual for a list of compatible paper sizes In particular A5 A6 and statement paper sizes will not work with this function Output Bin The output bin can be specified using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value inner Selec
184. argin The right margin position can be specified with the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value rm value Set the right margin to value columns If the right margin is set to the left of the left margin or if it is set to a position wider than the log ical page it will be ignored The right margin is specified in columns from the left margin A negative value will be ignored If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to set the right margin to fifty columns is lp o rm 50 filename Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Top Margin The top margin position can be specified with the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value tm value Set the top margin to value lines If the top margin is set too high or too low part of the text may not appear due to the printer s unprintable region The top margin will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the printer s logical page length Setting this value may affect the number of lines specified using the page length option If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to set the top margin to ten lines is lp o tm 10 filename Text Length The text length can be specified using the following options Option Value Alternate D
185. ark dialog box appears El Caption TOSHIBA Font Name Arial m NS Style Bold zl E Color BEGUN 0 Font Size 300 pt Ki 6 300 4 il Angle 33 Ki uj gt x Position 0 000 inches 90 0 90 Y Position 0 000 inches Solid Units inches C Draw as Outline C Transparency Center Watermark Ki Hn zi 100 Caen 2 Enter the watermark text in the Caption field e You can enter up to 63 characters for the Caption field 3 Select a font for the watermark at the Font Name drop down box 4 Select a font style for the watermark at the Style drop down box D Select a color for the watermark at the Color drop down box f your preferred color is not listed in the drop down box click Browse to display the color palette and add your color NOTE The Color drop down box is not available for the PCL6 printer driver e When Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab the Color drop down box is not available For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Color option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 6 Enter the font size in the Font Size field 266 Printing Guide Printing from Windows e You can enter any integer between 6 to 300pt in units of 1pt T To rotate the watermark enter the degrees in the Angle field e You can enter from 90 degrees to 90 degrees in un
186. ast page image on the front side of a cover e Print on both sides of page Select this to print the last two page images on both sides of a cover This is available only when the 2 Sided Printing option is enabled on the Setup tab If Print on 1 side of page is selected while 2 Sided Printing is performed the last page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be blank If Print on both sides of page is selected but there is only one page printed on the back cover the last page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be blank 3 Insert Page This sets sheet insertion printing which allows you to insert a sheet between pages or print a specific page on a sheet fed from a tray other than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab This option is useful when you want to insert a blank sheet between chapters or when you want to print chapter cover pages on the different paper To enable sheet insertion printing check on the box and select the location from where inserted sheets are to be fed and the print style to be used Then enter the page number you want to insert in the Pages field Source Select the location from where insertion sheets are to be fed The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Print Style This
187. at contains the appropriate inf file Location Does Not Contain Information About Your Hardware Problem Description The path to the inf file selected during driver installation 1s too far away In other words there are too many characters in the directory path Corrective Action Copy the directory containing the inf file to the local drive and resume installation This Port is Currently in Use Problem Description The driver was either open printing a job or is in use by another printer or application when you attempted to delete it Printing Guide Printer Driver Errors Corrective Action Make sure all print jobs have completed before deleting a port If there are still problems exit all applications and try again Check each driver to see if another driver is using the same port If so first change the driver s port setting and delete the port Problem with the Current Printer Setup Problem Description The driver was not set up properly possibly because the installation procedure did not complete Corrective Action Delete the driver and either reinstall it from the distribution CD ROM or download it from this equipment Printer Driver General Errors Driver Mapped to Wrong Port Problem Description If the printer driver on a client workstation points to the wrong network port jobs do not appear in the current jobs queue or print out Corrective Action 1 Open the Printers folder from the Con
188. atermark You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters When you are editing a watermark the selected watermark text is displayed in the field 6 Font Name Select a font to be used for the watermark text 7 Style Select the font style for the watermark text e Regular Select this to set the regular style to the text e Bold Select this to set the bold style to the text e Italic Select this to set the italic style to the text e Bold Italic Select this to set the bold and italic style to the text 8 Color Select a color of watermark text If the color that you require is not listed in the drop down box click Browse to add new color Printing Guide Printing from Windows 237 238 NOTES e When Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup Tab this option will be disabled This option is disabled for the PCL6 printer driver because it supports only black and white printing For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Color option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 9 Font Size Enter the font size for the watermark text The font size can be set from 6 to 300 pt in units of 1 pt You can also set the font size using the scroll bar 10 Angle Enter the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text The angle can be set from 90 to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree You can also set the degree of angle by moving the scroll bar 11 Solid Sele
189. ation using N up is not only convenient but conserves paper as well SUPPLEMENT If you are using the Image Overlay feature in combination with N up printing the overlay prints once per sheet rather than once per page Printing multiple pages per sheet 1 Display the Multiple Pages per Sheet window on the Layout tab 2 Select how many multiple pages you want to print on a single sheet at the Number of pages per Sheet drop down box Number of pages per sheet 2 Pages Left to Right E P 2 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged left to right when the orientation is portrait or from top to bottom when the orienta tion is landscape on one sheet 2 pages Right to Left Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged right to left when the orientation is portrait or from bottom to top when the orientation is landscape on one sheet 4 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged hor izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 4 pages Right to Left Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged hor izontally from the right and printed top to bottom on one sheet 4 pages Left to Right by Column Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged vertically from the top and printed left to right on one sheet 4 pages Right to Left by Column Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged ve
190. ation for Novell Printing Using the Installer 133 Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print sesssssssse 140 WVIAC OWS DON S82 oad 141 Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2008 cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaees 145 Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard 148 Wipdows 9o lVIgius udo ge a UL DM LIA EE 148 WVINCOWS INT 780 c 151 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 cccccseecceecsseeeeeeseeseeeeeaeeeeeessaeeeeeesaanes 156 Uninstalling the Client1 Software cc cccccccecceeeceseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeeesaeeeeeens 162 When Installed Using the Installer ccccccsccecssseesesseeseescesseeeesseseesseaees 162 When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaees 167 Installing Client Software for Macintosh eeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 169 About Client Software for Macintosh seessessseeseeeenennm 169 Planning TOr Arstallatior i escort rae A a a a tient 169 System Requirements eessssssssssssesseeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnne 169 Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x cccceccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeesaaaeees 169 Installing the Macintosh PPD File sseeeseeseeeeeenm 169 Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x
191. aving a print job to a user box 1 Display the Print Job tab and select Store to e Filing Then select user box number to be save Store to e Filing Public Bax x 2 Enter the password for the user box in the Password field Store to e Filing TH Password yo Print 3 If you print a job as well as saving to a box check the Print box 4 Set other print options you require and click OK D Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is saved to a specified user box Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options Printer drivers allows you to create a print job with layout options to make your document more essential Also you can enable finishing options that determine how the jobs are output such as stapling and hole punching sorting and creating a booklet Sort Printing You can select how multiple copies of a document to be output such as separately for each copy grouping each page and alternating the paper direction for each copies Printing Guide Printing from Windows 253 Output each copy separately 1 Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be printed at the Number of Copies field Then select Sort Copies at the Copy Handling drop down box Number of Copies 5 Copy Handling Sort Copies Sort Copies Group Copies Color Rotated Sort Copies 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3
192. ay Image Letter EO E Rotate 180 degrees Mirror Text Negative Positive Toner Save Do not Print Blank Pages Graphics Profile None Save As Restore Defaults PostScript Settings e G G 9 Cancel Help 1 Watermark This selects the watermark to be used or edited The following values except None are the default watermarks that have been registered in the printer driver New watermarks you cre ate are added to the drop down box list e None Select this if no watermark is desired The following default watermarks are also displayed in the drop down box Printing Guide Printing from Windows 235 e TOP SECRET CONFIDENTIAL e DRAFT ORIGINAL e COPY Add Click this to create new watermark The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this P 237 Add Edit Watermark Edit Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down box and click it to edit the watermark The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this P 237 Add Edit Watermark Delete Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down box and click it to edit a watermark NOTES The default watermarks can be deleted but If deleted they cannot be restored e None cannot be deleted Print on first page only Check this to print a watermark on the first page only This setting will become available when any watermark is selected from the Watermark drop down box 2 Use
193. b can be displayed only from the Printers folder and not displayed when displaying the properties from the application s Print dialog box 1 TrueType Options This sets how to print TrueType fonts e Always Use TrueType Fonts Select this to print the document the same as the print image shown on the screen All TrueType fonts are extracted on the system for printing e Always Use Printer Fonts Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts with the inter nal fonts for printing The print result may differ from the print image on the screen e Use Font Substitution Table Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts using the internal fonts according to the settings of the font substitution table You can edit the font substitution table that is displayed at the Substitution Table Edit table e Download as Bitmap Select this to print the document as same as the image shown on the screen SUPPLEMENT The default value will be Use Font Substitution Table for the PS3 printer driver 244 Printing Guide Printing from Windows 2 Substitution Table Edit This table shows how each TrueType font is substituted You can edit the substitution setting for each TrueType font In this table the TrueType font names are displayed in the TrueType Font column and how the TrueType font is printed is shown in the Use Printer Font column To edit the substitution table select the TrueType font that you want to edit from the table and
194. c Do you want to keep the existing driver or use the new one C Keep existing driver recommended Replace existing driver lt Back Cancel 116 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 13 Change the name if desired and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Name Your Printer You must assign a name for this printer Supply a name for this printer Some programs do not support server and printer name combinations of more than 31 characters Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer Yes C No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer 14 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other network users Indicate whether you want this printer to be available to other users If you share this printer you must provide a share name Do not share this printer C Share as lt Back Cancel 15 Select Yes to print a test page and click Next Add Printer Wizard q Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do you want to print a test page Yes C No lt Back Cancel Printing Guide Installing
195. c BoldSlanted LubalinGraph Book LubalinGraph BookOblique LubalinGraph Demi LubalinGraph DemiOblique 373 89 Marigold 135 ZapfChancery MediumItalic 90 Monaco 136 ZapfDingbats 91 MonaLisa Recut 92 NewCenturySchlbk Roman 93 NewCenturySchlbk Italic 94 NewCenturySchlbk Bold 95 NewCenturySchlbk BoldItalic 96 NewYork 97 Optima 98 Optima Italic 99 Optima Bold 100 Optima BoldItalic 101 Oxford 102 Palatino Roman 103 Palatino Italic 104 Palatino Bold 105 Palatino BoldItalic 106 StempelGaramond Roman 107 StempelGaramond Italic 108 StempelGaramond Bold 109 StempelGaramond BoldItalic 110 Symbol 111 Taffy 112 Times Roman 113 Times Italic 114 Times Bold 115 Times BoldrItalic 116 TimesNewRomanPSMT 117 TimesNewRomanPS ItalicMT 118 TimesNewRomanPS BoldMT 119 TimesNewRomanPS BoldItalicMT 120 Univers Light 121 Univers LightOblique 122 Univers 123 Univers Oblique 124 Univers Bold 125 Univers BoldOblique 126 Univers Condensed 127 Univers CondensedOblique 128 Univers CondensedBold 129 Univers CondensedBoldOblique 130 Univers Extended 131 Univers ExtendedObl 132 Univers BoldExt 133 Univers BoldExtObl 134 Wingdings Regular 374 Printing Guide Internal Fonts List 7 INDEX Printing Guide 7 INDEX 375 INDEX Numerics 2 Sided Printing IUD D RTT 313 WdoWa aaa 223152357 A POUL sale dust TENOREM TTRSONDOEETNDS 249 Add DEVICE esas iien 342 343 345 Advanced Loc
196. c OS 8 6 to 9 x Once you have installed the PPD file as described in the section Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x on page 169 you can print directly from most Mac OS applications How to Print from Mac OS 8 6 or 9 x Before you can print to this equipment from applications you must select it in the Chooser Then using the LaserWriter 8 printer driver and the correct PostScript Printer Description file PPD you can control the system s various printing features by specifying job settings from print dialog boxes Selecting the Printer in the Chooser Before printing from applications you must select the equipment in the Chooser Setting the LaserWriter 8 printer in the Chooser 1 Click Apple menu and select Chooser r Lam File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer AirPort Apple DVD Player D Apple System Profiler m Calculator Cj Control Panels I Favorites Key Caps Network Browser Recent Applications i Recent Documents Eg Recent Servers fm Remote Access Status Scrapbook 49 Sherlock 2 jj Speakable Items Stickies e The Chooser window appears 2 Select the LaserWriter 8 icon and select the equipment in the Select a PostScript Printer list oO Chooser E Select a PostScript Printer m MFP 00C67861 AppleShare Laser Writer 8 amp Active AppleTalk Q Inactive 7 6 2 3 Close the
197. ceseeeeeseeeesseecessecessaeeessaeess 309 Considerations and Limitations eeeeessseeseeeeneeeeenne 309 Printing using LP Command sssessssssseseeeene eene 309 Generic lp and Iota ODUOFISxs dna renta eus ambos cune etas o aient a beoe tenis 309 Sis X T 309 iR 309 General ODpLlOFPS 6 oit anota hoe eu ee ceti usd Funde Beh aie 310 BINA WAG Citas cer ROT E 310 Color MOde sect ortu cre eee ee ots te M LI EN 310 SANO ee Pr IE 310 Seis E S 311 mios calla tel e a ie OP ER EET TEE 312 Media TY oT c c S 312 ule c 313 UPIOX ING tcr Er HU 313 PADS eli MT EET 313 misinisre Meer bale 314 Department Code prO 315 vefngrerejial ajo RENE RE N 315 DIS rigilshi Tb ING S cp eo ue ade EE reus uso aei coo e an Rate Cute ase 315 I2ox ot PrinEBIank FP agBS icut sxinpbvs ciuri UP FapE Cus Pate sso best 316 leer i e T UU TEE EP 316 Booklet MOU6GS ico tote cto pue obesse nwact genes dete tn pee s neuer Stunts 316 Page Layout et Dp NI METRE 317 Center IVI ANGI eed accra ica des stale a ea une dia sehen edet a eda qus 318 Outer IM ARQIN mE 318 COIS ALA OM M seeds 318 FOCENO QR oe eae oa ee ee ene ee a 319 Printing Guide Table of Contents Page engin eee ea i ae 319 Pure Black and Pure Gray ceccccc
198. cessDocMon 1 Open Control Panel and double click the Add Remove Programs icon ox File Edit view Favorites Tools Help e Back g Gsearch Gyrolders 3 ME GE X A Ed Address ET Control Panel Go Ll ET Li Control Panel Options Hardware Add Remove Programs EHE EA T a4 Installs and removes programs and Windows components CSNW Date Time Display Folder Options Fonts Tools Updates Windows Update Windows 2000 Support P LB con VN cP Game Internet Keyboard Mouse Network ar Controllers Options Dial up Co aa Installs and removes programs and Windows components e The Add Remove Programs dialog box appears 2 Select TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series Client or e STUDIO280 Series Client and click Change Remove Ez Add Remove Programs E inl x Pei fu I T Currently installed programs Sort by Name m Change or e TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client Size 1 82MB Remove To change this program o oe it From your ChangaiRemove Programs o computer click Change R ve i Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 Add New Programs N Add Remove Windows Components Set Program Access and Defaults e The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 165 3 Select Modify and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511
199. ck Cancel 102 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 6 Make sure a test page is printed successfully and click Yes to close the dialog box TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printer test page completed 4 test page is now being sent to the printer Depending on the speed of your printer it may take a minute or two before the page is printed The test page briefly demonstrates the printer s ability to print graphics and text as well as providing technical information about the printer driver Did the test page print correctly T The printer driver is installed and the print queue window appears TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5Sc OF Xx Printer Document View Help Document Name Status Owner Progess Started At 0 jobs in queue NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer and double click a queue in which the printer driver should be installed see be
200. cseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaueeeeeeaaeeeeesaanes 319 POoLE5e Specie ODUODS eese oec corde iduterdte oie oU tsos aestus Con Ceae Dose ist uusMi eas 320 TEK VV Fell DING soi2 e T US LU Em 320 Hey 21 1 DERE T T E 320 milenio TET 320 OD IWMI tet cT 321 HI udE o mre 321 Banner 9e obaptob UE epvndes tuse a desea adsolet os S obf oit 321 PS SPCC ODTONS PENNE E o EN ES 323 Black OVER TL uscite EE nem able nae coetu tet anao test e iiuts 323 Other Printing Mello bistra esent pra axi oda cease a ward 324 E SA Fe IMEI terr SRM ENTER TUE 324 2209 gre isulpe more c cc 325 4 Monitoring Print Jobs osse ds cosmiuE e cineO n canc EISE a SEEDS REL EN EESR FUSCO E Ed VE SET cU S spas rus CE 327 Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon eseeeeeeese 328 Features and FUNCHONS uec coord cbe E edits doe o Debe ved es 328 How to Use TopAccessDocMon ssssseseeseseenennnen nennen nennen rni 328 Running TOpACCeSSDOCMON a cent unt a cub Pk T an cu uiu EUIS 328 Starting TOPACCESSDOCMON cccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 328 Document Monitor Taskbar Menu cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeens 329 Configuring TOPACCESSDOCMON cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeseeesaaeeees 329 Configuring the Start Up Options cc cccccecceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeees 330 Configuring the Notifications cccccccecsssseeeeee
201. ct this to print solid type of watermark 12 Draw as Outline Select this to print outline type of watermark 13 Transparency Select this to transparent watermark When you select this set the brightness from 0 darker to 100 lighter in units of 1 You can also set the brightness using the scroll bar PostScript Settings PostScript Settings I X Dutput Format J Print Error Information v Compress Bitmap Use PostScript Passthrough Cancel Help 1 Output Format This selects the output format for printing e ASCII The job is sent in the ASCII data format e Encapsulated PostScript EPS The job is sent in the EPS format e Tagged BCP Select this to send a job in Tagged Binary format over parallel ports Using Adobe DSC Select this to send a job with the DSC comments 2 Print Error Information Check on this to print a PS error information page when any errors occur for printing 3 Compress Bitmap Check on this to send compress bitmaps to this equipment 4 Use PostScript Passthrough Check this for PostScript data created by the application to be passed through to this equip ment Printing Guide Printing from Windows Image Quality Tab The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed You can easily select appropriate image quality depending on the type of a document Setting items in the Image Quality Tab vary with the type of printer drivers For PCLSc
202. ctions describe how to uninstall the client software The uninstallation pro cedure is different how you installed the client software P 162 When Installed Using the Installer When Installed Using the Installer When the client software was installed using the Installer in the Client CD ROM or down loaded from TopAccess you can delete all files using the Add Remove Programs function You can uninstall all client software that have installed from the Client CD ROM or you can uninstall only the components that you want to remove P 163 Uninstalling all Client Software Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows P 165 Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove Uninstalling all Client Software The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used NOTE Before uninstalling the software please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon 1 Open Control Panel and double click the Add Remove Programs icon ipi xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Back gt GQsearch yrolders 9 MG GS X A Ea Address 52 Control Panel Go E Updates uj H 3 Control Panel Options Hardware Add Remove Programs Sa Lar a4 Installs and removes programs and Windows components CSNW Date Time Display Folder Options Fonts Windows Update Windows 2000 Support a J Ga
203. ctive compa nies Copyright 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TTEC No patent liability is assumed however with respect to the use of the information contained herein 4 Printing Guide TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT Preface Thank you for purchasing e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series Multifunctional Digital Systems This guide provides instructions on how to set up your computer and print to the equipment Read this guide before printing to your e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series Keep this guide within easy reach and use it to configure an environment that makes best of the e STUDIO s functions About This Guide This manual describes how to install the user software for the printer functions set up printing and manage print jobs from Microsoft Windows Apple Mac OS and UNIX computers For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series see the Network Administrator s Guide For general information on using the copier your computer your application software or your net work see the manuals that accompany those products For e STUDIOA50 Series and e STUDIO280 Series This manual applies the equipment that either the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed
204. cut Delete Rename Properties J Displays the properties of the selected items p e When you are operating under Windows XP Server 2003 open the Printers and Faxes folder to access the printer driver The printer driver properties dialog box appears 2 Display the Configuration tab check on Enable SNMP Communication and click Update Now amp f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 2 x Pedestal None Y Finisher None Hole Punch Unit None v Upper Drawer Letter X Paper Type Plain m Lower Drawer Letter Paper Type Plain m Pedestal Upper Leter z Paper Type Pain z Pedestal Lower Lete z Paper Type Pain z Large Capacity ee z Paper Type Pisin z Bypass Feeder Automatic F Paper Type Plain m Profile None Memory 128MB m Save As Delete Nt M Enable SNMP Communication Restore Defaults Update Now Update Automatically Cancel Apply Help he printer driver starts communicating with system and obtains option settings automatically Printing Guide Printing from Windows 207 NOTE SUPPLEMENT 208 e If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly the message The address of your printer could not be located Would you like to find it will be displayed If it is displayed click Yes and search for the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box After
205. d After pour printer is installed Windows can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel e Start copying files 11 Click Finish z TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows has finished installing the software that your new hardware device requires i Cancel 12 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows 2000 Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows 2000 1 Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com puter and then power on the equipment and your computer e The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears 34 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2 Click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New ve Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install a device driver for a hardware device To continue click Next TN 3 Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recom mended and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard i Install Hardwar
206. d consequently not available in Current Jobs or the Jobs Log If you do not see any error messages and the printer seems to be working fine resubmit the job e The job may be in the Novell print queue and thus not visible for the moment Use NWAd min or PCONSOLE to see if there are any queue errors Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages Warn ings Errors Problem Description Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors 357 The device status indicates the current state of the copier to which print jobs are being submitted Corrective Action For an explanation of device status messages refer to the following section LL P 358 TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages LLI P 359 TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages TopAccessDocMon Error Messages TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages The following table shows the notification messages displayed and helps you to find more infor mation about resolving it Message Description Your document has been User has sent a print job and it has finished printing success printed fully Your private print document User has sent a private print job and it is ready for the user to is now being held walk to copier and activate the job Your proof set has been User has sent a private print job and a proof copy of a printed multi copy job has printed and it is ready for the user to review before releasing and printing the remaining copies Your fax has been trans
207. d detailed image quality type e Mono Low res Smooth Select this to print in black and white with low resolution and smoothing image quality type e Color Low res General Select this to print in color with low resolution and general image quality type e Color Low res Photo Select this to print in color with low resolution and photo image quality type e Color Low res Presentation Select this to print in color with low resolution and pre sentation image quality type e Color Low res LineArt Select this to print in color with low resolution and line art image quality type e Color High res General Select this to print in color with high resolution and general image quality type e Color High res Photo Select this to print in color with high resolution and photo image quality type e Color High res Presentation Select this to print in color with high resolution and presentation image quality type e Color High res LineArt Select this to print in color with high resolution and line art image quality type e Color Low res Transparency Select this to print in color with low resolution on the transparency sheet e Color High res Transparency Select this to print in color with high resolution on the transparency sheet NOTE When the optional expansion memory is not installed the job will not be printed if you select Color High res General Color High res Photo Color High res Presen ta
208. d los oe eer diete tosta tes rise 21 Preview window eee ene 217 Print Color uisi lea deu EON NN ids PLUS 276 Print C over PAGS grasina es 276 297 Print Document xu eec tec tlle tete avere tenue 295 Print Error Information eene 238 DIVE Mil eaaa steel nest cse A A 215 DEBE JOD oa teinte ebete se seposita bac dades 224 Pint Language iust Ee SOON 310 Print Mode MACOS 5 0 0t 9 X ookin de idepddewpt 283 habs BP Wu T 306 Print on Both Sides Mac OS 5 0 0E 9 X ootis 279 Mi Do UEM 294 Print Paper SIZE 2255 etatotix ife pens 219 255 Print Oueue taD iaia TA 347 Pri t Dile sao e EA 215 Print to Overlay File ueber 225251 Printer Change Printer 62d vertente bees 339 CTOSO Lco udin ite uds MO tes to loe udS Ote 339 Printer DEVET 2 uelsoistteoot des been edede pagus 18 Printer Features o ee eoe ee OE toten eus 299 Printer Proe s occosetoDusued acie te belt tete dubio d 276 Printing Modes Mac OS 8 0 0t 9 X cecil sie ee 283 UE ha Vm 305 UN TD REM ata ise boca ua dea tbedetaance eaashasestecuss 314 PUIODIU ocio dde dicare liest tueri theirs 296 Private PEU 35 dete pep ea bises Ua 225 250 Private Print Document ID 301 Private Print TAD oo epe tetto ttt tut 347 PHOT Ce Jittatesetetidics o ge too eere ies bue tu eut oto 217 DIOBC asoudtbusle imei E nora tete 213 Proof PEHID absens eer tdbao elei euie ace 2299251 ProDPDPEHBt ta Dk oct etse oett et eru 347
209. d or Even num bered page printing NOTE This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 Printer MFP 00C67861 ae Presets Standard s Paper Handling s Reverse page order Print All pages C Odd numbered pages C Even numbered pages Preview Save As PDF C Fax Cancel Print 1 Reverse page order Check this when you want to print a document from the end of page 2 Print Select whether all pages will be printed or only odd or even pages will be printed Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh Cover Page In the Cover Page menu you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page The banner page includes information about owner of the job job name application name date and time printer name and number of copies NOTE This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard M Print Cover Pag 7f None C Before Document C After Document Cover Page Type Standard Billing Info Preview Save As PDF a Cancel 1 Print Cover Page This sets how a banner page is inserted e None Select this not to print a banner page e Before Document Select this to print a banner page before the document e After Document Select this to print a banner page after the document 2 Cover Page Type Select the type of a banner page 3 B
210. dd Printer Wizard P 148 Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard PREPARATIONS Before installing the printer driver for Novell printing check with your system admin istrator to make sure of the following This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The NetWare server is configured correctly and running on your network The IPX SPX or TCP IP and NetWare settings are correct on this equipment Before installing the client software for Novell printing please make sure following network services and protocols are installed on your computer B Windows 98 ME e TCP IP protocol Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP IP network e PX SPX compatible protocol Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX SPX network Client for NetWare Network e Service for NetWare Directory Service Required only when using the NetWare server in NDS mode B Windows NT 4 0 e TCP IP protocol Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP IP network e NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport protocol Required only when using the Net Ware in the IPX SPX network e NWLink NetBIOS protocol Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX SPX network e Gateway and Client Services for NetWare B Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 e NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX SPX network e Gateway and Client Services for NetWare Installation for Novell Pri
211. de Printing from UNIX 315 Do not Print Blank Pages The Blank page mode can be selected using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value blankpage 0 Set the blank page mode disable Do not Print Blank Pages blankpage 1 Cancel the blank page mode enable Do not Print Blank Pages Toner Save The toner save mode can be set using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value tonersave on ON Set the toner save mode tonersave off OFF Cancel the toner save mode Example The command to set the toner save mode is lp o tonersave on filename Booklet Modes The booklet mode can be selected using the following options NOTE Booklet printing is available only when the ADU is installed Option Value Alternate Description Value booklet Select letter size paper for booklet printing mode letter booklet Select A4 size paper for booklet printing mode A4 booklet Select legal size paper for booklet printing mode legal booklet Select statement size paper for booklet printing mode statement booklet Select ledger size paper for booklet printing mode ledger booklet folio japan Select folio size paper for booklet printing mode folio booklet a3 Select A3 size paper for booklet printing mode A3 booklet a5 Select A5 size paper for booklet printing mode A5 booklet b4 Select JIS B4 si
212. dress of the printer Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 345 IPX Address Enter the IPX address of the printer This is available only when the IPX SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer and the computer is connected to the NetWare server Name Enter the printer name Location Enter the location of the printer NOTE You must enter Name and either IP Address or IPX Address 4 Entered printer is added in the Monitoring Device list Click OK TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery E x Monitoring Device Name IPAPXAddrss Location Mode 8 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 6 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 8 TOSHIBA e STUDID4 10 10 70 105 Css MFP 00C69875 10 10 70 106 am Add Discovered Device Nam IPAPXAddess_ Location Modei Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection OK Cancel Help Configuring Network Discovery Settings You can configure the discovery settings for the Network Discovery in the Discovery Settings dialog box Discovery Settings x Devices Find TOSHIBA Devices C Find All Devices on the Network r Network M Enable IP lt SPX Search J Enable TCP IP Search Search local subnet Specify a range From 10 10 70 100 To 10 10 70 106 Cancel Heo
213. driver locate CD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL6 lt language gt Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive 9X_ME PS lt language gt 7 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update v Specify a location E48 MENPCLSCAU SA Y lt Back Next gt Cancel 8 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Windows driver file search for the device TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows is now ready to install the best driver for this device Click Back to select a different driver or click Next to continue Location of driver I E S_MESPCLSC USA ES 4C5CSX INF You can type a name for this printer or you can use the name supplied below When you have finished click Next Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer Yes e No SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 33 10 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizar
214. e When the Department Code Enforcement is enabled the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled the invalid department code print job will be printed 3 Distinguish Thin Lines Select whether you require thin line printing 4 Do not Print Blank Pages Select whether you require printing blank pages Booklet Mode Options In the Booklet Mode Options menu you can set booklet printing NOTE Booklet printing is available only when the ADU is installed E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination r Booklet Mode Options x Booklet Paper Size Booklet Page Layout Left to Right T Booklet Center Margin 0 points T Booklet Outer Margin Opoints sj OOO 1 Booklet Page Size Select a paper size to print a booklet Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet before folding The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size you specify here Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh NOTE When booklet is used with cover page it is recommended to use AppleTalk printing rather than LPR printing 2 Booklet Page Layout Select the direction to be printed Right to Left Select this to create a booklet can be read from right to left e Left to Right Select this to create a booklet can be read from left to right 3 Booklet Center Margin Select the wid
215. e optional devices are installed Department Code This system can manage jobs by department code This feature lets you manage job counters for every department code For example a network administrator can check the number of copies printed from specific department member If the Department Code is enabled enter your Department Code provided by your adminis trator Configuring the Options After you complete the installation of the printer drivers you should configure the option set tings on the printer drivers There are two methods to configure the options NOTES 204 If this equipment and your computer are not connected in the TCP IP network you can con figure the options manually P 205 Configuring the Options Manually If this equipment and your computer are connected in the TCP IP network you can config ure the options automatically obtaining the settings using the SNMP Communication P 206 Configuring the Options Automatically When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows 98 Me you must click Update Now in the Configuration tab before starting to use for printing When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 and the option settings are changed in the Configuration tab the changes that are made in the Configuration tab will not be made available when printing from the application unless you change and apply one of the se
216. e Device Drivers e device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with Sy an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this device Gy Unknown device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific driver lt Back Cancel 4 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation D Select only Specify a location and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard E Locate Driver Files Where do you want Windows to search for driver files Search for driver files for the following hardware device oy Unknown The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following optional search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations Floppy disk drives v Specify a location Microsoft Windows Update lt Back Cancel
217. e Scheduled Print tab shows the order of scheduled print jobs for the selected device e Fax tab shows the number of fax jobs e e Filing tab shows the number of print jobs to be sent to Box e TopAccessComposer tab shows the number of print jobs to be sent to TopAccess Composer Invalid shows the number of print jobs in the Invalid print queue 2 IP IPX Address This item on the taskbar shows the IP address or IPX address for the device connected to the selected printer 3 Connection Status The icon shows the communication status of the printer zc Shows that TopAccessDocMon is communicating with the printer Shows that the communications link between TopAccessDocMon and the ais printer is broken and displays the message The printer is not responding TopAccessDocMon periodically tries to reestablish the link How frequently this is done depends upon the refresh rate Warnings display in yellow and errors in red Clicking the primary icon the first one takes you to the TopAccessDocMon window 4 Printer Icon Click the printer icon to update the information Checking Device Status In the Device Status tab you can check the printer status amp f TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c 10 x Printer Document View Help Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing Invalid Printer Information D Cil Drawer Status Counter
218. e TCP IP printer connection with Peer to Peer Utility Windows 98 Windows Me The Peer to Peer Utility allows you to create the peer to peer printer connection port by search ing this equipment in your network When your network does not allow Windows shared printer service or you cannot see this equipment in your network because it is in another subnet this will help you to find the system and create a printer connection P 118 Installing the Client Software for Peer to Peer Printing Internet Connection Available for Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 23 Connecting over Internet Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Setting up the IPP printer connection EB ESES If you print to this equipment over the Internet you can use IPP printing under Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 This allows you to print to this equipment from any where on the Internet P 127 Installing the Client Software for IPP Printing SUPPLEMENTS To print with an IPP connection this equipment must be configured to enable the IPP Print Service and must be connected to the Internet Ask your administrator if the IPP Print Service is enabled e You can also perform Email printing over the Internet For more information about Email printing please refer to following section P 325 Email Printing Novell Printing
219. e The Confirm Uninstall dialog box appears 4 Click OK Confirm Uninstall 3 4 x You are going to completely uninstall all of the TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client Software Components Do you want to continue i Cancel D Click Yes to delete the setting files TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client P xi 9 Do you want to delete the settings For the Following components tf TopAccessDocMon Yes f e Deleting files starts NOTE If you want to re install the client software later click No to remain the setting files You can restore the data and settings when you re install the client software 6 Select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish to restart your computer InstallShield Wizard Complete InstallShield Wizard has successfully uninstalled TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client from your computer Yes want to restart my computer now No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup lt Back Cancel e Some files may be deleted after restarting the computer 164 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used NOTE Before uninstalling the software please make sure you exit TopAc
220. e command to set the black over print mode is lp o blackoverprint 1 filename For e STUDIOA50 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Black Over Print option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Printing Guide Printing from UNIX 323 Other Printing Methods This equipment also supports following printing methods LL P 324 FTP Printing LL P 325 Email Printing FTP Printing FTP printing is available when the FTP print service is enabled on this equipment You can print a document by sending the print file to this equipment using the FTP This equip ment can accept following files for printing e PCL file e PS file e Text file SUPPLEMENTS In Windows you can create the PCL file and PS file using the printer driver To cre ate the PCL file or PS file change the printer port of the printer driver to FILE port and print a document using the printer driver For more information about printing to a file refer to the Windows documentation n Macintosh you can crate the PS file using the printer driver To create the PS file select File at the Destination drop down box in the Print dialog box to print For more information about printing to a file refer to the Macintosh documentation Printing a file using the FTP command The procedure below describes the example of printing using the FTP command with the MS DOS Prompt 1 Launch the MS DOS Prompt
221. e double in the bottom for the portrait document or in the left for the landscape document au e Saddle Stitch Portrait Saddle Stitch Landscape Select this to staple double in the center for a booklet to be printed Select this only when booklet printing is per formed 1 NOTES This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed e Only Upper Left Portrait can be selected when the Single staple Finisher is installed e Double stapling is available only when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Fin isher is installed e Saddle Stitch Portrait Saddle Stitch Landscape is displayed when you select Multi position Stapler or Multi position Stapler and Hole Punch is selected in the Installable Options settings during the installation However this option is available only when the Saddle stitch Finisher is installed Printing Modes In the Printing Mode menu you can set the way this equipment handles the print job This menu allows you to enable various system features such as Private Print and Proof Print E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Print Job Department Code Distinguish Thin Lines Do not Print Blank Pages OOO 1 Print Mode This sets the type of print job e Normal Select this to print a job normally Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 283 e Proof Select this to print the first copy of a multi copy
222. e printer drivers for USB printing you must install the printer drivers by Plug and Play functions instead of installing the client software using the installer in the Client CD ROM When this equipment is connected to a USB port of Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 computers the Plug and Play Wizard automatically starts You can install a printer driver using this method but other client software cannot be installed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows SUPPLEMENTS 54 NOTE NOTE TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is connected using only the USB cable However when this equipment and your computer are connected to the local area network and this equipment is connected to the USB port of your computer you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs To install TopAccessDocMon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit USB printing is not supported in the Windows NT 4 0 Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play The procedure to in
223. e same when Win dows Me is used 1 Install the printer driver by Add Printer Wizard Please install the printer driver following the instruction of the installa tion for parallel printing P 40 Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard 2 After installing the client software click Start select Set tings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Programs x Favorites N Documents Gi Settings Control Panel C Eind d A Taskbar amp Start Menu ey Folder Options Hel g a A Active Desktop Windows Update Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 3 Select the printer driver and select Properties in the File menu LS Printers OY x File Edit View Go Favorites Help Open re x X Fa td y EB Pause Printing Up Map Drive Disconnect Cut Copy Set as Default Purge Print Documents o Sharing dd Printer TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Capture Printer Port eSTUDIO4 EESNENININEIE End Capture Series PCLSc Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Printers Work Offline Close o Displays the properties of the selected items Z e The printer driver properties dialog box appears 4 Display the Details tab and click Add Port TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 24 x Image Quality Fonts Configuration About General Details Color Management Sharin
224. eType fonts are printed This tab is only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder P 244 Font Tab e Configuration Tab The Configuration Tab allows you to configure the options When any optional unit is installed in this equipment set the configuration of the machine on this tab This tab is only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder P 246 Configuration Tab e About Tab The About Tab contains the version information of the printer driver P 249 About Tab 3 Preview window In the Preview windows you can check the current settings in the printer driver You can change view type by clicking Graphic to display the print options settings graphically or Text to display the print options settings as a texts 4 Profile Print option settings can be saved on your hard disk You can save print option settings by clicking Save As and easily load a setting file by selecting a profile name in the drop down box P 213 Setting Print Options Using Profiles 5 Restore Defaults Click this to restore the settings to the original factory defaults 6 OK Click this to enter the input settings and complete the print options settings 7 Cancel Click this to cancel the input settings and exit the print options settings 8 Apply Click this to enter the input settings without closing the print options settings This button 1s only displayed when the printe
225. eap tiit iess ire ls 22 Smoothing Mac OS 8 6 0r 9 X Goes sss mi SE eu 288 MICOS dec d 308 PCIE NG vnlt nostrae aoe beens 240 PEELO anea 241 Po iaraa E ot Sn 243 UAND aT IM E 315 SOIL C ODISS aaa anain Naaa tenes 221 254 Sandar nansa a a EE 226 31162 0 E ee EA EA E ET 222 256 Staple Down the Center 231 262 379 INDEX Stapling MACOS SOOLI c ocsteustes dosis lon domam iisenpos 281 MaC LP der 303 OND dic ON ORT NN A 310 Start Discovery Local Discoyery ie apes h 335 Network Discovery cccceeeessssseeeeeeees 343 UAT euch deca cteutivasasennnsaedesin adlarcuntacuts 329 330 Status Messages PEMA OD sn 352 Stop Discovery LO CalDISCOVELY td ea dieto bere 335 Network Discovery eeeeeeee 343 Store to e Filing 22352325 2 93 Substitution Table Edit sssss 245 System Requirements Iac milosh oet dio ise uas Docs pt s 169 OND oatoscatootdue buen E e UR eint 186 VVC O WS siessen 19 T Text EEE ein AE 321 Text Wiappine semoene ub Us 320 Toner Save Mac OSS O OF 9X ornan 288 MaC OS A oina E 308 UNIX d ES 316 WAC OWS oona A 236 Top Margin rrisnin a 321 TopAccessComposer tab 347 TopAccessDocMon esee 18 328 TopAccessDocMon window 339 Tray WAL INITIO cero Set tudo cles a Dei e s 298 TUE Type ODIO dieu Dosen Uim dE 244 Two S
226. earch printers in specific range of IP addresses When this is selected enter the IP addresses in From field and To field to spec ify the range 3 Select the equipment that you want to connect and click OK TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery E x IP IPX Address 10 10 70 105 E MFP 00C67861 TOSHIBA e STU Er Select a printer for your printer Consult with your administrator for more Start Discovery information Advanced Manual Selection Device Information 8j Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 97 4 It automatically obtains the network queue in the Network path or queue name field TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x CS Select Port ame Select the port for Printer ien Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name Mfp 00c67861 print Discovery lt Back Next gt Cancel NOTE tautomatically obtains the IP address of the equipment and the queue name speci fied by an administrator in the Network path or queue name field in the General submenu page of the Setup menu in the TopAccess administrator mode If you can not obtain the queue name ask your administrator that the Network path or queue name field is correctly specified 5 Continue the installation from s
227. ected e The Printers dialog box appears 2 Click Yes Ce E E i Before you can use the printer Org mfp_queue dept1 org it must be set up on your computer Do you want Windows to set up the printer and continue this operation 59 e e When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for each Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker the printer driver is automatically installed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 145 e Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker the Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears Continue to the next step 3 Click OK xi The server on which the printer resides does not have the correct printer driver installed IF you want to install the driver on your local computer click OK mn 4 Click Have Disk xi Sh Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with Cie an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AT amp T hd AGFA AccuSet 10005F v52 3 Have Disk Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 5 Click Browse Install From Disk E X Insert the ma
228. ed Corrective Action Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable 353 Printer Driver Errors Printer Driver Installation Error Messages 354 Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files Problem Description The wrong port type was selected from the Printer Ports dialog Corrective Action 1 Click Cancel until the Add Printer Wizard terminates 2 Double click Add Printer from the Printers folder but when prompted to select a port choose Local Port Client Software CD Now Required Problem Description When adding a new printer driver the end user did not choose the Have Disk option instead he selected the printer name from the Add Printer list Corrective Action 1 Cancel the Add Printer Wizard 2 Double click Add Printer from the Printers folder but when prompted to locate the driver click Have Disk 3 Select Use Existing Driver to add another copy of an existing driver or browse to the subdi rectory that contains the appropriate inf file File DRV on Client CD Count Not Be Found Problem Description When adding a new printer driver the user did not choose the Have Disk option but selected the printer name from the Add Printer list Corrective Action 1 Cancel the Add Printer Wizard 2 Double click Add Printer from the Printers folder but when prompted to locate the driver click Have Disk 3 Browse to the subdirectory th
229. eeee nennen nnne nnne nen nnne nnns 5 FablesOF CONES MR I S 6 je Ae d 13 Features and FUNCIONS sation tices niet me MU de dnd Deme Res EID La US 14 Aout the CIIent CD ROM oireista usce tco ut set inda 15 POM VWWINGOW Si P c Et 15 FOrMaCNOS pea Md TREE EN 16 gemi P qe t 16 2 Installing Client Software odore uoo unen peas Eau eU det update de Dues ns een ees 17 Installing Client Software for Windows ccccscceecceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeees 18 About Client Software for Windows ccccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeessaaeeeetseseeeeeaas 18 Planing Tor installation 5 4 eet ee RH eee ce EM 18 Before Installing Client Software seeeessseeeeeeenn 18 When GL DocMon Has Been Installed eeeeeeseseesssss 18 When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed 18 Types of Printer Drivers 5 eicit Hopes E 19 System REQUIFEMENMS ccccsseececcceseeeeceeseecceauseeecseuseeessaueeeeessaaeeeessegsesenaas 19 About Installation Procedure cccccccccssecccssececceseecseseeeseseeseueessanseetsueeeneas 20 Parallel Port CONNECTION ccccceecceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 20 USB OCCU OM e n 21 Local Area Network over TCP IP esee 21 internet Connections reed sede teo e detects ere a baee un dou ded ines 23 Novel w isuse Pe Tc c RR eens 24
230. eeeeeesseeeeeesaeeesesseneeeeeeas 330 Changing the Refresh IS8le a rote io tate tbe ee too nena ee o 331 Finding the Printer Address cccccccssssececeeeeeseseeeseeseeseaseessseeeneneeens 333 MIODIFOFIBG TNE ERMET eoi p iac ed a e brscUP Mise a s aaea 333 How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window seseeeesse 333 Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu suse 333 Accessing from the Printers File M nu cccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 334 wi r egnnakre u hziiQc d 335 TopAccessDocMon WIndows aa aaee aa a aa aeaa NAAA A NAi EARN 339 Checking Device Status ccccceccccecsseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeesaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 341 Changing Monitoring Devices ccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeesaeeeeeeas 342 Addo DEVICES EM EE 342 MOMMONING QUCUCS NR ER EET 347 maureen lm 350 S TTOUDIGSDOOl H 2 tip dora Dio aa Eva d cca vb ov cU UE RR ACA elie 351 When Printing cannot be Performed eeeeeeeseseeeeeeer 352 Printer JrTVer ENO S ac ieepuscuc inate Ua uev ED HO a Fai nu DORIA ON PuPDEL MR POUR dE 354 Printer Driver Installation Error Messages ssseeeeseene 354 Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 354 Client Software CD Now Required ccccccsesceceeeeeceeeeeeceeseeseeseeseeeesaes 354 File DRV on Client CD Count Not Be Found
231. eeseeeseeeeeeeneee 213 Fe FUME ODIONS qM 216 So E omm TT PR 218 minim ooo cU 224 Layout Tab Standard WINdOW iiaeiai cenena iaee nia oea 226 Layout Tab Booklet Window essere 230 Layout Tab Multiple Pages per Sheet Window 233 EHGCETdDut sh Ran ada A Mea uta uda ur LM Lc dU iE 235 intere Er 239 gie mios cc D CES 244 CODIIgurauon La hated ed i e ido t to ee Lect rens 246 ADOULJT 3D uc teisiscaer Lotti Medi dtes aa io ufo 249 Printing with Extended Print Functionality 2 0 00 ccccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 249 Printing Various Print Job TYPe S cccceccecseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 249 Printing Scheduled Print Jobs eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennn 249 PANUNG PEVate TP EDUSJODSa bu meiddeteresee t bme peadsi eoe E examen 250 Printing T roof Print JODS coo eti retten ose rige i Pu itid 251 Creating An Overlay File os ueuiet teet aded eee eb cest e bela ebep ote er rasis 251 eaedior ispeM m T 252 Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options 253 SOE PONUN ce esc ao Gent gei onec Oen en sea os Se cao ou ES I PLE TL Mentum es 253 Enlarge Reduce Printing eese 255 Printing Color Document in Gray scale seeseeseeeeeee 255 Stapling and Hole PUNCHING
232. eld fize ard x Select Program Folder p Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Please select a program folder Program Folder InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f you want to change the program folder rename the folder in the Program Folders field e The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 29 10 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x Start Copying Files T Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings TARGET DIRECTORY C Program Files TOSHIBASTOSHIBA e STUDIO Client The following components will be installed to System Folder TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Agta TrueType Fonts InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f any printer drivers have been installed on your computer the confir mation message appears Continue to next step e f no printer driver has been installed on your computer it starts copy ing files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displa
233. elect this to search on all drives when searching for fonts Selected Paths Select this to enter the path to the drive when searching for fonts Enter the path to the drive you want to search when you select this 3 Click OK e When you select Selected Drives Continue to the next step e When you select All Drives skip to Step 6 e When you select Selected Paths skip to Step 6 4 The Select Drives dialog box appears D Select a drive to search for fonts from the list and click OK 6 Searching for fonts begins The Search for fonts dialog box is displayed while searching for fonts Printing Guide Managing Fonts with Font Manager e If you cancel to search for fonts click Stop T The searched fonts are displayed at the Available Font list Installing Fonts in Windows After searching the fonts you can install them in Windows Once the fonts are installed in Win dows the fonts can be displayed on the dialog box in applications and printed by the machine Installing the TrueType fonts 1 Highlight the fonts you want to install in Windows from the Available Font List 2 Click the Fonts menu and select Install 3 The fonts are installed in Windows and added to the installed fonts list Uninstalling Fonts in Windows You can uninstall the fonts in Windows However even if you uninstall the fonts from Windows the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the dri
234. ent in the grayscale mode If this option is not specified the default color mode will be used color Example The command to specify color mode is Ip o color filename For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Color Mode option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Stapling The staple position can be specified using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value staple 0 Stapling is turned off staple 1 Staple in the top left corner of a portrait page and the upper right corner of a landscape page Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Option Value Alternate Description Value staple 2 Put two staples on the left side of a portrait page or the top side of a landscape page printed on long edge feed paper This com mand has no affect when the paper is fed from the short edge side staple 3 Staple in the bottom left corner of a portrait page and the upper left corner of a landscape page staple 4 Staple in the top right corner of a portrait page and the bottom right corner of a landscape page staple 5 Put 2 staples on the right side of a portrait page or the bottom side of a landscape page printed on long edge feed paper This command has no affect when the paper is fed from the short edge side staple 6 Staple in the bottom right corner of a portrait page and the lower left corner of a landscape page st
235. ent in your net work a IP PeerT oPeer Setup Version 3 12 i OF x Available Printers UntName UntlP Pot Description Flags Unit Name Column based on 1 i i i Select C Serial Number C DNS Name Find Printers Clear List 3 P Address C UnitName Number of hops 2 Slide e The system displays the found equipment in the Available Printers list NOTE f this equipment cannot be found you can change the number of hops to be searched at the Number of hops field and try again For more information about specifying the number of hops please see the Online Help for the Peer to Peer util ity SUPPLEMENT If the IP PeerToPeer Setup Version 3 12 dialog box does not appear click Start and select IP P2P in the IP P2P folder in the Programs folder 122 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2 Make sure S is displayed in the Flags column for this equipment to be connected If not select this equipment and click Select to display S in the Flags column IP PeerToPeer Setup Version 3 12 Available Printers UntlP Pot Description Flags 10 10 70 105 10 10 70 105 z Ok Cancel m Manual Entry Add Delete Help m Unit Name Column based on Find Print Clear List i C SerialNumber C DNS Name End Printers Geatit IPAddress C Unit Name Number df hops 2 Perm
236. enu e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections To continue click Next Bach Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 49 4 Select Local printer uncheck the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Local or Network Printer Is the printer attached to your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer Local printer Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer C Network printer lt Back Cancel 5 Select Use the following port and select LPT1 Then click Next Add Printer Wizard E Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port Use the following port Printer Port LPT3 Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM2 Serial Port COM Serial Part zi Note Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer C Create a new port lt Back Cancel 6 Click Have Disk Add Printer Wizard E Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and m
237. epending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Duplicate When you check on this you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet Layout Tab Booklet Window In the Booklet window you can print a properly paginated booklet or magazine style publica tion You can even create bound booklets that are folded and stapled in the center e Booklet printing is available only when the ADU is installed e Booklet printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 x Setup PrntJob Layout Effect Image Quality About C Standard Booklet C Multiple Pages per Sheet Dutput Document Layout Letter Half on Letter Center Margin po Outer Margin 0 00 Units inches Y o Letter E E Graphics Profile None vj Save As Delete Restore Defaults Use Front Cover O eoo o Cancel Apply Help 1 Output Document Layout Select the booklet size to be made e A5 on A4 Select this to print a A5 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on A4 paper to fit on half a sheet A5 e A4 on A3 Select this to print a A4 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on A3 paper to fit on half a sheet A4 e B5 on B4 Select this to print a B5 size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on B4 paper to fit on half a sheet B5 e Letter Half on
238. er 14 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard t i Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other network users Indicate whether you want this printer to be available to other users If you share this printer you must provide a share name Do not share this printer C Share as lt Back Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 161 15 Select Yes to print a test page and click Next Add Printer Wizard Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do you want to print a test page Yes C No lt Back Cancel 16 Click Finish Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard Y ou have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Shared as lt Not Shared Port M rg Mfp queue dept org Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Default Yes Test page Yes To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel e Start copying files 17 The installation is completed e Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Uninstalling the Client1 Software 162 The following instru
239. er List 4 Status 3 Select AppleTalk in the drop down box and select the zone name that this equipment is located Printer List AppleTalk Network Local AppleTalk Zone Character Set Western Printer Model Auto Select e If the AppleTalk network is not configured with a zone select Local AppleTalk zone 180 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 4 Select this equipment displayed in the list Printer List AppleTalk H Local AppleTalk Zone H Name 4 Type MFP 00C67861 PostScript printer Character Set Western Printer Model Auto Select H Cancel add Printer List AppleTalk H i a Local AppleTalk Zone Nam i Type MFP_00C67861 PostScript printer Character Set Western v Printer Model Auto Select Generic Apple e The Choose a File dialog box appears 6 Locate the folder that the PPD file is copied select the PPD file and click Choose Choose a File From en lproj pe t prr27Appu gz tkp2135x ppd gz TKPH7401 PPD gz A Tkph7404 ppd gz TKPH7801 PPD gz e Tkph7804 ppd gz TOSHIBA e 04511Series Xerox Phaser 790 gz a Xerox Phaser 3400 gz A Kind Document P ve PD nid P CEED gz Size 80 KB Go to 4 X Add to Favorites Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 181 7 Click Add
240. er ecd aei ocean paa a sae iios 247 Ip command sore onetrtesi atl ess a eaten 309 LPR Prine 2er ooo b o 22 Iptap COBIDDJAHG iode eei ot upset 309 M Macintosh AppleTalk printing MICOS TOOR outputs sd mp Eon eid a ats 174 MIC OS EP Oper cp PER 180 Macintosh IP printing eeeeesessss 77 Macintosh LPR printing sssse 170 Wana ES Cale sernai a O 219 255 Manual Selection Local DiISCOVeby 39 est es Feet be besten end 397 Network Discovery sirena 345 MEMO aea usado T ROS lu OE b o eoq oit bats 248 Mebo rcc pP 331 NUOD fontem teles abdia as eene LasiE cured dft 236 Monitoring Device d o a 346 Multiple Pages per Sheet 233 N Negatye POSIU VE auc d p S ERE REM nets 236 Network Discovery sssss 343 345 Never generate Type 42 format 244 Norma PHR ecort incor bei ies esi oea e user ebes 224 NOU BIGIUOTE e dee ette aia 329 330 INoVelbPErntiig seetoo t Ruso bt ex eir 24 378 Number of Copies Guutseostitidda adios 221 Number of Pages per Sheet CINTA i baie chapel aia bam anheccecse tad tdu 317 Number of pages per Sheet 263 Number of pages per sheet 233 Number Pages from Right to Left 231 262 O Orientation Mac 05 5 0 Or 9 X arnee ea 2129 INGO OS A a 290 DINI NC carcsiia seis ebbe OG eh abeft odo 318 WING OWS sides dateien Medius dio dis EM eds acd 2
241. er for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 156 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Installing the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start and select Printers in Settings Windows 2000 or select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Server 2003 Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults The Printers folder is opened 2 Double click the Add Printer icon ioi xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 4m Back b v GQsearch Gyrolders 4 R GS X A E adres mites OOO mj A o TS 1s TOSHIBA LJ dd Printe Printers e STUDIO4 Add Printer The Add Printer wizard gives you step by step instructions For installing a printer To install a new printer double click the Add Printer icon Windows 2000 Support n object s selected e When using the Windows XP Server 2003 click Add a printer in the Printer Tasks menu e The Add Printer Wizard dialog
242. er found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search CAI386 v Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware e The Browse For Folder dialog box appears 5 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 6 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows XP Server 2003 is located and click OK Browse For Folder Select the folder that contains drivers for your hardware D USB 3 Cy wzk xP 2003 3 Pasc FRE D GER ITA SPA ons To view any subfolders click a plus sign above e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 7 Click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Pua ta Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below
243. er inch pitch value Set the character pitch to value characters per inch In all the cases shown above the Courier font will also be selected When the pitch is changed the font size will automatically be scaled to the appropriate size If this option is not specified the default pitch and font will be used Example The command to specify 8 characters per inch is lp o pitch 8 filename Page Length The number of lines to print on a page can be specified with the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value pl value Set the lines per page to value As this equipment is a page printer we cannot change the physical length of a piece of paper so the actual effect of this command is to change the value for lines per inch so that the requested number of lines is printed on the page The actual page length may differ from this value if the top margin or the text length option is used If this option is not specified the PJL command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used The minimum page length allowable is 5 If value is less than 5 page length is set to 5 The command to specify 66 lines per page is Ip o pl 66 filename Pure Black and Pure Gray The pure black and pure gray mode can be set using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value pureblackgray Disable the pure black mode and pure gray mode 0 pureblackgray En
244. eries and e STUDIO280 Series The Resolution option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 3 Smoothing Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly 4 Distinguish Thin Lines Check this to print thin lines clearly 5 Use Black for All Text Check this to print all texts in 100 black except white texts Printing Guide Printing from Windows 241 For PS3 Printer Driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Printing Preferences 2 xi Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About Image Quality Type O General C Photograph Presentation Halftone Default Letter Pesan 600 x 600 dpi EO E v Smoothing Text Distinguish Thin Lines v Black Over Print Graphics OIO Profile None V Pure Black 7 Save As Delete V Pure Gray Use Black for All Texts 9 Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Help 1 Image Quality Type This sets how colors are printed by selecting the job type The printer driver automatically applies proper color quality for selected job type e General Select this to apply proper color quality for printing a general color docu ment e Photograph Select this to apply proper color quality for printing photos e Presentation Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a vivid document Line Art Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a document co
245. erlay file e Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image must be created at the same size orientation color mode and resolution 6 Store to e Filing Select this to save a job to a Box When this is selected select the box from the drop down menu on the right If the printer driver connects to this equipment via SMB it detects the available Box numbers and Box name in the drop down box If not all Box numbers are listed in the drop down box If you select a user box you may be required to enter the password for the selected box The job saved to a Box can be printed from the Touch Panel Display at a later time It can also be composed with other documents using the e Filing web utility You can also print a job and save it to a box by checking on the Print option NOTE When you store a document in e Filing using the printer driver the printing image not the original document in your computer will be stored in e Filing SUPPLEMENT For more information about e Filing operations see e Filing Guide 7 Destination This selects the destination tray to which jobs will be output e Inner Tray Select this to route the output to the inner tray e Job Separator Upper Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep arator e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only e Job Separator Lower Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep arat
246. ers ABFA AccuSet 1000 AGFA AccuSet 1000SF v2013 108 ABFA AccuSet 10005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 1500 AGFA AccuSet 1500SF v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA ArcuSet ANNSF v N13 108 z Have Disk lt Back Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 5 Click Browse ali Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from 4 Browse e The Open dialog box appears 6 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 142 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98 Me is located and click OK Open HEI File name Folders eS4c5c9x inf d 49x_me pclic usa Cancel Network E Drives E d e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PS lt language gt 8 Click OK Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into m the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from D 59x_MESPCL5C USA Y Browse
247. escription Value tl value Set the length to value lines If the text length is set too high the part of the text may not appear due to the printer s unprint able area The text length will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the printer s logical page length minus the top margin The text length is specified in rows from the top margin Set ting this value may affect the number of lines specified using the page length option If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to set the text length to 40 lines is Ip o tl 40 filename Banner Page A banner page is automatically generated for each file in each job The banner page contains the following items The banner page is always sent as a PCL5e job e The name of the user that submitted the print job e The job ID number and from which workstation it was submitted e The title of the job This title can be specified using the t option The same title is used for every file within a job The default title is controlled by the Ip command Alist of the options that were specified to print the job e The number of copies of the job that will be printed e The name of the printer or its IP address e The date and time when the job was printed according to the print server e A short summary listing the available options Only one copy of the banner page is printed
248. essDocMon 328 Running TopAccessDocMon To access the TopAccessDocMon window you must first activate it Starting TopAccessDocMon First load TopAccessDocMon so its icon appears on the Windows operating system taskbar You only need to do this once 1 Click the Start menu Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 2 Select TOSHIBA e STUDIO Client in the Programs menu and click TOSHIBA e STUDIO TopAccessDocMon E Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults gt Fal Accessories Fen Startup gt Internet Explorer el Outlook Express fz TOSHIBA e STUDIO Client gt fer TOSHIBA e STUDIO TopAccessDocMon e The TopAccessDocMon icon appears in the taskbar Document Monitor Taskbar Menu After TopAccessDocMon is activated you can access its functions from the Document Monitor menu display from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the taskbar Disable Configure Exit T Top ccessDocMon T Top ccess The following menus appears in the Document Monitor taskbar menu e Disable Enable This allows you to enable or disable document monitoring To turn on document monitoring click Enable from the Document Monitor menu The option changes to Disable and displays the TopAccessDocMon icon on the taskbar Click Disable to terminate document monitoring e Configure This allows you to configure how TopAccessDocMon monitors the devices When this is selected the configu
249. estart your computer 15 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port In the Select Port screen during the installation you can also obtain the network queue name automatically by searching the equipment There two ways to obtain the SMB printer port from the equipment LH P 96 Searching the equipment automatically LH P 98 Specifying the IP address manually Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 95 96 Searching the equipment automatically 1 Click Discovery TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x Select Port a f Select the port for Printer Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name LPT1 Discovery Browse lt Back Cancel e The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears 2 Click Start Discovery x Name iPAPXAddess Location Modi Lr Select Start Discovery to begin the a discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection Device Information Gk Cancel e t starts searching the equipment in the network
250. etting up printing via a Windows print server see the Network Administrators Guide If you cannot use a Windows print server in your network use Peer to Peer printing for Win dows 98 Me and LPR printing for Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver Problem Description When Use PostScript Passthrough in the PostScript Settings dialog box is enabled the equip ment cannot print a document correctly because an application may output the PostScript code that the equipment cannot read Corrective Action Disable Use PostScript Passthrough in the PostScript Settings dialog box and print a docu ment Printing Guide Printer Driver Errors TopAccessDocMon Errors TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions The Device is Not Responding Problem Description The status bar reads The device is not responding and the broken connection icon is displayed in the taskbar Technically this icon means that the SNMP manager on the client machine cannot communicate with the SNMP agent on this equipment Several error conditions can cause this status e The network connection between the client and the device has been broken e The device IP Address has changed and the client is still using the old address e The device is currently rebooting e The SNMP agent on the device is not functioning properly or has stopped functioning Corrective Action 1 Make sure that the SNMP Network
251. evice Type C Standard Generic Network Card Custom Settings lt Back Cancel The Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 83 9 Select LPR at the Protocol option enter Print in the Queue Name field at the LPR Settings option and then click OK Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor x Port Settings Port Name IP_10 10 70 120 Printer Name or IP Address 0 10 70 120 Protocol C Raw LPR r Raw Settings Port Number sr 00 LPR Settings Queue Name prin LPR Byte Counting Enabled r1 SNMP Status Enabled Community Name pubiic SNMP Device Index e The screen returns to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box SUPPLEMENT If an administrator has enabled the Raw TCP printing on this equipment you can set up Raw TCP printing as well When you want to set up Raw TCP printing select Raw at the Protocol option and enter 9100 in the Port Number field at the Raw Settings option Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor E 2 x Port Settings Port Name P1 0 10 70 120 Printer Name or IP Address D 10 70 120 Protocol Raw C LPR m Raw Settings Port Number 5 oo LPR Settings Jueue Name F LPR Byte Counting Enabled rT SNMP Status Enabled Commit sity Name pubic
252. f the process continues for a long time it is because too many network clients are on the network Also you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a printer in the IPX SPX network In this case you can configure the discovery settings using the Advanced button P 346 Configuring Network Discovery Settings 4 Select the printers that you want to monitor from the Discov ered Device list and click Add TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery x Monitoring Device L1 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 Cs TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 L13 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 10 10 70 105 Discovered Device IP IP Address v 5 MFP 00C63875 10 10 70 106 TOSHIBA e STU S Select printers to monitor from Discovered Device Start Discovery Select printer s to remove from Monitoring Device Advanced Manual Selection OK Cancel Help e The selected printer is added to the Monitoring Device list SUPPLEMENT You can remove the printers from the Monitoring Device list To do this select the printer that you want to remove and click Remove However you cannot remove the printers which are related to the installed printer drivers 5 Click OK 344 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon Adding new device by entering the printer address manually 1 Click Add Device in the Device Status tab TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series
253. fer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to replace the Yellow Toner Staple Empty Staple Empty Please Set Staple Cartridge Set the Staple Cartridge Refer to the Opera tor s Manual for Basic Function for instruc tion Finisher s Lower Tray Sta ples are Empty Please Replace Saddle Staple Car tridge Set the Saddle Staple Cartridge Refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for instruction Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors Printer Error Details Finisher Disconnected Please Join Finisher to Copier Description Join the Finisher to the copier stably Hole Punch Jam in Finisher Please Clear Hole Punch Clear hole punches from the Finisher Refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for instruction Staple Jam in Finisher Please Clear Staple Remove jammed staples from the Finisher Refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for instruction Staple Jam in Lower Tray of Finisher Please Clear Staple Remove jammed staples from the Saddle stitch Finisher Refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for instruction Toner Error Please Use Genuine TOSHIBA Toner Check and adjust the toner bottle Finisher Lower Tray Full Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Lower Tray of Sad dle stitch Finisher Mixed Sized Paper not Allowed Please Check Paper Check the paper Finisher Tray Paper
254. g Setup Print Job Layout Effect 7 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port Add Pott Print using the following driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c New Driver Capture Printer Port End Capture Timeout settings Not selected 5 seconds Transmission retry 45 seconds Spool Settings Port Settings Cancel e The Add Port dialog box appears 5 Select Other and Local Port and click OK Add Port L2 x Select the type of port you want to add C Network Specify the network path to the printer Other Click the type of port you want to add e The Port Name dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 149 6 Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net Ware file server in the Enter a port name field and click OK If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode enter as the following in the Network path or queue name field lt NetWare file server name gt lt queue name gt Example NetWare file server name Nwsrv queue name mfp 00c67861 Nwsrv mfp 00c67861 Port Name L2 x Enter a port name MNwsrvsmfp queue Cancel If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode enter as the follow ing in the Network path or queue name field lt Tree gt lt queue name gt lt Context gt lt Tree gt E
255. g 31 characters in the Server and Printer name combination may not be supported by some applications Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes e No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 47 13 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name C Shared Not shared Share Name Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT When you select Shared you can also select the operating systems of printer driv ers that you want to install for clients If you select any operating systems repeat the procedure from Step 5 to 11 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems 14 Select Yes to print a test page and click Finish Add Printer Wizard Ed After your printer is installed you can print a test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel 15 The installation is completed NO
256. g the Printer Driver 88 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Installing the Client Software for SMB Printing PREPARATION NOTE REQUIREMENT This section describes how to set up the client software for SMB printing which is available for the local area network over TCP IP There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for SMB printing Using the installer in the Client CD ROM When you insert the Client CD ROM into your CD ROM drive the installer automatically starts You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer If you want to install printer drivers as well as other client software this method is convenient P 89 Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer Using Point and Print You can install the printer driver by double clicking network queues on the system By this method printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so that the Client CD ROM is not required However other client software cannot be installed using this method P 100 Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print Using Add Printer Wizard When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment using Point and Print install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard P 104 Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard Before installing the printer driver for SMB printing check with your system adminis trator to make sure of the foll
257. he Parallel Interface is installed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows USB Connection Available for Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Connecting with USB Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Se Windows XP SS Windows Server 2003 Setting up the USB Printer Connection This equipment supports the USB 2 0 Full Speed connection When this equipment is connected to your computer with the USB cable you must install the printer drivers using the Windows Plug and Play functions P 53 Installing the Client Software for USB Printing Local Area Network over TCP IP When this equipment is connected to your computer in the local area network over TCP IP vari ous printing methods are available such as LPR Printing only available for Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 SMB Printing Using Peer to Peer Utility only available for Windows 98 Me Some of them are applicable to your environments the printing methods generally recom mended are decided by the Windows version e Windows 98 Windows Me SMB Printing or Peer to Peer Printing e Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 LPR Printing If you have no advance for an installation from your administrator check these printing methods whether they are suited to your network environments NOTE It assumes using SMB printing in a small network If you can use the
258. he Printer Address Accessing configuration To display the configuration dialog box right click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar and select Configure from the Document Monitor menu You can also access the configuration dialog box by double clicking on the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar To close the dialog box without changing settings click Cancel Configuring the Start Up Options In the Startup tab you can set TopAccessDocMon to launch when starting Windows TopAccessDocMon v1 0 13 1 E E3 Startup Notification Refresh Rates Installed Q O i Bun the document monitor when starting Windows nebenbei detienen tiat ida Cancel Hep 1 Run the document monitor when starting Windows Check this to run TopAccessDocMon when starting Windows When this is checked the TopAccessDocMon icon will automatically appear in the task bar every time you start Win dows Configuring the Notifications In the Notification tab you can enable or disable the events notified by TopAccessDocMon TopAccessDocMon v1 0 13 1 E x Startup Notification Refresh Rates Installed 1 IE vi Document has been printed successfully m Method Cancel Hep 1 Events This sets the events which are notified To enable or disable the notification of each event click the arrow button in the right
259. he image overlay is printed once per sheet not once per page e Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image must be created at the same size orientation color mode and resolution Printing Guide Printing from Windows 267 Printing an overlay image on a print job 1 Display the Effect tab and check the Use Overlay Image box v Use Overlay Image Browse 2 Click Browse The Open dialog box appears 3 Select the overlay file to be used and click Open Open 21x Lookin S veiy Fis amp ee EB My Documents NH My Computer j ng e es File name FILEO1 m vw Files of type Overlay Files 05C Cancel My Network P Open as read only AL 4 Set other print options you require and click OK D Click OK or Print to send a print job The print job is printed with the overlay image 268 Printing Guide Printing from Windows Printing on a Tab Paper This equipment supports tab printing which can print in the tab extension of the tab paper NOTES This equipment can print only on the Letter sized or A4 sized tab paper f mis printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously dirt may adhere to the reverse side of a paper To avoid this it is recommended to print a tab paper as a separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning before printing next tab paper e When p
260. he initial values of print options from the Printing Default button in the Advanced tab on the properties dialog box that can be displayed by selecting Properties in the File menu The initial values cannot be set by the following method How to display 1 Click Start Settings and select Printers for Windows 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 or Printers and Faxes for Windows XP Server 2003 2 Select the printer driver for the equipment click the File menu and select Properties for Windows 98 Me Docu ment Defaults for Windows NT 4 0 or Printing Prefer ences for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Setting Print Options for Each Print Job Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Print dialog box within an application will establish the values for the current print job The print option settings specific to each print job are set using this method How to display 1 Click the File menu and select Print on an application 2 Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and Click Properties Setting Print Options Using Profiles Print option settings can be saved so you can easily load specifically configured settings for a particular job In order to print a document using profiles you should create the saved profile first P 214 Saving profile Once you save profile you can load the settings for a particular job to print a document P 215 Loading profile
261. he installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard The procedure to install the printer driver for Parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard differs depending on the version of the Windows being used P 40 Windows 98 Me P 44 Windows NT 4 0 P 48 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 BBE SUPPLEMENTS TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is only connected using the printer cable However when this equipment and your computer are connected to the local area network as well as this equipment is connected to the parallel port of your computer you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs To install TopAccessDocMon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately e The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Windows 98 Me Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard The following describes an installation on Windows 98 The procedure is the same when Win dows Me is used 1 Click Start
262. hen inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 6 Select only Specify a location and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard 4 Locate Driver Files Pata Where do you want Windows to search for driver files Sy Search for driver files for the following hardware device oy Unknown The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following optional search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations Floppy disk drives CD ROM dives v Specify a location Microsoft Windows Update lt Back Cancel T Click Browse Found New Hardware Wizard E x amp Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive amp selected and then click OK o9 Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from e The Locate File dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 61 8 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 is located select a INF file and click Open Look in ausa j e e E3 eSdcps2k inf File name es Acps2k inf Files of type Setup Information inf Cancel e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 P
263. his program is protected by copyright law and international treaties e The Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed 4 Click Install ie IP P2P 3 12 InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Instellatield e The Destination Folder screen is displayed D Click Next ie IP P2P 3 12 InstallShield Wizard Destination Folder Click Next to install to this Folder or click Change to install to a different Folder J Install IP P2P to C Program Files IP P2P Change Installstield 4 Cancel 120 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e f you want to change the location where the programs are installed click Change In the dialog box that appears select the folder and click OK e The Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed 6 Click Install ie IP P2P 3 12 InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation amp Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard i Cancel e Starts copying files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete sc
264. ic print operation settings such as original paper size print paper size paper source paper type orientation number of copies and so on Also this tab allows you to enable enlarge reduce printing sort printing stapling and punching and 2 sided printing P 218 Setup Tab e Print Job Tab The Print Job tab contains job type settings that select the way this equipment handles the print job This tab also allows you to enable various job types such as Scheduled Print Private Print and Proof Print And you can print a document as an overlay file or store to e Filing P 224 Print Job Tab Layout Tab The Layout Tab contains finishing options such as Cover page printing Booklet print ing and N up printing LL P 226 Layout Tab Standard Window P 230 Layout Tab Booklet Window P 233 Layout Tab Multiple Pages per Sheet Window LL LU 216 Printing Guide Printing from Windows e Effect Tab The Effect Tab contains print options that add the effects to your print jobs such as Watermarks Overlay Image printing Rotate printing Mirror printing and Negative printing Also it allows to enable Toner Save and Smoothing functions P 235 Effect Tab e Image Quality Tab The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed You can easily select appropriate image quality depending on the type of job being printed P 239 Image Quality Tab e Fonts Tab The Fonts Tab allows you to select how the Tru
265. icons and text that allow you to quickly see the status of the printer B Menu Bar Options The options are Printer gt Close Closes the current window Printer gt Change Printer The device names that have been added to the monitoring list are displayed You can change the monitoring device by selecting the device name P 342 Changing Monitoring Devices Document gt Cancel This menu is displayed under all queue tab This item allows you to delete the print job from the queue You can only cancel print jobs that you submitted Document gt Release Proof This menu is displayed under the Proof Print tab This item displays the Release Proof dialog box where the number of copies to be printed can be Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 339 SUPPLEMENT 340 changed and the job released for printing added to the current jobs print queue You can only release jobs that you submitted P 347 Monitoring Queues Document gt Print Now This menu is displayed under the Scheduled Print tab This item overrides the assigned print schedule order for a particular job and prints the selected job immediately P 347 Monitoring Queues Document gt Release This menu is displayed under the Invalid tab This item displays the Invalid Release dialog box where the department code is entered and the job is released for printing e View gt Configure Displays the Configuration window
266. ide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 333 Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Document Monitor menu 1 Right click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar 2 In the menu displayed select TopAccessDocMon to access the TopAccessDocMon window Disable Configure Exit T TopAccessDocMon T TopAccess 3 55 PM e The TopAccessDocMon window appears NOTES TopAccessDocMon displays the TopAccessDocMon window for the printer set as a default printer in the Printers folder If the default printer is set to other than the TOSHIBA printer driver it displays the error message and the TopAccessDocMon window cannot be displayed e If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver a mes sage dialog box appears In this case click Yes to search for a printer and main tain the connection P 335 Searching for a Printer Accessing from the Printers File Menu You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the File menu of the Printers folder When you access TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu the TopAccessDocMon window for the selected printer Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu 1 Open the Printers folder and select the printer driver 2 Click the File menu and select TopAccessDocMon File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Open Set as Default Printer Printing Preferences Add Printer TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSH
267. ide of the cover will be blank 4 Use Back Cover This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab To enable back cover printing check on the box and select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used Source Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Print Style This selects how you want to print a back cover Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank cover e Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the last page image on the front side of a cover e Print on both sides of page Select this to print the last two page images on both sides of a cover This is available only when the 2 Sided Printing option is enabled on the Setup tab If Print on 1 side of page is selected while 2 Sided Printing is performed the last page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be blank 5 Interleave Pages This sets the interleaving page feature when you want to insert paper of a different type or from another source between every page of your print job For example you could use this option to insert blank colored sheets be
268. ided Printing eee 293 U Id nipiStall Tig soiin Do dei tM 162 UNIX Print Queue Changing the default values 193 CC AUN enoi Sats ia dato EROR uen 188 Dele age et eR Me Pr Set ean OTE 193 Update Automatically 248 Update NOW cironi ditas abe 248 Upper Drawer inesenre ion r aa 247 USB COMME OE isis 21 Use Back Cover Multiple Pages per Sheet 234 264 Standar i iie den csi Den A MSS EE S P PASO 227 2568 380 Use Black for All Text MDG uunc eut uuu dust ied 240 DEPO i eee ee iustam stetit 24 jo NTC TR RN SUMI UNI HEN 244 Use Front Cover Booklet i isse iine ide hu ap bTUN 231 262 Multiple Pages per Sheet 234 264 SiiDdarad kasaen e a 227 258 Use Overlay Image 236 268 Use PostScript Passthrough 238 Using Peer to Peer Utility ueeeessse 23 V View COME GUS orainne ox truncos ett dd 340 IGM CSU n noma ete 340 VIN ra 340 W Watermark eee 2395 237 263 CCTCOUIID oorpore a otia 266 UOI HH S oce ix toe dpaneR dai mae e idus 267 Scit n bo sooo ec fas ese lot ases eoi 266 PADI Osten stats vedaiealsh ed tqacuand eom Intt 265 Watermark Options eeeeeeeesss 285 W alerimani tin 2 5 caen Nes Torna ese nie 285 Printing Guide INDEX FC 3511 4511 DP 3520 4520 DP 2320 2820 OME030033E0 MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIG
269. ides of the paper with a vertical reversal and to bind the document along the horizontal side of the paper so that the pages can be turned over up and down Portrait Landscape NOTES Book or Tablet will be automatically selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab e None can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled e This option is disabled when the ADU is not installed Print Job Tab The Print Job tab contains job type settings that select the way this equipment handles a print job This tab allows you to enable various job types such as Scheduled Print Private Print and Proof Print You can also print a document as an overlay file or store to e filing TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 xl Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Normal Print C Scheduled Print Private Print Proof Print Print to Overlay File Letter E LIES C Store to eFiling Graphics Text Profile None M Destination Inner Tray z Save As Delete Department Restore Defaults 90 8000 Cancel Help 1 Normal Print Select this to print a job normally 2 Scheduled Print Select this to print a job at a future date and time When this is selected click Edit to set the date and time to print a job Printing Guide Printing from Windows 3 Private Print Select this to print a
270. ied paper size or man ually set the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce the image Printing enlarged or reduced image to fit specified paper size 1 Display the Setup tab and select the document size on the Original Paper Size drop down box Then select the paper size that you want to print at the Print Paper Size drop down box Original Paper Size Ledger 11 17 inch Mi Manual Scale 100 E Print Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 11 inch e The document image is automatically enlarged or reduced depending on the original paper size and print paper size 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e Enlarged or reduced image is printed to fit specified paper size Printing an enlarged or reduced image by specifying the zoom ratio manually 1 Display the Setup tab and check the Manual Scale box Then enter the percentage of zoom ratio Original Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 x 11 inch W Manual Scale 802 x Print Paper Size Same as Original Size e The zoom ratio can be set from 25 to 400 in units of 1 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e Enlarged or reduced image is printed by specified zoom ratio Printing Color Document in Gray scale This equipment can print in color as well as black and white Printing Guide Printing from Windows 255 256 NOTE NOTES
271. ield lt Back Cancel e f you want to change the location where the programs are installed click Browse In the dialog box that appears select the folder and click OK e The Setup Type screen is displayed 6 Select Custom and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Select the Setup Type to Install Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Next C Typical Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users C Complete Program will be installed with all options Custom You may choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users InstallShield lt Back Cancel e The Select Components screen is displayed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 135 T Check the software that you want to install and click Next For e STUDIO4511 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield liz al d X Select Components Select the components setup will install ns Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install vj TopAccessDocMon Description wj TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PELE Setup will install Agfa Fonts on W TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c your computer wj TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Masta Tt ype Fei 102 37 MB of space required on the C drive 14757 51 MB of
272. ient1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 9 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT 4 0 is located and click Open Look in a Usa c File name es 4c5cNT Files of type Setup Information inf v Cancel e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive NT PCL5C lt language gt 46 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate I ICD ROM drive NT PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive NT PS lt language gt 10 Click OK Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive a selected and then click OK Lu Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from DANTSPCLSC USA 11 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed ea Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an a installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5Sc Have Disk EM 12 Change the name if desired and click Next Add Printer Wizard Type in the name of this printer When you have finished click Next Note Exceedin
273. ier finisher options such as stapling and hole punching can be selected even if you select Not Installed for the Finisher option If you select the finisher options for printing but the finisher is not installed finisher settings will be ignored and perform printing correctly Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 183 4 Click Apply Changes and close the window 184 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh Installing Client Software for UNIX NOTE Printing from UNIX is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on UNIX workstations About Client Software for UNIX In the Admin s Client CD ROM the following filters for UNIX workstations are included net est4511 for e STUDIO4511 Series net estbw for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series This file is a shell script that will be installed in usr lib Ip model It contains all the pars ing for the printer specific commands and it generates all the output code Being a shell script a system administrator can modify it if a site requires any custom options or if other components are installed in non standard locations Ipdsend This is an executable program that is called by net est4511 or net estbw to send the print file to the system using the LPD protocol This program will be installed in opt toshiba tap bin
274. ies PCL5c Where IP 10 10 70 120 Comment Print to file Print range Copies All Number of copies 1 s Pages Iram to l jl la M Collate Selection 1 ooa Setting Up Print Options Print Options are the attributes you set to define the way a print job is processed For example the private print and proof print options determine how the copier manages your print job SUPPLEMENT To find the printing instructions for your specific needs refer to the procedures in the following section P 249 Printing with Extended Print Functionality 212 Printing Guide Printing from Windows How to Setup There are several ways to set print options Also how the settings effect printing varies depend ing on the way you set the options Also the tabs displayed vary depending on how you display the printer properties Setting Initial Values of Print Options Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Printers folder within the Windows Start menu will establish the initial values of the options For example the paper size setting you most commonly use optional device settings user information settings etc are set tings you will not want to change every time you print It is convenient to set these options as initial values NOTE If you have install the printer driver by Point and Print on Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 please set t
275. ies PCL5c Properties 2 xl General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About Pedestal Pedestal 2 Y Finisher Saddle Stitch Finisher T Hole Punch Unit 2 3 Holes h Upper Drawer ete v Paper Type Ps Lower Drawer lesa v Paper Type Ps v Pedestal Upper ledger v Paper Type Pan v Pedestal Lower Statement v Paper Type Pi v Bypass Feeder Automatic v Paper Type Pain gt 4 4 4 4 Profile None Memory 128MB m Save As Restore Defaults v Enable SNMP Communication Cancel Apply Help Pedestal This sets whether or not optional drawers or large capacity feeder is installed Finisher This sets whether or not optional finisher is installed Hole Punch This sets whether or not optional hole punch unit is installed Automatic Duplexer This sets whether or not optional automatic duplexer is installed e STUDIO280 Series Only Upper Drawer Paper Type Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the Upper Drawer Lower Drawer Paper Type Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the Lower Drawer Pedestal Upper Paper Type Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the Pedestal 1 when it is installed Pedestal Lower Paper Type Select the paper size and paper type of paper that i
276. ilename Media Type The paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value mtype Plain The paper source that contains Plain paper is requested mtype Trans The paper source that contains transparency slides is requested parency mtype Thick The paper source that contains Thick paper is requested 1 mtype Thick The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is requested 2 mtype Thick The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is requested 3 In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has priority over the media type and the paper source In PCLSe the paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source If this option is not specified the default value will be used Example The command to specify Thick media type is lp o mtype Thick1 filename Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Paper Source The paper source can be selected using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value auto source Select auto paper tray selection manual Select stack feed bypass upper Select the upper drawer lower Select the lower drawer Icf Select the large capacity feeder pedupper Select the upper pedestal drawer pedlower Select the lower pedestal drawer In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always
277. illing Info Enter the billing information to have it appear on the banner page Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 297 Error Handling In the Error Handling menu you can set how to report a PostScript error Printer MFP_00C67861 HH Presets Standard 4 Error Handling 3 A PostScript Errors No special reporting Print detailed report 2 Tray Switching _ Use printer s default Jj Switch to another cassette with the same paper size J Display alert in Fa s 7 on e Preview Save As PDF 1 PostScript Error This sets whether or not you want to print a PostScript error report e No special reporting Select this if you do not want to print PostScript error informa tion e Print detailed report Select this to print PostScript error information 2 Tray Switching This is not supported by this equipment Paper Feed In the Paper Feed menu you can set the paper source Printer MFP 00C67861 HH Presets Standard a Paper Feed a All pages from Auto Select 3 O First page from Auto Default Remaining from Auto Default OVO f V Save As PDF as Preview 1 All pages from Select the option button when you want to use same paper source for all pages When this is selected select the paper source or paper type to be used at the drop down menu 2 First page from Select the option button when you want to specify different paper
278. in the Client CD ROM When you insert the Client CD ROM into your CD ROM drive the installer automatically starts You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer If you want to install printer drivers as well as other client software this method is convenient P 25 Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer e Using Plug and Play When this equipment is connected to a parallel port of Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 computers the Plug and Play Wizard auto matically starts While you can install a printer driver using this method other client soft ware cannot be installed P 31 Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play e Using Add Printer Wizard When you want to install different printer drivers after installing a printer driver using Plug and Play or when you want to install the printer drivers without using the installer or Plug and Play install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard P 40 Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard NOTE Parallel printing is available only when the Parallel Interface is installed Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer Installing the client software for parallel printing The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows used REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the
279. int job Tab Manufacturer Blanks USA copy Tabs 5Banks LT 1 2 Tab Tab Extension gt C Tab Extension jo 500 Iz 0 393 0 787 inch mi gt i gt m Image Shift width 0 500 rr Image Shif ib 0 0 1 19 inch r WI E Units inches v eed Tab Manufacturer Select the product name of the tab paper that you use This equipment supports following tab paper For Letter Tab Blanks USA copy Tabs 5 Banks LT 1 2 Tab Blanks USA copy Tabs 8 Banks LT 1 2 Tab For A4 Tab KOKUYO A4 S 5 Banks King JIM A4 S 5Banks If you use other tab papers than above select Custom When you select Custom you must specify the tab extension manually Tab Extension Enter the width of the tab extension This must be set only when Custom is selected in the Tab Manufacturer option Image Shift Width Enter the width to shift the printed image For example if you want to print a text on the tab extension of Letter Tab paper create a Let ter sized document and input the text on the right side You must place the text in the height exactly to fit to the tab extension Also the right margin a margin between the text and right edge of the document must have more than 0 08 inch or 2 mm space because the equipment cannot print in the space Then enter the width of the tab extension as Image Shift Width Width of Tab Extension Image Shift Margin Printed Image More than 0 08 or 2m
280. inte TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 1 object s selected The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Select My Computer and click Next LX Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by r All settings will be managed and configured on this computer C Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator Cancel 151 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 4 Click Add Port Add Printer Wizard Ed Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer NAME Local Port TOSHIBA e C LPT2 Local Port L LPT3 Local Port L cOmM1 Local Port L1 COM2 Local Port L1 COM3 Local Port z Add Port Configure Port Enable printer pooling eee e The Printer Ports dialog box appears D Select Local Port and click New Port Printer Ports i21 x Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port New Monitor TN e The Port Name dialog box appears 6 Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net Ware file server in the En
281. inted only in the presence of the person who sent the job Printing confidential documents 1 Display the Print Job tab and select Private Print and enter a five digit document identification number in the Document ID number field Private Print Document ID Number 250 Printing Guide Printing from Windows NOTE This number will be used to release the private job from the Touch Panel Display If you forget this number you can no longer print the private print job 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e he print job is stored in the Private Job list in the Touch Panel Dis play SUPPLEMENT You can release the private job from the Private Job list in the Touch Panel Display Please refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function for this instruction Printing Proof Print Jobs The proof print feature prevents costly mistakes by allowing you to check the printed output on a sample copy before printing an entire multi copy job Printing a proof copy 1 Display the Print Job tab and select Proof Print amp Proof Print 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e One copy of the document is printed and the print job is stored in the Proof Job list in the Touch Panel Display SUPPLEMENT You can release the remaining copies of a proof job from the Proof Job list in the
282. inter driver If required select Document Defaults in the File menu and restore the setting that you changed in Step 3 to the original value and click OK Configuring the Options Manually The following describes an instruction on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used Setting the configuration tab manually REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Select the printer driver in the Printers folder Then click File and select Properties 3 Printers E mi xl File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Open i Set as Default Printer Printing Preferences 9 Add Printer TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA 28 M38 e STLDIO4 e STUDIO4 1 Series PCLSc Pause Printing Cancel All Documents Sharing Use Printer Offline T TopAccessDocMon Server Properties Create Shortcut Delete Rename Close J Displays the properties of the selected items e When you are operating under Windows XP Server 2003 open the Printers and Faxes folder to access the printer driver e The printer driver properties dialog box appears Printing Guide Printing from Windows 205 SUPPLEMENT 206 2 Display the Configuration tab and set the following options TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Ser
283. into Windows NT 4 0 as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start select Settings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Programs CN Documents Ga Control Panel E Taskbar indows NT Server 2 Double click the Add Printer icon Ls Printers iof x File Edit View Help ec Printers ESE x es esp GS Add Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 1 objects selected AL Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 107 108 e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Select My Computer and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ea This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by All settings will be managed and configured on this computer C Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator lt Back Cancel 4 Click Add Port Add Printer Wizard Ed Click the check box next to the port s vou want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer Local Port TOSHIBA e C LPT2 Local Port C LPT3 Local Port C COM1 Local Port CI COM2 Local Port LJ COM3 Local Port x
284. iscovery Distinguish Thin Lines Mac OS 8 6 or 9 x DNE scs bv A A E Do not Print Blank Page Do not Print Blank Pages Mac OS 8 6 or 9 x 284 Release Release PIOOL sex bt 339 Document Monitor Taskbar Menu Draw Border Around Pages 233 Duplex MacOS SUR ae ny ORNS Pov RR Te Oe ET E FTG CL sententie N EA aaa ne asec ant tane fo cra PME aD qoos esie o eee Le Epail OTA FING o tered etaed Re RE ERE Enable SNMP Communication Error Handling MaC OS fo Cp TN Events F Fax tab P e a E nase Finishing Options Mac OS 8 6 or 9 x MICOS A ian geen npe PATS PAGS THOM moeridna a BOB sime eno acura ae tuo D SCRI TROBT DT C Diesaetaotecenesesept e br artc etos ete Eors CE Font SEUNS esc eodsir ono ocu M ER RE HERE jg ordre DENTES Printing Guide INDEX Format for Mac OS SG OE 9 X airnean niea 273 MICOS A bana PE PES 290 G TOTEM Al benon a OA 274 COUP C ODIGS id ncseiesdaedher eoe edes 221 254 H Halftone Mac OSA pinen e tail edi comis 288 308 THOME aean ee teria aliud 239 PET cine ab NEED 24 ISO buctsdussiebsee Mu E Mx MM tet iHa 242 ILL ou obvia etustuu reca to iine 217 Hole Punch Mac OS 8 0 0r 9 Xc 280 IVIae OS A sra EA S vp a RtE 302 UND qr 312 NOUO 8 asocio dte ea d edo teca duces 22342951 Hole Punch nib sor 247 I If there is PostScript error sssse 278 Image Quality 25e udetitis ue 239 Image Quality Type PUE 36 sannin ide rere een rece
285. it 8 Click Browse TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wiza X Select Port Select the part for Printer P f Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name LPT1 Discovery Browse lt Back Cancel The Browse for Folder dialog box appears SUPPLEMENT You can also automatically specify the network queue by searching the equipment in the network P 95 Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port 9 Locate this equipment in your network select the print queue and click OK MFp D0c67861 amp A FILE SHARE g pclSc lt 3 pcl mm g ps3 Printers Murakoshi 1 188 Nishijima Plathome 1 189 Powerbox NOTE Donotselect pcl5c pcl6 or ps3 queue These queues only accept the print job in each emulation If you install several printer drivers and specify one of these queues the print job may not be printed properly due to mismatch of the emulations between the print job and queue Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 93 10 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard Select Port f T Select the port for Printer i Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers
286. its of 1 degree in the Angle field e You can also set the angle using the scroll bar 8 Select how the watermark text is printed from Solid Draw as Outline and Transparency Solid Select this to print solid type of watermark Draw as Outline Select this to print an outline type of watermark Transparency Select this for a transparent watermark Set the transparent ratio from 0 to 100 in units of 1 You can also set the transparent ratio using the scroll bar 9 Click OK to save the watermark settings e The watermark is added or edited Deleting a watermark NOTE You can delete the default watermarks However they cannot be restored by click ing the Restore Defaults button 1 Select a watermark that you want to delete at the Water mark drop down box Watermark Add Edit Delete v Print on First Page Only 2 Click Delete Printing with an Overlay File Using image overlays ensures that widely used images are readily available and consistently reproduced Image overlays are independent documents that are merged into other documents during printing and thereby increase the time required to print a job To superimpose text on your document it may be faster to use watermarks To print with an overlay file you should create an overlay file first P 251 Creating An Overlay File NOTES If you use Image Overlays in combination with the N up feature t
287. job then await your approval before printing the remaining copies The print job sent as a proof job is saved in the proof job list on this equipment and the remaining copies are not printed until you acti vate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment This option allows you to check the output before printing additional copies and thereby reduce paper waste e Private Document ID DIN Select this to print a private job When this is selected enter 5 digit document ID in the field The print job is saved in the private job queue on this equipment and not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment This option is useful when you want to print a confi dential document secured using a password The user has to enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel Display It is recom mended to specify the DIN when you select to print a private job If you do not specify the DIN the private job uses default DIN 00000 2 Department Code Enter a user s department code when this equipment is managed with department codes Please ask your administrator for your department code SUPPLEMENT How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job which 284 no department code or invalid department code is specified varies depending on the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis trator mod
288. kes a hardware device work Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 31 32 3 Select Search for the best driver for your device Recom mended and click Next Add New Hardware Wizard What do you want Windows to do r pomi C Display a list of all the drivers in a specific location so you can select the driver you want Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update C WINDOWS OPTIONS CABS EE The Browse for Folder dialog box appears 5 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 6 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98 Me is located and click OK Browse for Folder 21 x Select the folder that contains driver information INF file for this device e STUDIO Client E E 9x me 8 Pelbc C Fre C Ger C Ita C Spa CX ES HI Pele H Ps m7 amp gfa Lar Cancel e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer
289. ld Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard xj Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TOSHIBA e STUDI04511 Series Client The InstallShield Wizard will install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer To continue click Next lt Back Cancel e The License Agreement screen is displayed 4 Click Yes TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS UNLESS A SEPARATE LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE SUPPLIER OF APPLICABLE SOFTWARE IN WHICH CASE SUCH SEPARATE LICENSE SHALL APPLY IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS YOU MAY NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE AND YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT GRANT OF LICENSE gt Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you select No the setup will close To install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client you must accept this agreement InstallShield e The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows D Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Clie
290. ld be used Printing using LP Command Use the lp command Iptap in Linux to send a file to this equipment for printing This com mand specifies various printer specific options using the o option parameter on the command line The lp command also sets other print options using various other parameters Use the man net est4511 1 command to display the online document that describes the various options and parameters that can be set to configure printed output All the options are sent to this equipment at the start of a print job so if the print file contains its own commands they may override the Ip options Generic Ip and Iptap Options Copies The number of copies of a print job is specified using the n value parameter with the lp command The copy count is displayed on the banner page The default value is determined by the lp command and it is always 1 The copies are always collated Title The title that is printed on the banner page can be specified using the t title parameter with the lp command The default value is determined by the Ip command and it is often the name of the print file If multiple files are printed using the same Ip command the default title 1s set to the name of the first file by the lp command Printing Guide Printing from UNIX 309 310 General Options The following options apply to all print files Print Language The net est4511
291. le to print a document P 267 Printing with an Overlay File Storing to e Filing The Store to e Filing feature allows you to send print jobs to e Filing on this equipment The job stored to e Filing can then be print from the Touch Panel Display at a later time It can be also composed with other documents using the e Filing web utility You can store a print job to either public box or user box The public box is shared by all users who can see the jobs stored in this box The user box is for personal use and is protected by password NOTE When you store a document in e Filing using the printer driver the printing image not the original document in your computer will be stored in e Filing SUPPLEMENT Youcan manage the files within a box from the Touch Panel Display Please refer to the Operator s Manual for Basic Function to manage files in a box e You can also manage the files within a box using the e Filing web utility Please refer to the e Filing Guide Saving a print job to a public box 1 Display the Print Job tab and select Store to e Filing Then select Public Box to save a print job to a public box Store to e Filing PubicBox o ublic Bas 2 If you print a job as well as saving to the public box check the Print box 252 Printing Guide Printing from Windows 3 Set other print options you require and click OK 4 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is saved to a public box S
292. lect this to search for printers in local subnet e Specify a range Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IP addresses When this is selected enter the IP addresses in From field and To field to specify the range TopAccessDocMon Window In the TopAccessDocMon window you can monitor print jobs and printer status rd TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c mi x Printer Document View Help Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing Invalid Printer Information Gl Drawer Status Counter Name MFP 00C67861 Upper Drawer Letter Plain Paper Available Lower Drawer amp 3 Plain Paper Available Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Pedestal Upper Drawer A4 Plain Empty Pedestal Lower Drawer Not Available spe Stack Feed Bypass Unknown Thick 1 Empty Mun Large Capacity Feeder Not Available Status Idle Hole Punch 2 Holes El Physical Address DD 40 AF 7E 28 55 Add Device 10 10 70 120 4p g This window consists of A menu bar containing the options Printer Document View and Help The Device Status tab includes only the Printer View and Help menus There are nine 9 possible tabbed views Device Status Print Queue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing TopAccessComposer and Invalid The tabs displayed vary depending on the printer being monitored A status bar containing
293. lel printing P 25 Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer 2 After installing the client software click Start select Set tings and click Printers to open the Printers folder 4 Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 69 e f you are using the Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 click Start and Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes folder 3 Select the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select Properties in the File menu File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Open v Set as Default Printer Printing Preferences m Add Printer Pause Printing Cancel All Documents TOSHIBA a amp STUDIOM 51 Sharing 1 Series PCL5c Use Printer Offline T TopAccessDocMon Server Properties Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties J Displays the properties of the selected items The printer driver properties dialog box appears 4 Display the Ports tab and click Add Port f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties E 2 xl General Sharing Parts Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCLSc Print to the following port s Documents will print to the first free checked port T1 Printer Port TOS
294. lere qe o Pc 15 Windows 2000 XP Server 2008 cccccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeeneeeeeeesaeees 80 Installing the Client Software for SMB Printing ccccssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeees 89 Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer sese 89 6 Printing Guide Table of Contents Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port 95 Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print ssseeeueessssse 100 Windows OG IG c T 101 Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 ccccccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaees 103 Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard 104 MWindowsS O9 IVIB ucc deem Ene moet cest vota anb tasse dace cede ilte eate 104 VVC OWS NT costano once a ined aute dos onl tn g 2 saad rel casi acci bes 107 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 sees nennen 112 Installing the Client Software for Peer to Peer Printing 118 Installation and Configuration of Peer to Peer Utility 118 Installing the Client Software for IPP Printing cccccseeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaneeees 127 Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard sese 127 Installing the Client Software for Novell Printing sseseeesseeeesess 132 Install
295. lick this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later Download the PPD file of your Mac OS version on your desk top by following the prompts After you download the PPD file refer to the installation pro cedure for Macintosh to set up the printer P 169 Installing Client Software for Macintosh Installing client software from TopAccess for Unix 1 In TopAccess click the Install Software link at the bottom of the screen TopAccess e Filing Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Administration Device TK Device Information Status Ready Name MFP 00C67861 Location Copier Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Hard Disk Space Available 14985 MB Contact Information Phone Number Message Alerts Options oper Size Type Capacit Status diss hai Pedestal Upper Dravver AA4R Plain 600 Paper Available essa Install Software 2003 TOSHIBATEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved e The Install Client Software page opens Printing Guide Other Installation Procedures 2 Click the Unix Filters link Install Client Software Drivers Unix Filters Macintosh PPD Files Please click on the link s below to download the Windows Installer Files File Name Size Install Clienti 45088 KB Install Client2 19995 KB e The software components list is displayed 3 Click the Unix filter link that you want to install Install C
296. lient Software Drivers Unix Filters Macintosh PPD Files Please click on the link s below to download the Unix Filters File Name Size AIX Filter 170 KB HP Unix Filter 100 KB Linux Filter 110 KB Open Unix Filter 100 KB Solaris Filter 80 KB 4 Download the Unix tar file containing the Unix filters on your desktop by following the prompts 5 After you download the Unix tar file refer to the installation procedure for Unix to set up the printer P 185 Installing Client Software for UNIX Printing Guide Other Installation Procedures 201 202 Printing Guide Other Installation Procedures Printing Guide 3 Printing 3 PRINTING 203 Printing from Windows This equipment supports printing from Windows applications using the PCL5c PCL6 and PS3 printer drivers These printer drivers allow you to define such document properties as the orientation and print quality of your pages and such complex finishing options as booklet layout and multi position stapling For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The PCLSc Printer Driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Before Using the Printer Driver Before printing you have to configure the following options Configuration Settings You have to configure such options as optional drawers finisher and hole punch unit The features of these optional devices are not available unless you tell the system that th
297. ling Client Software for Windows 99 4 Select the equipment that you want to connect and click OK TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery a x Name PAP Address E MFP 00C67861 10 10 70 105 TOSHIBA e STU Er Select a printer for your printer Consult with your administrator for more Start Discovery information Manual Selection Device Information a Cancel 5 It automatically obtain the network queue in the Network path or queue name field TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizare x E Select Port Aam Select the port for Printer Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name Mfp 00c67861 print Discovery lt Back Next gt Cancel NOTE tautomatically obtains the IP address of the equipment and the queue name speci fied by an administrator in the Network path or queue name field in the General submenu page of the Setup menu in the TopAccess administrator mode If you can not obtain the queue name ask your administrator that the Network path or queue name field is correctly specified 6 Continue the installation from step 10 on page 94 Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Point and Print differs depending on the version of Windows used
298. llate Selection 1 1 __Cancel e The printer properties dialog box appears SUPPLEMENT The procedures for displaying the properties dialog for the printer driver may be dif ferent depending on an application that you are using See your application s man ual about displaying the printer properties dialog box Printing Guide Printing from Windows 211 3 Setting the Print Options for each tab according to how you want to print TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties q 2 xl Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Original Paper Size Manual Scale 100 z Print Paper Size Same as Original Size m Paper Source Automatic hd Paper Type Plain bd Orientation Portrait Letter m Number of Copies 1 E E i Copy Handling Sort Copies M Graphics Text Color Automatic m Profile None z Staple None M EE TA Delete Hole Punch None luis ieee 2 Sided Printing None OK Cancel Help _ feed He e Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a document P 216 Print Options e You can also set the print options using setting profiles P 213 Setting Print Options Using Profiles 4 Click OK to save the settings 5 Click OK or Print to print a document a 21x Printer Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties Status Ready Type TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Ser
299. llowing files for printing e TIFF file e Text file Printing a file using the email client The procedure below gives as example of printing using the Microsoft Outlook Express NOTE When you send an email message to this equipment to print a file send the mes sage in plain text format If you send an email message in the HTML format this equipment prints the HTML source code of the message Open your email application and create new mail message Enter the email address or the equipment in the To line Enter text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank Enter text in the body field Attach the file you want to print Aah wr Send the email NOTE The header and body of the email will be printed only when the Print Header and Print Message Body for the Email print service is enabled on this equipment Printing Guide Other Printing Methods 325 326 Printing Guide Other Printing Methods 4 MONITORING PRINT JOBS Printing Guide 4 Monitoring Print Jobs 327 Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon SUPPLEMENT NOTES TopAccessDocMon is a job monitoring tool that can remotely display and manage print jobs on the queues of the equipment and other compatible TOSHIBA printer controllers from the client computer TopAccessDocMon supports device and job monitoring the following TOSHIBA controllers e e STUDIO4511 Series e e STUDIOA50 Series e e STUDIO280 Series e GL 1020 e GL
300. llowing procedure 192 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX Changing the default values of a print queue 1 Study the interface file named lt queue name gt stored in the etc Ip interfaces directory e This file contains all of the default settings and values that can be set These values are case sensitive and must conform to the bin sh vari able format 2 To manually edit the configuration file etc Ip interfaces queue name gt conf add a line that consists of the parameter and value e For example to change the default orientation to Landscape add the following line orient LANDSCAPE Deleting the Print Queue There are two ways to delete the print queue one is deleting a print queue using est4511rm estb wrm and the other is deleting a print queue manually without using est4511rm estbwrm LO P 193 Deleting a Print Queue Using est4511rm estbwrm LLI P 193 Deleting a Print Queue Manually Deleting a Print Queue Using est4511rm estbwrm When you want to delete the queue using est4511rm estbwrm perform the following procedure Deleting a print queue 1 Log on to the root account 2 Enter the following command For e STUDIO4511 Series est45llrm queue name gt For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series estbwrm queue name gt SUPPLEMENT This command uses the system s Ipadmin command to delete the print queue and configuration file e Please restart the
301. low ioix File Edit View Favorites Tools Help qBack gt GSearch Folders C4 4x GE X A EE Address E Mfp 00c67861 Go aj 31 3 _ FILE_SHARE c pel Mfp 00c67861 Mfp 00c67861 pcl5c E a d Comment PCLSC Driver Printers 1 object s selected pcl5c Double click this queue to install the PCL5c printer driver Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 103 NOTE NOTE NOTE SUPPLEMENTS 104 pcl6 Double click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver ps3 Double click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver e The Printers dialog box appears e The pcl5c queue is displayed only for e STUDIO4511 Series 2 Click Yes 1 Before you can use the printer MFp 00c67861 pclSc it must be set up on your computer Do you want Windows to set up the printer and continue this operation Yes Mo 3 The printer driver is installed e Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard differs depending on the version of the Windows being used P 104 Windows 98 Me P 107 Windows NT 4 0 P 112 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 BB
302. lts J Update Automatically amp y eolielioie eio OK Cancel Apply Help Configuration Tab for e STUDIO280 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Properties 2 x General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About Drawers 2 Drawers amp Pedestal 2 l Finisher Saddle Stitch Finisher Hole Punch Unit 2 3 Holes i Automatic Duplexer Installed Upper Drawer Letter Y Paper Type Plain M Lower Drawer Letter m Paper Type Plain Y LU Pedestal Upper Letter Y Paper Type Plain Y T w Profile None x Memory 32MB Sees posee J Enable SNMP Communication Restore Defaults Updde Now J Update Automatically l Cancel Apply Help Pedestal Lower Letter w Paper Type Plain o oo oq Bypass Feeder Automatic Paper Type Plain amp eoldoelio o ieio 1 Pedestal This sets whether or not the optional pedestals or large capacity feeder is installed The selections vary depending on the equipment model For e STUDIO4511 Series and e STUDIO450 Series e None Select this when neither pedestal nor large capacity is installed e Large Capacity Feeder Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed e Pedestal 1 Select this when the upper pedestal is installed e Pedestal 2 Select this when both upper pedestal and lower pedestal are installed For e STUDIO280 Series e 1 Drawer
303. ly when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab None can only be selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab None can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled 11 Hole Punch NOTE This sets whether a print job is printed with hole punches e None Select this to print without hole punches e Center Top Select this to create holes on the upper side and print o o 1 e Middle Left Select this to create holes on the left side and print None can only be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed None can only be selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab None can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled 12 2 Sided Printing This sets 2 Sided printing printing on both sides of paper according to the type of binding for 2 sided printed pages This option is only for printing on both sides of the paper If you want to bind the output with staples you should set the finishing option as well Printing Guide Printing from Windows 223 224 e None Select this if you do not want to print on both sides of the paper e Book Select this to print on both sides of the paper in the same direction and to bind the document along the vertical side of the paper so that the pages can be turned over right and left Portrait Landscape e Tablet Select this to print on both s
304. m Document Must exactly fit the tab extension X ger xO der t Printing Guide Printing from Windows 219 220 NOTES NOTE Unit Select the unit for the Tab Extension and Image Shift option The default unit varies depend ing on the regional setting of the client computer The tab paper can be fed only from the Bypass Tray When you enable tab printing place the tab paper on the Bypass Tray When you place the tab paper on the Bypass Tray make sure the tab side of the paper becomes outside Place the tab paper so that the tab side becomes outside If the document for tab printing is not created properly or the Image Shift Width is not set properly the image will not be printed in the correct position within the tab extension Please make sure to create the document and set the Image Shift Width correctly If mis printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously dirt may adhere to the reverse side of a paper To avoid this it is recommended to print a tab paper as a separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning before printing next tab paper When printing tab paper the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit In that case remove the tab paper before printing a next job 4 Paper Source This selects the paper source Please select a paper source that correlates with the prin
305. margin can be selected using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value outermargin Select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode value This value specifies in pixels the Outer Margin or the Creep per page which should take place while printing a booklet The valid range for value is 0 18 Default is 0 Example The command to select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode is lp o outermargin value filename Orientation The following orientation options are available Option Value Alternate Description Value portrait Print the document in portrait orientation 318 Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Option Value Alternate Description Value landscape Print the document in landscape orientation If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to specify landscape orientation is lp o landscape filename Font Pitch If the pitch is specified the net est4511 program will always select the Courier font otherwise the default font is used The following options are used to select the font pitch Option Value Alternate Description Value C pitch 16 67 Set the character pitch to 16 67 characters per inch 10 pitch 10 Set the character pitch to 10 characters per inch 12 pitch 12 Set the character pitch to 12 characters p
306. me Internet Keyboard Mouse Network ar Controllers Options Dial up Co d ra Installs and removes programs and Windows components e The Add Remove Programs dialog box appears 2 Select TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series Client or TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series Client and click Change Remove ER Add Remove Programs E ni x ua ux 1 1 CM Currently installed programs Sort by Name T Change or fg TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client Size Remove o change this program or remove it Fro n your To change this program or remove it From your Change Remove Programs D computer click Change Remove iB Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 Add New Programs SN Add Remove Windows Components B Set Program Access and Defaults The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 163 3 Select Remove and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard Welcome Maintenance Program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below Modify Select new program components to add or select currently installed f components to remove Repair SP Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup jo lt Ssa Remove all installed components al InstallShield lt Back Cancel
307. ment size paper ledger Id LD Select ledger size paper ledgerwide Idwide LDWIDE Select ledger wide size paper folio folio japan Select folio size paper A3 a3 Select A3 size paper A3WIDE a3wide Select A3 wide size paper AS a5 Select A5 size paper A6 a6 Select A6 size paper B4 b4 Select JIS B4 size paper Select JIS B5 size paper computer cO CO Select computer size paper legall3 1g13 LG13 Select LG13inch size paper sq85 letter square Select SQ8 5inch size paper 8K 8k Select 8K size paper 16K 16k Select 16K size paper If this option is not specified the printer s default value will be used Example The command to specify the A4 paper size is lp o a4 filename For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series ledgerwide and A3WIDE are not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Printing Modes The printing mode can be selected using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value normal Process as a normal print job proof Process as a proof print job 314 Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Option Value Alternate Description Value private din Process as a private print job The din is 5 digit Document ID number If this option is not specified the printer s default v
308. mitted User has sent a fax job and it has finished faxing successfully successfully Your document has been can User had sent a print job and it has been changed to a cancelled celled state This can happen when a paper size is not available and the timeout has expired Ensure proper paper has been set to this equipment and resubmit the job If this message is notified after sending a private proof or scheduled print job the private or proof print job was cancelled before it was put into a held state This may occur because ofa missing byte or memory failure In this case ask your admin istrator to maintain the available hard disk space to store the jobs or delete the unnecessary jobs stored and resubmit the job Your document cannot be User has sent a print job and it was rendered unserviceable by printed due to error this equipment Make sure you use the correct printer driver The printer has a paper jam A paper jam has occurred Remove the jam and resubmit the job The printer is offline The printer is offline This may be displayed by monitoring other TOSHIBA device such as GL 1020 GL 1010 SC 2 so on Turn the printer online and resubmit the job The printer is out of paper One of the drawers is out of paper Add paper The printer door is open One of the doors is opened Close the door The printer requires attention An error has occurred Go to the Touch Panel Display to see the type
309. n Please Close Cover Close the Front Cover Main Feeding Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Main Part Feeding Cover Transfer Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Transfer Cover Lower Side Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Large Capacity Feeder Feeding Cover Drawer Open Please Close Cover Close the Drawer Cover Auto Duplex Unit Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the duplex unit cover Relay Unit Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Relay Unit Cover Finisher Door Open Please Close Door Close the Finisher Door Lower Tray Transport Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Lower Tray Transport Cover Lower Tray Delivery Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Lower Tray Delivery Cover Lower Tray Front Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Lower Tray Front Cover Hole Punch Unit Front Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Punch Unit Front Cover Hole Punch Unit Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Punch Unit Cover Job Separator Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Job Separator Cover Offset Tray Cover Open Please Close Cover Close the Offset Tray Cover Printing Guide TopAccessDocMon Errors Paper Jam Details Paper Jam in Auto Duplex Unit Please Clear Paper Path Description Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remo
310. n 8 5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet 32K on 16K Select this to print a 32K size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on 16K paper to fit on half a sheet 16K on 8K Select this to print a 16K size booklet Every 2 pages are printed on 8K paper to fit on half a sheet 3 If you want to add a margin space between facing pages enter a width in the Center Margin field Center Margin 0 040 e You can change the unit of the margin at the Units drop down box e The center margin can be set from 0 000 inch to 0 500 inches in units of 0 01 inch when the unit is inch and from 0 000 mm to 12 700 mm in units of 0 10 mm when the unit is mm Printing Guide Printing from Windows 261 4 If you want to add a margin on the outside edge enter a width in the Outer Margin field Outer Margin 0 030 m e You can change the unit of the margin at the Units drop down box e The center margin can be set from 0 000 inch to 1 00 inches in units of 0 01 inch when the unit is inch and from 0 000 mm to 25 40 mm in units of 0 10 mm when the unit is mm 5 If you want to double staple the center check the Staple Down the Center box Staple Down the Center NOTE Staple Down the Center is available only when the Saddle stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab 6 If you want to create a booklet that can be read from right to left check the Number Pages from Right to Left box
311. nd deselect the components you do not want to install vi Top amp ccessDocMon r Description w TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCLE Setup will install Agfa Fonts on wj TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c your computer v 102 37 MB of space required on the C drive 14757 51 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back Cancel TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 91 92 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Check this to install the PCL5c printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver Agfa TrueType Fonts Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts For e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series Client InstallSheild Wizard X Select Components Ta Select the components setup will install Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install m Description wj Top amp ccessDocMon W TOSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PCL6 Setup will install the TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 i fy OSHIBA e STUDIO450 Series PSL3 0450 Series PSL3 printer driver on your computer 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14753 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back
312. ndows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update v Specify a location JEAUSB Browse Em The Browse for Folder dialog box appears 14 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98 Me is located and click OK Browse for Folder 24 x Select the folder that contains driver information INF file for this device E e STUDIO Clientl E 2 2 S amp me E Pelbc C Fre C Ger Cancel e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive 9X_ME PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive 9X_ME PS lt language gt 15 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update v Specify a location E98 MENPCLSCAU SA Y lt Back Next gt Cancel 58 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 16 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Windows driver file
313. nf My Network P MEN Files of type Setup Information inf Cancel 130 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows e To install the PCL5c printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 12 Click OK Install From Disk K x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK m selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from ENwW2K XP 200 NPCLSCAUSA 13 Select the printer driver and click OK Add Printer Wizard a X S Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with Cie an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for 4 compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Have Disk Cancel e f any other printer driver s had already been installed on your com puter the Default Printer screen is displayed Continue to next step e f no printer driver had been installed on your computer the complete screen is displayed Skip to step 15 NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box ap
314. ng from Windows Loading profile 1 Select a profile in the Profile drop down box TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Original Paper Size Print Paper Size Paper Source Paper Type Orientation Letter Number of Copies Letter 8 1 2811 Manual Scale 1 00 A Same as Original Size Plain Portrait Y n EO E Copy Handling Sort Copies bd Color Automatic M Graphics Profile File05 m Rape None x File01 l Save As File02 ole Punch None File03 E Sided Printing Book m Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Help The settings profile is loaded from the file and apply to the printer options Deleting profile 1 Select a profile that you want to delete in the Profile drop down box and click Delete f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 xJ Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Original Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 x 11 Manual Scale 1 004 A Print Paper Size Same as Original Size Paper Source Automatic Me Paper T ype Plain ed Orientation Portrait x M Tun Number of Copies 1 nd Copy Handling Sort Copies ba golor Automatic ba ftaple None m Graphics Profile 7 Save As Delete ole Punch None
315. nge Rate Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 331 332 2 Restore Defaults Click this to restore the default refresh rate for each item 3 Change Rate Select an item in the list and click it to change the refresh rate The Document Notification Printer Status and Print Queue dialog box appears P 332 Changing the refresh rate Changing the refresh rate The Document Notification Printer Status and Print Queue dialog box appears when clicking Change Rate in the Refresh Rate tab of the configuration dialog box When the dialog box appears select the desired refresh rate using the slide bar The available range of the refresh rate varies for each item Document Notification You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 seconds The default refresh rate for the document notification 1s 30 seconds x Select the Desired Refresh Rate i L LI 0 1 minute Seconds No Refresh 30 seconds Cancel Help Printer Status You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 5 minute in units of 30 seconds The default refresh rate for the document notification 1s 1 minute Printer Status 1 x Select the Desired Refresh Rate 5 minutes Seconds No Refresh 1 minute Cancel Help Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon Print Queue You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 sec
316. nnections This printer will be managed by r All settings will be managed and configured on this computer C Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 4 Click Add Port Add Printer Wizard Ed Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer ai Local Port TOSHIBA e C LPT2 Local Port L LPT3 Local Port L COMI Local Port L1 come Local Port L COM3 Local Port zi Add Port Configure Port Enable printer pooling eee e The Printer Ports dialog box appears 5 Select LPR Port and click New Port Printer Ports i21 x Available Printer Parts Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port Local Port New Monitor Cancel e The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears NOTE If LPR Port is not listed make sure the TCP IP Printing Service is installed on your Windows NT 4 0 LPR Port is not listed unless the TCP IP Printing Service is installed 6 Enter the IP address of this equipment in the Name or address of server providing Ipd field and Print in the
317. nstall the PS3 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PS lt language gt 14 Click OK Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK m selected and then click OK Copy manufacturer s files from DA NTAPCLSCNUSA 110 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 15 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed es Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ce installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers Have Disk lt Back Cancel NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c driver is already installed for this printer Would you like to keep the existing driver or use the new one Your Programs may print differently if you use the new driver C Keep existing driver recommended Type in the name of this printer When you have finished click Next Note Exceeding 31 characters in the Server and Printer name combination may not be supported by some applications Printer name TOSHIBA e STLIDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer
318. nstallation Please click Restart to reboot the system will appear and it will automatically install the Windows Installer if the proper version of Windows Installer is not installed If this message appears click Restart to reboot your computer After rebooting the computer the InstallShield Wizard dialog box automatically appears InstallShield Ga Setup has completed configuring the Windows t Installer on your system The system needs to be restarted in order to continue with the installation Please click Restart to reboot the system Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 119 3 Click Next ie IP P2P 3 12 InstallShield Wizard x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for IP P2P The InstallShield R Wizard will install IP P2P on your computer To continue click Next If you have a version of IP P2P already installed you should uninstall it before continuing with this installation If you continue the installation without uninstalling the previous version Windows may duplicate the discovered P2P ports To uninstall IP P2P versions 2 00 through 2 20 please run the Uninstall program that was included when the original utility was installed To uninstall IP P2P version 2 30 through 2 73 please go the Control Panel Add Remove Programs and select IP P2P then click OK C with a P2P port may cause errors Please remove the ports of any printers that use a P2P port WARNING T
319. nt InstallShield Wizard x Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files E aa Setup will install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder m Destination Folder CS STOSHIBASTOSHIBA e STUDIO Client Browse InstallShield lt Back Cancel e f you want to change the location where the programs are installed click Browse In the dialog box that appears select the folder and click OK e The Setup Type screen is displayed 6 Select Custom and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard _ xj Setup Type T Select the Setup Type to Install at Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Next Typical Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users C Complete Program will be installed with all options Custom You may choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users InstallShield lt Back Cancel e The Select Components screen is displayed T Check the software that you want to install and click Next For e STUDIO4511 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x Select Components Select the components setup will install i Select the components you want to install a
320. nt Code must be 5 digit number 3 Click Apply and OK to save settings Copying the PPD File for Windows The Client CD ROM contains a printer description file for popular Windows applications PageMaker 6 0 6 5 and 7 0 do not support automatic installation of printer description files To make printing available in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes of this application copy the printer description file to the appropriate location Copying the printer description file 1 On the Client CD ROM open the folder that contains the PS3 printer driver e For Windows 98 Me Client CD ROM 9X_ME PS lt language gt e For Windows NT 4 0 Client CD ROM NT PS lt language gt e For Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Client CD ROM W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 2 Copy the printer description file ppd to the appropriate location For PageMaker 6 0 PM6 RSRC USENGLSH PPD4 e For PageMaker 6 5 PM65 RSRC USENGLSH PPD4 e For PageMaker 7 0 Program Files Adobe PageMaker 7 0 Rsrc Usenglish PPD4 Printing Guide Printing from Windows NOTE When you print a document using the PPD file for e STUDIO4511 Series you can select the high resolution setting such as Color High res General for the Color Resolution Type in the Print dialog box even if the optional expansion memory is not installed In that case the print job will not be printed Printing from Application Considerations and Limitations e Some options
321. nt Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver e The Select Port dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows NOTE The TopAccessDocMon is not available for parallel printing Do not check this item However when this equipment and your computer are connected to the TCP IP local area network and this equipment is connected to the parallel port of your com puter you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series e The PCLSc printer driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit 8 Make sure LPT1 is displayed in the Network path or queue name field and click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizare x a Select Port al Select the port for Printer Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name LPT1 Discovery Browse lt Back Cancel e The Select Program Folder screen is displayed 9 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShi
322. nt Monitor menu in the task bar or the selected printer driver when you run TopAccessDoMon by selecting a printer driver in the Printers folder and selecting TopAccessDocMon in the File menu the message This printer is different from default printer Continue to open TopAccessDocMon please click Yes is displayed If this message is dis played click No and select a correct device Configuring Discovery Settings You can configure the discovery settings Discovery Settings x Devices M Find e STUDIO280 Series Ly Network Enable PX SPX Search v Enable TCP IP Search Search local subnet C Specify a range From OK Cancel Help 1 Devices Click the arrow button to display the poll down list and check the model name that you want to search 338 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 2 Network Enable IPX SPX Search Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX SPX network This is available only when the IPX SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer and the computer is connected to the NetWare server 3 Network Enable TCP IP Search Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP IP network This is available only when the TCP IP protocol is installed in your computer When this is enabled select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in the TCP IP network e Search local subnet Se
323. nt Paper Size Paper Source Paper Type Orientation Portrait m e The Primary Tab Dialog dialog box appears 4 In the Tab Manufacturer drop down box select the product name of the tab paper that you use or select Custom when you use other manufactured tab paper Primary Tab Dialog X Select a Tab manufacturer for your tab print job Tab Manufacturer ERENT EE TREE M Tab Extension o Enn 4 0 393 0 787 inch zl Tab Extension gt s Image Shift Width 0 500 z Shift n 0 119i zl Image Shi gt 0 0 1 19 inch Units inches z cum 5 When you select Custom in the Tab Manufacturer option enter the width of tab extension in the Tab Extension field 6 Enter the width to shift the printed image in the Image Shift Margin filed fyoucreate a document as described in Step 1 enter the width of the tab extension here NOTE This equipment cannot print in the 0 08 inch or 2 mm margin area on the right side on the paper Therefore be sure to enter the image shift margin so that an image will be printed within the printable area T Click OK 8 Set other print options you require and click OK 9 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is printed on the tab paper 270 Printing Guide Printing from Windows Printing from Macintosh This equipment supports printing from Macintosh applications Printing from an Application on Ma
324. nt code if this equipment is enabled the depart ment codes Before specifying the department code you must check the Department Code option in the Printing Modes menu Then specify the department code in this menu Feature Sets Department Code DC Digit 1 Department Code DC Digit 2 Department Code DC Digit 3 Department Code DC Digit 4 Department Code DC Digit 5 OOOO SUPPLEMENT How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job which no department code or invalid department code is specified varies depending on the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis trator mode When the Department Code Enforcement is enabled the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled the invalid department code print job will be printed 1 Department Code DC Digit 1 Select the first digit of the department code 2 Department Code DC Digit 2 Select the second digit of the department code 3 Department Code DC Digit 3 Select the third digit of the department code 4 Department Code DC Digit 4 Select the forth digit of the department code 5 Department Code DC Digit 1 Select the fifth digit of the department code 300 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh DIN Document ID Number In the DIN menu yo
325. ntains a lot of characters and line arts NOTE The Image Quality Type option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab For e STUDIO4S0 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Image Quality Type option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 2 Halftone This sets how halftone colors are printed e Default Select this to print halftone properly for a job type which is selected at Image Quality Type e Detail Select this to print halftone in detail e Smooth Select this to print halftone smoothly NOTES Only Detail and Smooth can be selected when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab e Only Detail and Smooth can be selected for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 3 Resolution This sets the resolution for printing e 600 x 600 dpi Select this to print in 600 x 600 dpi e 1200 x 600 dpi Select this to print in 1200 x 600 dpi 242 Printing Guide Printing from Windows NOTE 1200 x 600 dpi is available only when the optional expansion memory is installed and configured on the Configuration tab e 1200 x 600 dpi cannot be selected when Save to e Filing is selected on the Print Job tab e The Resolution option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The
326. ntation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AGFA AccuSet 1NNNSF vA 3 E Have Disk lt Back Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 10 Click Browse Install From Disk x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK cas selected and then click OK LOK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from Eoo 4 Browse e The A is not accessible message appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 7 11 Click Cancel Locate File Ed C3 A is not accessible The device is not ready Retry Cancel e The Locate File dialog box appears 12 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 13 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT 4 0 is located and click Open Look in a Usa e File name eS4c5cNT at Cancel Files of type Setup Information in e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate ICD ROM d
327. nter Wizard The procedure to install the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard differs depending on the version of the Windows being used P 75 Windows NT 4 0 P 80 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 LL LL e TopAccessDocMon is also available for LPR printing To install TopAccessDocMon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Windows NT 4 0 REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows NT 4 0 as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege Installing the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start select Settings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Ls Printers of Xx File Edi View Help C Printers Hae xe ext d Printe TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 1 object s selected The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Select My Computer and click Next LX Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer co
328. nting Using the Installer You can install the client software and set up the Novell printing using the installer in the Client CD ROM Installing the client software for Novell printing using the installer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 133 The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used REQUIREMENTS You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 e You have an appropriate privilege to access the NetWare server 1 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears e Ifthe installer does not automatically start double click Setup exe in the Client CD ROM 2 Select your language and click OK Choose Setup Language p x Select the language for the installation from the choices below e The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard X Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TOSHIBA e STUDIOAM511 Series Client The InstallShield Wizard will install TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer To continue click Next Back Cancel e The License Agreement screen is displayed 134 Printing Guide
329. ntosh PPD file e The Stuffit file varies depending on the equipment TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511Series sit for e STUDIO4511 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIOA450Series sit for e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO280Series sit for e STUDIO280 Series NOTE To extract the file the Stufflt utility must be installed on your computer For instruc tions on how to extract the file refer to your Stufflt documentation 3 Double click the boot drive icon and open the System Folder Extensions Printer Descriptions folder 4 Select and drag the Macintosh PPD file that you extracted to the Printer Descriptions folder D Continue the procedure for configuring the printer P 170 Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8 6 9 x After you copy the PPD file to the Printer Descriptions folder in the System Folder you can con figure the printer This equipment supports two types of Macintosh Printing Service LPR Printing or AppleTalk Printing LPR Printing When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP IP network you can enable LPR printing from Macintosh computer e AppleTalk Printing When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network you can enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer Configuring Macintosh LPR printing PREPARATION Before installing the printer driver for LPR printing on Macintosh check with your system administrator to make sure of the
330. nu you can set the way this equipment handles the print job This menu allows you to enable various job types such as Private Print and Proof Print Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard Printer Features mF j Feature Sets Printing Modes Hd Print Mode Normal H C Department Code Distinguish Thin Lines Do not Print Blank Pages OOOO fa Preview Save As PDF X Cancel Print m Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 305 306 1 Print Mode This sets the type of print job Normal Select this to print a normal job Proof Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval before printing the remaining copies The print job sent as a proof job is saved in the proof job queue on this equipment and the remaining copies are not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display This option allows you to check a job s output before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste Private Print using Document ID DIN Select this to print a private job When this is selected specify the 5 digit Document ID DIN in the DIN menu The print job is saved in the private job queue on this equipment and not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment This option is useful when you want to print a confidential document secured using a password
331. nufacturer s installation disk into the drive ma selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from rm m Browse e The Locate File dialog box appears 6 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 146 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 is located and click Open SS h D3o 3 xj Look in ausa fe C EJ My eS File name es 4c5c2k inf Y My Network P Cancel Files of type e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt language gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 8 Click OK Install From Disk a X Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from E NW2K XP 2003XPCLBCNUSA m Browse 9 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Jj xj EA Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with Ca an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your
332. o users can check to see who submitted the print jobs by using the Touch Panel Display and monitoring tools Please ask your administrator whether or not you should enter the Department Code Printing Guide Printing from Windows SUPPLEMENT How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job which no department code or invalid department code is specified varies depending on the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis trator mode and whether the SNMP Communication is enabled or not When the SNMP Communication and Department Code Enforcement are enabled an error message will be displayed when entering the invalid department code When the SNMP Communication is disabled and Department Code Enforcement is enabled the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled the invalid department code print job will be printed However when using Windows NT 4 0 and configure the connection through a Net Ware print server an error message for entering the invalid department code will not be displayed even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Commu nication is enabled A department code can be entered every time you begin printing If you have to use a different department code for each print job enter it when you begin printing Entering department code
333. odel determine which printer to use uS Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation NT disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AISEA AeeuGat 10 GE WR 2 zl Windows Update Have Disk tees e The Install From Disk dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Click Browse Install From Disk E E x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive m selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from m Browse e The Locate File dialog box appears 8 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 9 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 is located and click Open 21x Look in ausa Ck EJ File name es 4c5c2k inf m Cancel Files of type e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PCL6 lt lang
334. of the Client CD ROM Client Software Installer e Client CD ROM setup exe This is the setup program to install the printer drivers TopAccessDocMon and Font Man ager on your computer For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Font Manager is not provided in the Client CD ROM for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Font Manager is provided in the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit PCLSc Printer Drivers Color e Client CD ROM 9X MEWCL5C language This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows 98 Me for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play e Client CD ROM NT PCL5C lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows NT 4 0 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard e Client CD ROM AW2K XP 2003 PCL5C language This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The PCLSc Printer Driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Printer Drivers Black White e Client CD ROM 9X ME PCL6 lt language gt This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 98 Me for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play e Client C
335. on can be used to monitor both devices Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows If you want to install it from the other CD ROM uninstall the TopAccessDocMon then install it When you uninstall the TopAccessDocMon please click No at the dialog box that displays the message to delete the settings for the TopAccessDocMon so that you can restore the settings after installing new one Types of Printer Drivers e The PCL5c Printer Driver for printing color documents that use TrueType fonts such as a Microsoft Word The PCL6 Printer Driver for printing gray scale documents that use TrueType fonts such as a Microsoft Word The PS3 Printer Driver for high graphical content documents that use PostScript fonts and graphics such as Adobe PageMaker For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The PCLSc Printer Driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series System Requirements To install the printer drivers and other client software on a Windows workstation the following is required B Display Resolution e 1024 x 768 dots or more B Display Color e High Color 16bit or higher is recommended B CPU e Pentium 133 MHz minimum Pentium 266 MHz or faster recommended B Memory e 64MB for Windows 98 e 96MB for Windows Me and Windows NT 4 0 e 128MB for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 The applicable computers depend on the printing systems B LPR Printing e Windows NT 4 0
336. on on resolving the error condition refer to CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function You need to clear hole punches from Finisher For information on resolving the error condition refer to DISPOSING OF THE PUNCHED PAPER BITS OPTIONAL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function Non recommended toner is being used For information on resolving the error condition refer to REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYMBOL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function You need to remove excess staples from the Saddle stitch Finisher You performed saddle stitch printing using mixed paper sizes Cannot load paper from the LCF Cannot output to inner tray e Cover Open The Cover Open error icon indicates that you need to close the cover e Drawer Open The Drawer Open error icon shows that drawer is open You must close the specified drawer to resume printing and copying functions e Toner Empty The color of the Toner Empty icon varies depending on which toner cartridge is empty Black Black Toner Empty Cyan Cyan Toner Empty Magenta Magenta Toner Empty Yellow Yellow Toner Empty For information on resolving the error condition refer to REPLACE TONER CAR TRIDGE SYMBOL in Operator s Manual for Basic Function e Toner Full The Toner Full error icon indicates you need to replace the toner container For information on resolving the error condition refer to REPLACE TONER BAG SYMBOL
337. onds The default refresh rate for the document notification is 10 seconds x Select the Desired Refresh Rate 0 1 minute Seconds No Refresh 10 seconds Cancel Help Finding the Printer Address The Installed tab displays the network IP address of each device on your computer that has a printer driver installed D TopAccessDocMon 1 0 13 1 Startup Notification Refresh Rates Installed TOSHIBA GL printer installed on your compute Printer Name Tx c IPAIPX Address EE IP_10 10 70 105 10 10 70 105 d TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 IP 10 10 70 105 10 10 70 105 d TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 IP 10 10 70 105 10 10 70 105 Update Cancel He 1 Printer Name This displays the printer driver name 2 Port This displays the port on your computer to which the printer driver is connected 3 IP IPX Address This displays the IP address or IPX address of the printer the printer driver maps 4 Update Click this to update the printer address information Monitoring the Printer How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window To display the TopAccessDoeMon window that displays the print job information and printer status access either from the Document Monitor menu or Printers menu Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the Document Monitor menu and control it from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar Printing Gu
338. oprietary to TTEC and or its suppliers TTEC and its suppliers disclaim responsibility for the installation and or use of this Software and for the results obtained by using this Software You may use one copy of the Software as installed on a single Sys tem and may not copy the Software for any reason except as necessary to use the Software on a single Sys tem Any copies of the Software shall be subject to the conditions of this Agreement You may not nor cause or permit any third party to modify adapt merge translate reverse compile reverse assemble or reverse engineer the Software You may not use the Software except in accordance with this license No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you and full ownership is retained by TTEC or its suppliers Source code of the Software is not licensed to you You will be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement unauthorized transfer reproduction or use of the Soft ware or its documentation Term This license is effective until terminated by TTEC or upon your failure to comply with any term of this Agreement Upon termination you agree to destroy all copies of the Software and its documentation You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and its documentation and all copies Disclaimer of Warranty THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMIT
339. options Option Value Alternate Value Description left2right off OFF Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Select right to left page layout for booklet printing mode This value decides the layout of the pages in the booklet If this value is OFF then the layout of pages is Right to Left as shown in the figure below 317 Option Value Alternate Description Value left2right on Select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode This is the default setting If the value is ON then the layout of the pages is from Left to Right as shown in the figure below If left2right off then long edge binding is selected otherwise if left2right on then short edge binding is used Example The command to select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode is lp o left2right on filename Center Margin The booklet mode center margin can be selected using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value centermargin Select the center margin value for booklet printing mode value This value specifies in pixels the Center Margin or the Gutter This is in addition to the center margin already specified by the application The valid range for value is 0 300 Default is 0 Example The command to select the center margin value for booklet printing mode is lp o centremargin value filename Outer Margin The booklet mode outer
340. or net_estbw program needs to know what printer language is used in each of the files that it is printing so that it can issue the correct commands to select various options The following options are valid for the print languages Option Value Alternate Description Value Each file to be printed is examined to see if it starts with the sequence If it does then it is assumed that it is a Post Script file otherwise it assumes that it is a plain text or a PCL5c or PCL6 file pcl The print file is always treated as a plain text or a PCLSc or PCL6 file postscript The file is always treated as a PostScript file raw The file is treated as a fully formatted file that already contains all the necessary commands The file is sent to the printer with out any modifications In this mode no other options are valid and a banner page is not printed All PCL5e jobs automatically send the esc amp k2G command to convert the line feed charac ter into a carriage return line feed sequence If the PCL5e job contains some of its own escape sequences it may override this setting The default print language is auto Example The command to specify that a file is PostScript is lp o ps filename Color Mode The color mode can be specified using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value color Print the document in the color mode grayscale Print the docum
341. or e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only e Tray 1 Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher e Tray 2 Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher NOTES Fore STUDIO4511 Series and e STUDIO450 Series Tray 1 and Tray 2 are only available when the Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Fin isher are installed and configured on the Configuration tab Printing Guide Printing from Windows 225 NOTE SUPPLEMENT SUPPLEMENTS 226 For e STUDIO280 Series Tray 1 and Tray 2 are only available when the Sin gle staple Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab and Tray 1 is only available when the Saddle stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab If you select Rotated Sort Copies at the Copy Handling drop down box in the Setup tab only Inner Tray can be selected When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration tab you can select Job Separator Upper and Job Separator Lower instead of Inner Tray 8 Department Enter the user s department code if the system is managed with department codes Please ask your administrator for your department code If the number of the printed sheets for a print job exceeds the output limitation for the entered department code the print job is stored in the invalid department code prin
342. or Print Dialog on Mac OS 8 6 9 x 6 Click Print to print a document 272 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8 6 9 x The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the Page Setup command from the File menu of the application In the Page Setup dialog boxes you can specify the Page Attribute settings NOTES The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications e The PostScript Options window contains the setting items that are generally pro vided by the LaserWriter 8 printer driver For details of the PostScript Options please refer to the Balloon Help on the Mac OS Page Attributes In the Page Attributes menu you can specify the paper size orientation and scale LaserWriter 8 Page Setup Page Attributes Format for MFP 00C67861 eoo 1 Format for This select the printer to be used for printing 2 Paper This selects the size of a document to be printed Available original paper sizes are listed below e Letter e A4 e Folio e Ledger e A3 e 13inch LG e Legal e A3 Wide e 8 5inch SQ e Statement e A5 e 8K e Computer e A6 e 16K e Ledger Wide B4 e B5 SUPPLEMENT Ledger Wide and A3 Wide are not available when the Single staple Finisher is installed For e STUDIO4S0 Series and e STUDIO280 Series A3 Wide and Ledger Wide are not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Serie
343. or a Private Print job after it has been sent A private print job remains in the queue until the correct Document Pass word is entered Corrective Action The end user must delete the job from the Touch Panel Display or through TopAccessDocMon and resubmit the Private Print job using a new DIN Encourage the user to write down the DIN so they can enter it to retrieve their jobs from the Touch Panel Display Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed Problem Description When accessing the printer properties the system displayed Retrieval of printer configuration failed Corrective Action If the printer driver cannot communicate with this equipment Verify that the system is run ning If not turn it on Connect to this equipment via TopAccess If you cannot connect reboot this equipment If that fails check the printer driver port assignment to make sure it is correct Cannot Print a Job Using SMB Problem Description When printing a document using a SMB connection the job cannot be printed because an error such as No more connections can be made to this remote computer and Your file could not be printed due to an error are continuously displayed Corrective Action It assumes using SMB printing in a small network If you can use the Windows NT 4 0 Win dows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 as a print server it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server For further information about s
344. or later Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard Layout Pages per Sheet Layout Direction Border OOOO Two Sided Printing Long Edge Binding Short Edge Binding Preview Save As PDF Fax Cancel Print 1 Page per Sheet This sets the number of multiple pages printed on one sheet The pages are reduced to fit the selected paper size automatically and are printed 1 Select this if do not wish to enable N up printing 2 Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet 4 Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged on one sheet 6 Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged on one sheet 9 Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged on one sheet 16 Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged on one sheet Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 2 Layout Direction This sets how pages are arranged on one sheet This is available only when the N up print ing printing a page on multiple sheets is set e Across Left to Right Before Down Pages arranged horizontally from left to right and then top to bottom on one sheet e Across Right to Left Before Down Pages arranged horizontally from right to left and then top to bottom on one sheet e Down Before Across Left to Right Pages arranged vertically from top to down and then left to right on one sheet e Down Before Across Right to Left Pages arr
345. ors are printed e Default Select this to print halftone properly for a job type which is selected at Image Quality Type e Detail Select this to print halftone in detail e Smooth Select this to print halftone smoothly NOTE Only Detail and Smooth can be selected when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 3 Resolution This sets the resolution for printing e 600 x 600 dpi Select this to print in 600 x 600 dpi e 1200 x 600 dpi Select this to print in 1200 x 600 dpi Printing Guide Printing from Windows 239 NOTE 1200 x 600 dpi is available only when the optional expansion memory is installed and configured on the Configuration tab e 1200 x 600 dpi cannot be selected when Save to e Filing is selected on the Print Job tab e The Resolution option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 4 Brightness Enter the percentage of brightness for printing You can set from 100 darkest to 100 light est in units of 1 You can also set the percentage of brightness by moving the scroll bar NOTE The Brightness option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box on the Setup tab 5 Saturation Enter the percentage of saturation for printing You can set from 100 low clear to 100 high clear in units of 1 You can also set the percentage of saturation by moving the
346. ort Lexmark TCP IP Network Port Local Port New Monitor 68 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 8 Make sure the created LPR port is checked in the Print to the following port list and click OK to save settings r d e STUDIO3511 4511 PCL6 Properties i21 x General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security Fonts Configuration About v p e STUDIO3511 4511 PCL Print to the following port s Documents will print to the first free checked port Port Description Printer v 10 10 70 105 Pri LJ LPT1 Local Port e STUDIO3511 45 LPT2 Local Port _ LPT3 Local Port COMI Local Port COM2 Local Port COM Lanal Dart z i Delete Port Configure Port Enable bidirectional support Enable printer pooling OK Cancel Help NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Configuring the LPR port for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used 1 Install the client software using the installer in the Client CD ROM e Please install the client software following the instruction of the instal lation for paral
347. ort workstation 2 Do you set up the printer Next Step P 356 Cannot Print a Job driver other than a SMB con a ey Using SMB nection 3 Open TopAccessDocMon P 357 The Device is Not and note the taskbar connec Next Step Responding tion icon and status bar mes M gt sage Is this equipment responding 4 Try resubmitting the job P 357 Cannot Interpret Does the printer status read End T TopAccessDocMon Messages Document has printed suc Warnings Errors cessfully Client Error for Macintosh Platform For Instruction Go To Is this equipment you created P 169 Installing the Printer selected in the Chooser on Mac OS 8 6 9 x Print Job Status Messages The status and result of the print jobs is indicated as following in the Print Job page in the Job Status tab and Print Log page in the Logs tab Error Code Cause Corrective Action PM size error 1200 dpi print jobs cannot be printed 402F without the optional expansion memory Send a print job with a 600 dpi setting Print enable error Please purchase the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit if you want to use the print ing function HDD full error Delete unnecessary private print jobs and invalid department print jobs Job canceled Job was canceled 352 Printing Guide When Printing cannot be Performed Error Code Power failure A222 Cause Printing Guide When Printing cannot be Perform
348. our language folder in the MacPPD folder 2 Copy the GZ file gz to the desktop and extract the Macin tosh PPD file e The GZ file varies depending on the equipment TOSHIBA e STUDIOA4511Series gz for e STUDIO4511 Series 176 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh TOSHIBA_e STUDIO450Series gz for e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO280Series gz for e STUDIO280 Series 3 Double click the boot drive icon and open the Library Print ers PPDS Contents Resources en lproj folder 4 Copy the PPD file for Mac OS X to the en Iproj folder D Continue the procedure for configuring the printer P 177 Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X After you copy the PPD file to the library folder in the System Folder you can configure the printer This equipment supports two types of Macintosh Printing Service IP Printing and AppleTalk Printing e IP Printing When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP IP network you can enable IP printing from Macintosh computer e AppleTalk Printing When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network you can enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer Configuring Macintosh IP printing 1 Start the Print Center for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X 10 3 or later located in the Applications Utility folder in the Boot Disk Utilities
349. out settings Duplex settings only for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 Output Options settings Scheduler settings only for Mac OS X 10 3 or later Cover Page settings only for Mac OS X 10 3 or later Paper Han dling settings only for Mac OS X 10 3 or later Paper Feed settings Error Handling settings and Printer Feature settings NOTE The Print dialog boxes vary across applications Copies amp Pages In the Copies amp Pages menu you can set you can set the general print options such as number of copies sort printing Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard l Copies amp Pages Copies j M Collated Pages f All OO From 1 Preview X Save As PDF 1 Copies This sets the number of printed copies You can set any integer from 1 to 9999 2 Collated Check this for sort printing 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 Pages This sets the pages to be printed e All Select this to print all pages e From Select this to specify the pages to be printed Enter the page range in the From and To field Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 291 292 Layout In the Layout menu you can set N up printing multiple pages per sheets The items in the Layout menu vary depending on the Mac OS version B For Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard Pages per Sheet Layout Direction Border e Preview Save As PDF 7 B For Mac OS X 10 3
350. owing This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The TCP IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer You can install the client software and set up the SMB printing using the installer in the Client CD ROM It assumes using SMB printing in a small network If you can use the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 as a print server it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server For further informa tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server see the Network Adminis trator s Guide Installing the client software for SMB printing The following describes an installation on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears e Ifthe installer does not automatically start double click Setup exe in the Client CD ROM Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 89 2 Select your language and click OK Choose Setup Language x Select the language for the installation from the choices below Cancel The InstallShei
351. own box v Use Front Cover Source Lower Drawer r Print Style Print on 1 side of page Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank front cover Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the first page of the document on a front side of a cover Print on both sides of page Select this to print the first two pages of the doc ument on both sides of a cover NOTE Print on both sides of page is available only when 2 Sided printing is enabled at the Setup tab 3 To print or insert a back cover check the Use Back Cover box and set the Source and Print Style options that you require v Use Back Cover Source Pedestal Upper Drawer Print Style Print on 1 side of page How to set the Source and Print Style options are the same as Use Front Cover option Printing Guide Printing from Windows 4 To print or insert sheets between the pages check the Insert Pages box and set the Source and Print Style options as you require Then enter the page numbers the sheets will be inserted v Insert Pages Source Upper Drawer Print Style Do not print on page m Pages 5 1 3 25 35 83 How to set the Source and Print Style options are same as Use Front Cover option e f you want to enter more than one page in the Pages field separate the page numbers with commas e When you select Print on 1 side of page specified page will be
352. paper When checked select the binding direction at the Binding option NOTE 2 sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed 5 Binding This sets the type of binding for 2 sided printed pages e Long Edge Binding Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper The direc tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation Portrait Landscape e Short Edge Binding Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper The direc tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation Portrait Landscape Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 279 280 Finishing Options In the Finishing Options menu you can set the destination hole punching and stapling features E2 8 T Printer Destination Finishing options Destination HolePunch Of r Stapling 1 Destination This selects the output destination tray e Inner Tray Select this to route the output to the inner tray e Job Separator Upper Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep arator e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only e Job Separator Lower Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep arator e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Only e Tray 1 Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher e Tray 2 Select this to route the ou
353. pears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Use Existing Driver driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want to keep the existing driver or use the new one C Keep existing driver recommended Replace existing driver lt Back Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 131 14 Select whether using this printer as a default printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Default Printer Y our computer will always send documents to the default printer unless you specify otherwise Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes No 15 Click Finish Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard Y ou have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c on ht Default Yes Location Comment To close this wizard click Finish e he printer driver is installed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver SUPPLEMENT If you want to install TopAccessDocmon and Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the
354. print jobs are those for which a proof copy has already been printed but the balance remaining is being held in this queue You can display all proof print jobs that have not been printed release the rest of the docu ment for printing and cancel a print job as needed e Scheduled Print tab Displays details of jobs that are being held for printing at a speci fied date and time e Fax tab Displays details of fax jobs that are being sent using the N W Fax driver e e Filing tab Displays details of documents that are being stored in Box about one minute e TopAccessComposer tab Displays details of documents that are being stored in TopAc cessComposer about one minute Invalid tab Lists jobs with invalid department codes B Status Bar The status bar extends along the lower border of the TopAccessDocMon window The informa tion it contains depends upon the tab you ve chosen e You can choose whether or not to display the status bar by checking unchecking the Status Bar option using the View menu Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 1 Status Located on the left side of the bar is a phrase that describes the status of the device or job e Device Status tab shows the condition of the printer e Print Queue tab shows the number of documents in the print queue e Private Print tab shows the number of private print jobs e Proof Print tab shows the number of proof print jobs
355. printed Releasing invalid print documents 1 Display the Invalid Print tab and select a print job that you want to print NOTE Youcan release the print job only that you originally submitted 2 Click Document menu and select Release O x ad TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printer Document View Help elease T T 1 1 T le eue Private Print Proof Print Scheduled Print Fax e Filing Invalid Status userName Pages Administrator 0758 10 3 2003 12 32 4 1 10 10 70 105 p ci Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 349 350 e The Invalid Release dialog box appears 3 Enter the 5 digit department code and click OK Department Code i x Enter the Department Code 00001 Cancel e The selected invalid print job is printed Event Notification When an event occurs that has been assigned alert status selected for notification a popup noti fication dialog box appears This popup message contains the following information about the event NOTE If you did not select Popup Message as the notification method you will not see a popup notification dialog box TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 B inf xl Date Time 8 23 2003 12 52 07 AM Document Message i printer door is open Notification Number 273 I4 4 gt 2 Date Time displays the date and time of the document e Doc
356. printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 87 19 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard q Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other network users Indicate whether you want this printer to be available to other users If you share this printer you must provide a share name Do not share this printer C Share as lt Back Cancel 20 Select Yes to print a test page and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do you want to print a test page Yes C No lt Back Cancel 21 Click Finish Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Shared as lt Not Shared Pott IP_10 10 70 120 Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Default Yes Test page Yes To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel e Start copying files 22 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Usin
357. printer s default value will be used e If the file being printed specifies the paper destination or the paper size internally the banner page may print to the wrong output or on an incorrect paper size Banner Options The banner page can be printed using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value banner last Print the banner page after the job so that it will be physically on top of the job in the output tray banner first banner Print the banner page before the job so that it will be physically under the job in the output tray nobanner nb Do not print a banner The ability to specify the nobanner option can be disabled by the system administrator to force all jobs to print with a banner The default value for this option is that the banner page prints first Banner Paper Source The banner paper source can be specified using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value bauto source Select the auto paper tray selection btandem Select the large capacity feeder bexternal Select the upper drawer bupper Select the upper drawer blower Select the lower drawer bpedupper Select the upper pedestal drawer bpedlower Select the lower pedestal drawer 322 Printing Guide Printing from UNIX If the banner paper source is not specified the PCL5e auto paper source command lt esc gt amp 17H will be sent The banner
358. private job When you select this enter a 5 digit password in the Docu ment ID number field The print job sent as a private job is saved in the private job queue on this equipment and is not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display This option is useful when you want to print a confidential document that is secured by a password The user has to enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel Display 4 Proof Print Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval before print ing the remaining copies The print job sent as a proof job is saved in the proof job queue on this equipment and the remaining copies are not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display This option allows you to check a job s output before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste 5 Print to Overlay File When this is selected the print job is saved as an overlay file that is imposed on other docu ments For example if you want to print a master page image on the background of a docu ment you can create overlay file of master merge image using this option Then you can print a document using this overlay by specifying this file as an overlay image in the Use Overlay Image option at the Effect tab NOTES If the print job has several pages in the document only the first page of the docu ment will be saved as an ov
359. queue name mfp_00c67861 Nwsrv mfp 00c67861 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizar X gt Select Port A Select the part for Printer B Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name AN wsrv mfp_00c67861 Discovery lt Back Next gt Cancel If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode enter as the follow ing in the Network path or queue name field lt Tree gt lt queue name gt lt Context gt lt Tree gt Example Tree ORG queue name mfp_00c67861 Context Dept1 V Org smi p 0066786l depti oPg TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x AO Select Port hla Select the port for Printer 7 Maus Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If vou don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name rg mfp queue deptl org Discovery lt Back Next gt Cancel SUPPLEMENT The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator If you do not know the queue for this equipment ask your administrator 138 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 9 Click Next TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard _ xj Select Program Folder Please select a program folder f Setup will add
360. r It can e Search your local and network drives for fonts e Install and uninstall fonts in Windows e Remove fonts from your computer e Preview or print the fonts on your computer or network e Create font groups for personal or workgroup projects e Sort your fonts in a variety of ways etc Installing Font Manager For e STUDIO4511 Series the Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 can be installed from the Client CD ROM For instructions on how to install the Font Manager for e STUDIO4511 Series refer to the section that describes the installation using the Installer in the Client CD ROM For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series the Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 can be installed from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit To install the Font Manager for e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series double click the Setup exe file in the Font CD ROM and follow the screens Searching Fonts 368 The first time you start Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 the Find Fonts dialog box appears automatically Before installing a font in Windows you have to search the available fonts that can be installed by Font Manager 2000 Searching fonts 1 Click the Fonts menu and select Search for Fonts e The Find Fonts dialog box appears 2 Select which drive you want to search for fonts Selected Drives Select this to choose one of the drives when searching for fonts All Drives S
361. r lt language gt This includes the Tar file for SCO UnixWare 7 and SCO OpenUnix 8 e Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter P 185 About Client Software for UNIX Printing Guide About the Client CD ROM 2 INSTALLING CLIENT SOFTWARE Printing Guide 2 Installing Client Software 17 Installing Client Software for Windows This section provides instructions for configuring the printing systems on Windows computers About Client Software for Windows SUPPLEMENT B Printer Drivers Printer drivers are software components that enable application programs to interact with the printer The e STUDIO4511 Series comes with three printer drivers PCL5c PCL6 and PS3 PostScript printer drivers and e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series comes with two printer drivers PCL6 and PS3 PostScript printer drivers These printer drivers offer document print layout and assembly functions that are not available with many applications B TopAccessDocMon This utility allows you to monitor all jobs and control your own current jobs With the notifica tion feature enabled TopAccessDocMon informs you of copier or printing events such as paper out or drawer open before you walk to the copier to find your job incomplete or unsuc cessful B Agfa Font Manager This utility allows you to install and manage the TrueType fonts that are corresponding to the internal PS fonts on the equipment B Pee
362. r USB printing by Plug and Play The following describes an installation on Windows XP The procedure is the same when Win dows Server 2003 is used J REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Power on this equipment and your computer 2 Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer e The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 63 64 3 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for TOSHIBAe STUDIO4511 If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 4 Select Search for the best driver in these locations and check only the Include this location in the search check box Then click Browse Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options So S Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driv
363. r a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next coca Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Enter the IP address of this equipment in the Printer Name or IP Address field and click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard E X Add Port RS For which device do you want to add a port NS Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address fi 0 10 70 120 Port Name IP 0 10 70 120 lt Back Cancel f your network uses a DNS or WINS server enter the printer name of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the Printer Name or IP Address field e Inthe Port Name field the port name is automatically entered according to the IP address or DNS name entered in the Printer Name or IP Address field 8 Select Custom and click Settings add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wierd x Additional Port Information Required RS The device could not be identified NS The detected device is of unknown type Be sure that 1 The device is properly configured 2 The address on the previous page is correct Either correct the address and perform another search on the network by returning to the previous wizard page or select the device type if you are sure the address is correct D
364. r printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AGFA ArcuSet 1NNNSF vA 3 z Have Disk lt Back Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 10 Click Browse Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK cas selected and then click OK LOK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from C A Browse e The A is not accessible message appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 109 11 Click Cancel Locate File Ed C3 A is not accessible The device is not ready Retry Cancel e The Locate File dialog box appears 12 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 13 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT 4 0 is located and click Open Look in a Usa e File name eS4c5cNT at Cancel Files of type Setup Information in e To install the PCL5c printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PCL5C lt language gt e To install the PCL6 printer driver locate ICD ROM drive NT PCL6 lt language gt e To i
365. r printing is only available for Windows 98 and Windows Me Installation and Configuration of Peer to Peer Utility Install the printer driver using the installer in the Client CD ROM first then install the Peer to Peer utility to configure the peer to peer port Installing the Peer to Peer utility 1 Install the client software using the installer in the Client CD ROM e Please install the client software following the instruction of the instal lation for parallel printing P 25 Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer 118 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows NOTE TopAccessDocMon cannot be used when you configure the printer connection using the Peer to Peer utility Please uncheck the TopAccessDocMon in the Select Components screen during the installation If TopAccessDocMon has been installed uninstall it before installing the Peer to Peer utility 2 After installing the client software double click the Setup exe in the PtoP folder in the Client CD ROM g 3 Data Cab instmsia exe instmsiw exe IP P2P msi Ip p2p pdf setup exe Application Modified 2 7 01 5 47 PM Size 100KB Attributes Read only 100KB E My Computer The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears NOTE The message Setup has completed configuring the Windows Installer on your sys tem The system needs to be restarted in order to continue with the i
366. r properties are accessed from the Printers folder for Win dows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 This button remains grayed out until a setting is changed 9 Help Click this to browse the HELP for the printer driver Printing Guide Printing from Windows 217 Setup Tab The Setup tab contains basic print operation settings such as original paper size print paper size paper source paper type orientation number of copies and so on Also this tab allows you to enable enlarge reduce printing sort printing stapling and punching and 2 sided printing TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 xi Setup Print Job Layout Effect Image Quality About Original Paper Size Letter 81 2 x 11 D 7 Manual Scale 10024 z Print Paper Size Same as Original Size m I Paper Source Automatic S 4 unl Paper Type Plain bd l 6 Orientation Portrait a l Letter z Number of Copies fi E E 7 Copy Handling Sort Copies l Graphics Text 5 Color Automatic M Profile None M 9 Staple None z PEE Hole Punch None m l RDR 2 Sided Printing None M Cancel Help 1 Original Paper Size This selects the size of a document to be printed Available original paper sizes are listed below Letter e A4 e Folio e Envelope COMIO e Ledger e A3 e 13 LG e Envelope Monarch e Legal e A3 Wide e 8 5 SQ e
367. r the following command chmod x queue name gt conf Enter the following command chown lp lp queue name gt conf Enter the following command ps eer greo losched Grep iv grep dev null 2561 Enter the following command HCHO 5 If 0 is outputted on the screen turn the scheduler OFF Enter the following command usr sbin lpshut dev null 2 amp 1 Enter the following command Printing Guide Installing Client Software for UNIX 189 12 13 14 For e STUDIO4511 Series usr sbin lpadmin p queue name v dev null m net est45ll o rm queue name gt ofpdssc ob95 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series usr sbin lpadmin p queue name v dev null Donec estbw eo Xm sSgqgueue Name oOPpudssc 952 Enter the following command accept squeue name gt Enter the following command enable queue name gt If you turn OFF the scheduler in step 10 turn the scheduler ON Enter the following command usr lpsched gt dev null 2 amp 1 Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX 1 190 Enter the following command ls opt toshiba tap filter If the above directory does not exist enter the following com mand mkdir opt toshiba tap filter Log on to the root account Open your Linux Unix editor Create the following file etc lp interfaces queue name gt conf Add a line as below in the queue name conf dest
368. r to Peer Utility This utility allows you to create a Peer to Peer port on your computer to enable Peer to Peer printing This utility is only available for Windows 98 and Windows Me e There is another job monitoring utility TopAccess which allows you to monitor and manage your print jobs over the Internet using either Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer Because TopAccess is an embedded web based device and job manage ment tool it does not require your installation For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is separately provided in the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Planning for Installation 18 This section will help you to plan an installation suited to your environment Before installing the client software read this section Before Installing Client Software Before installing the client software confirm the followings to perform an appropriate installa tion When GL DocMon Has Been Installed If the GL DocMon for GL 1010 or GL 1020 has been installed uninstall the GL DocMon to install the TopAccessDocMon TopAccessDocMon can be used to monitor the GL 1010 and GL 1020 controller When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed If the TopAcceessDocMon has been installed from either the e STUDIO4511 Series Clientl CD ROM e STUDIO450 Series Client CD ROM or e STUDIO280 Series Client CD ROM you do not have to install it from the other one TopAccessDocM
369. ration dialog box appears P 329 Configuring TopAccessDocMon e Exit This allows you to exit TopAccessDocMon e TopAccessDocMon This allows you to display the TopAccessDocMon window for the default printer P 339 TopAccessDocMon Window e TopAccess This allows you to access TopAccess on the default printer This is available only when the default printer is set to either the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series e STUDIO280 Series GL 1020 or GL 1010 Configuring TopAccessDocMon The configuration dialog box allows you to set startup options select notification events and methods display or modify refresh rates and manually update device discovery settings In the configuration dialog box the following tabs are displayed e Startup This controls whether TopAccessDocMon is launched when starting Windows P 330 Configuring the Start Up Options e Notification This controls which printing events cause a popup message or beep alert Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 329 P 330 Configuring the Notifications e Refresh Rates This controls how often the Document Monitor searches for event notifi cations printer status and print queue contents in order to refresh the information displayed Refresh rates are also known as polling rates P 331 Changing the Refresh Rate e Installed This shows the network address associated with each installed printer driver P 333 Finding t
370. re is a paper jam in the printer e Printer is offline Check this to notify you when the printer is off line This is only available for GL 1010 GL 1020 and SC 2 Drawer is out of paper Check this to notify you when one of the printer drawers is out of paper This drawer may not be the drawer the printer is using for your job e Printer door is open Check this to notify you when the cover on the printer is open e Printer requires attention Check this to notify you when the printer requires imme diate attention e Toner is Empty Check this to notify you when a toner is empty e Used Toner Container is full Check this to notify you when the used toner container is full 2 Method This sets how TopAccessDocMon notifies you when events occur e Popup Dialog Check this for a popup dialog box e Audio Beep Check this for a beep sound Changing the Refresh Rate The Refresh Rate tab lets you change the refresh rate for document notification printer status and print queue TopAccessDocMon v1 0 13 1 x Startup Notification Refresh Rates Installed Refresh Rate Document Notification 30 seconds Printer Status 1 minute Print Queue 10 seconds Restore Defaults Change Rate Cancel He 1 Item Refresh Rate This list displays the refresh rate settings for each item You can change the refresh rate by selecting the item in this list and clicking Cha
371. reen is displayed when copying is completed T Click Finish ie IP P2P 3 12 InstallShield Wizard x InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed IP P2P Click Finish to exit the wizard e The IP PeerToPeer Setup Version 3 12 dialog box appears 8 Continue to set up the peer to peer port ra IP PeerT oPeer Setup Version 3 12 i OF x Available Printers UntName UntlP Pot Description Flags Low Cancel M Manual Entry Add aout Delete Unit Name Column based on Find Print Clear List Select Help C SerialNumber C DNS Name ee 2 NUT Memo T2 E 7 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 121 You can search the printer in the network to create the peer to peer port or you can enter the IP address of the printer to create the peer to peer port LLI P 122 Configuring the peer to peer port by searching a printer LH P 124 Configuring the peer to peer port by entering IP address manually Configuring the peer to peer port by searching a printer You can configure the peer to peer port by searching a printer SUPPLEMENT f you cannot find this equipment try to create a peer to peer port by entering the printer s IP address manually P 124 Configuring the peer to peer port by entering IP address manually 1 Click Find Printers to search this equipm
372. reen returns to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows SUPPLEMENT If an administrator has enabled the Raw TCP printing on this equipment you can set up Raw TCP printing as well When you want to set up Raw TCP printing select Raw at the Protocol option and enter 9100 in the Port Number field at the Raw Settings option Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor 31 xl Port Settings Port Name P7 0 10 70 105 Printer Name or IP Address 0 10 70 105 m Protocol I IRSA C LPR r Raw Settings Port Number 3100 LPR Settings Wueue Name _ 3 F LPR Byte Counting Enabled r1 SNMP Status Enabled Community Name pubiic SNMP Device Index 10 Click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard E x Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The detected device is of unknown type Be sure that 1 The device is properly configured 2 The address on the previous page is corect Either correct the address and perform another search on the network by returning to the previous wizard page or select the device type if you are sure the address is correct Device Type C Standard Generic Network Card Custom Settings lt Back Next gt Cancel 11 Click Finish Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard r
373. ric be Apple HP Brother e The Choose a File dialog box appears T Locate the folder into which the PPD file was copied select the PPD file and click Choose Choose a File From en Iproj De pirc224 ppu grz tkp2135x ppd gz TKPH7401 PPD gz Ds Tkph7404 ppd gz TKPH7801 PPD gz Tkph7804 ppd gz TOSHIBA e 04511Series Xerox Phaser 790 gz Xerox Phaser 3400 gz aoe PORTER ind um Xerox Phas 400 PPD gz Y size 80 KB Go to Add to Favorites Cancel Choose 8 Click Add 200 Printer List _IP Printing Printer s Address 10 10 70 105 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address f Use default queue on server Queue Name Print The printer is added to the Printer List 9 Continue the procedure to configure the installable options P 182 Configuring the Installable Options Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 179 Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing 1 Start the Print Center for Mac OS X 10 2 4 to 10 2 8 or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X 10 3 or later located Applica tions Utility folder in the Boot Disk 7 Utilities fan a a d ww ST Ww iew d Computer Home Favorites Applications 1 Ix cram x of 26 items selected 21 96 GB available cy Network Utility ODBC Administrator Print Center e The Printer List dialog box appears 2 Click Add Print
374. rinters folder Windows Update Programs x Favorites AN 1 Documents askbar amp Start Menu older Options ctive Desktop A Windows Update T Select the e STUDIO4511 Series e STUDIO450 Series or e STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select Properties in the File menu Lo Printers File Edit View Go Favorites Help Open WEA a gE Pause Printing v Set as Default 3 Add Printer TO Purge Print Documents A TOSHIBA TOSHIBA ERE e STUDIO4 e STUDIDA 5c Sharing Capture Printer Port End Capture Create Shortcut Delete Rename Printers Work Offline Close v E Displays the properties of the selected items e The printer driver properties dialog box appears 8 Display the Details tab 126 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 9 Select the created peer to peer port in the Print to the follow ing port drop down box TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c HEI Image Quality Fonts Configuration About General Details Color Management Sharing Setup Print Job Layout Effect OM TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port LPT1 Printer Port v Add Port 10 10 70 105 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 COM1 Communications Port Delete Port COM2 Communications Port FILE Creates a file on disk New Driver LPT1
375. rinting tab paper the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit In that case remove the tab paper before printing a next job Printing a document on a tab paper 1 Create a Letter sized or A4 sized document and place the text or object that should appear on the tab extension as described below When you create a document for tab printing place the text or object that should appear on the tab extension on the right side of the document You must place the text in the height exactly to fit to the tab extension Also the right margin a margin between the text and right edge of the document must have more than 0 08 inch or 2 mm space because the equipment cannot print in the space Width of Tab Extension Image Shift Margin Printed Image More than 0 08 or 2mm Document Must exactly fit the tab extension xeiaer 2 Place tab paper on the bypass guide so that the tab side becomes outside Place the tab paper so that the tab side becomes outside Printing Guide Printing from Windows 269 3 When printing a document display the Setup tab of the printer driver properties select document size in the Origi nal Paper Size drop down box and select either Letter Tab or A4 Tab according to the document size in the Print Paper Size drop down box Original Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 x 11 Manual Scale 1007 s Pri
376. riority to the application s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings 6 Toner Save Check this to print in toner save mode Printing Guide Printing from Windows 7 Do not Print Blank Page Check this ignore blank pages for printing 8 PostScript Settings Click this to specify the PostScript specific functions The PostScript Settings dialog box appears by clicking on this This print option is available only for the PS3 printer driver P 238 PostScript Settings Add Edit Watermark When you click Add or Edit the Watermark dialog box appears and you can create new watermark or edit selected watermarks Watermark E x Caption Font Name ua v 6 al Style Regular z D Color E3 Gray Browse Font Size 72 pt Ki gt 9 6 300 Bi Angle Ole Ki B gt f Posiion 0 000 inches e z m Eion 0 000 inches Solid D 3 Units inches C Draw as Outline 2 C Transparency 3 O e 1 X Position The horizontal position of a watermark is displayed You can change the position using the vertical scroll bar 2 Y Position The vertical position of a watermark is displayed You can change the position using the horizontal scroll bar 3 Units Select the unit for the X Position and Y Position field 4 Center Watermark Click this to automatically move the watermark position to the center 5 Caption Enter the text of a w
377. rive NT PS lt language gt 14 Click OK Install From Disk Ed Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive OK m selected and then click OK Copy manufacturer s files from DANTAPCLSCAU SA 78 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 15 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed es Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Ce installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers Have Disk lt Back Cancel NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard Ed TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c driver is already installed for this printer Would you like to keep the existing driver or use the new one Your Programs may print differently if you use the new driver C Keep existing driver recommended Type in the name of this printer When you have finished click Next Note Exceeding 31 characters in the Server and Printer name combination may not be supported by some applications Printer name TOSHIBA e STLIDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes e No
378. rmal 1 Print in This sets how the print job is spooled e Foreground no spool file Select this to disable any operation on the computer until printing is completed Background Select this to enable any operation on the computer during printing 2 Print Time This sets the schedule for printing e Urgent Select this to print a job immediately Normal Select this to print a job normally e Print at Select this to specify the time that the print job is sent to this equipment Specify the time and date when this is selected e Put Document on Hold Select this to hold the print job in the desktop print queue To send the print job held in the desktop print queue double click the printer icon on the desktop and activate the print job Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 2 5 Color Matching This sets the color matching for printing E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Color Matching T Print Color Color Grayscale Intent Auto selection cU Printer Profile gt Use ColorSync Output Profile Generic CMYK Profile OOO amp Printer s Default rs 1 Print Color Select Color Grayscale to print to this equipment Other selections are not supported by this equipment 2 Intent Do not specify this because ColorSync Color Matching and PostScript Color Matching at the Print Color drop down box are no
379. rtically from the top and printed right to left on one sheet 6 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged hor izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 8 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 8 pages arranged hor izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 9 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged hor izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 16 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet Printing Guide Printing from Windows 263 3 If you want to draw a line around each page check the Draw Border Around Pages box v Draw Borders Around Pages 4 If you want to print or insert a front cover check the Use Front Cover box and then select at the Source drop down box the drawer where the front cover is loaded Also at the Print Style drop down box select whether you are inserting a blank cover or printed front cover v Use Front Cover Source Upper Drawer Print Style Print on both sides of page Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank front cover Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the first page of document on the front side of the cover Print on both sides of page Select this to print the first two pages of docu
380. rtrait Upper Right Landscape Select this to staple in the upper left for the portrait document or in the upper right for the landscape document 4 T e Middle Left Portrait Middle Top Landscape Select this to staple double in the left for the portrait document or in the top for the landscape document eu Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 281 e Lower Left Portrait Upper Left Landscape Select this to staple in the lower left for the portrait document or in the upper left for the landscape document a x T e Upper Right Portrait Lower Right Landscape Select this to staple in the upper right for the portrait document or in the lower right for the landscape document aul e Middle Right Portrait Middle Bottom Landscape Select this to staple double in the right for the portrait document or in the bottom for the landscape document hem e Lower Right Portrait Lower Left Landscape Select this to staple in the lower right for the portrait document or in the lower left for the landscape document m 7 e Middle Top Portrait Middle Right Landscape Select this to staple double in the top for the portrait document or in the right for the landscape document a 282 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 1 e Middle Bottom Portrait Middle Left Landscape Select this to stapl
381. ry Advanced Manual Selection Device Information JF Cancel Help e The Manual Selection dialog box appears 3 Enter each item to specify the printer address and click OK x IP Address 10 10 70 105 IP Address Name MFP 00C67861 Location cem IP Address Enter the IP address of the printer IPX Address Enter the IPX address of the printer This is available only when the IPX SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer and the computer is connected to the NetWare server Name Enter the printer name Location Enter the location of the printer NOTE You must enter Name and either IP Address or IPX Address Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 337 4 Entered printer is added in the list Select a printer that you want to monitor from the list and click OK TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery E i x Name IPVIPK Address Location Model S MFP OOC67861 10 10 70 105 Lr Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection Device Information http 10 10 70 105 8080 Cancel Hep e TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and display the TopAccessDocMon window NOTE Ifyou select a different device from the default printer driver when you run TopAc cessDocMon by selecting TopAccessDocMon from the Docume
382. s 3 Orientation This sets the paper printing direction e Portrait The document is printed in the portrait direction Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 273 e Landscape The document is printed in the landscape direction 4 Scale This changes the size of the printed image on the page Enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce an image You can set any integer from 25 to 400 96 for the zoom ratio Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8 6 9 x The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the Print command from the File menu of the application In the Print dialog boxes you can display the General window Background Printing window Color Matching window Cover Page window Font Settings window Job Logging window Layout window Finishing Save as File window Options window Printing Modes window Booklet Mode Options window Watermark Printing Options window and Quality window NOTES The Print dialog boxes vary across applications e The Save as File window contains the setting items that are generally provided by the LaserWriter 8 printer driver For details of the Save as File window please refer to the Balloon Help on the Mac OS General In the General menu you can set the general print options such as number of copies sort print ing E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 m Destination D Copies 1 f Collated 3 Pages amp All 4 Paper Source amp All pages from Auto
383. s Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 129 7 Click OK x The server on which the unknown printer resides does not have the correct printer driver installed IF you want to install the driver on your local computer click OK TN 8 Click Have Disk xi E Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with a an installation disk click Have Disk IF your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 AT amp T i AGFA AccuSet 1000SF v52 3 z Have Disk Cancel e The Install From Disk dialog box appears 9 Click Browse Install From Disk Xj Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive cau selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from m S Browse e The Locate File dialog box appears 10 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 11 Locate the directory where the printer driver for your Win dows version is located select the INF file and click Open Look in cy usa e Ck EJ eS4c5c2k File name es 4c5c2k i
384. s folder 124 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2 Enter the items described blow Unit Name MFP 00c67861 0 IP Address 10 pp fpo fe Cancel Port om Help eet TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Unit Name Enter the name of the port to be created IP Address Enter the IP address of this equipment Port 10001 is entered in this field as the default However you must change it to a port number that is entered for the port number of the Raw TCP Print set ting in the Print Server page in TopAccess administrator mode Description Enter the comment if required 3 Click OK e The entered printer information is added to the Available Printers list 4 Make sure S is displayed in the Flags column for this equipment to be connected If not select this equipment and click Select to display S in the Flags column ra IP PeerT oPeer Setup Version 3 12 i OF Xx Available Printers UnitName UntlP Pot Description Flags OK 10 10 70 105 10 10 70 105 10001 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 SMP Cancel M Manual Entry Delete Rl nans amban Find Printers Clear List Select Help C SerialNumber DNS Name tou IP Address C Unit Name Mambo be hors 2 4 Permanent 5 Click OK Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 125 6 Click Start select Settings and click Printers to open the P
385. s or Power Users privilege Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 127 1 Click Start and select Printers in Settings Windows 2000 or select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Server 2003 4 Windows Update f Set Program Access and Defaults N Control Panel Network and Dial up Connections gt A Taskbar amp Start Menu e The Printers folder is opened 2 Double click the Add Printers icon iBi xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help d Back v GQsearch Gyrolders C4 R GSK oA E addressa rmes 0 mee T Le 43 Printers Add Printer The Add Printer wizard gives you step by step instructions For installing a printer To install a new printer double click the Add Printer icon Windows 2000 Support i object s selected e When using the Windows XP Server 2003 click Add a printer in the Printer Tasks menu e The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections To continue click Next Bacl Cancel 128 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 4 Select Network printer and click Next carr the spices your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to
386. s to open the Printers folder Programs x Favorites A 1 Documents v A Taskbar amp Start Menu J Folder Options A Active Desktop R Windows Update 3 Select the printer driver and select Properties in the File menu LS Printers i x File Edit View Go Favorites Help Open n a Pause Printing Up Map Drive Disconnect Cut Copy Set as Default Purge Print Documents Sharing dd Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO4 TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 1 Series PCL5c Capture Printer Pott End Capture Create Shortcut Delete Rename v Printers Work Offline Close o Displays the properties of the selected items e The printer driver properties dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 105 4 Display the Details tab and click Add Port TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 24x Image Quality Fonts Configuration About General Details Color Management Sharing Setup Print Job Layout Effect E TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port LPT1 Printer Port Add Port Delete Port Print using the following driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c New Driver Capture Printer Port End Capture Timeout settings Not selected fi 5 seconds Transmission retry jas seconds Spool Settings
387. s in a specific location so you can select the driver you want lt Back Cancel 6 Check only the Specify a location check box and click Browse Add New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update v Specify a location C WINDOWS OPTIONS CABS Back Next gt Cancel The Browse for Folder dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows T Select the USB folder in the Client CD ROM and click OK Browse for Folder i21 x Select the folder that contains driver information IMF file for this device a e STUDIO Clientl E 3 9 me C Aata C Discover C Doemon C MacPPD C PandP C PtoP C Strings cms 3 7 W2k p 2003 31 7 Nt Hh AE al Printers zl 8 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update IV Specify a location 9 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Windows driver file search for
388. s installed for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series only 3 Hole Punch Unit This sets whether or not the optional hole punch unit is installed e None Select this when hole punch unit is not installed e 2 Holes Select this when the 2 hole punch unit is installed e 2 3 Holes Select this when the 2 3 hole punch unit is installed 4Holes F Select this when the 4 hole F punch unit is installed 4Holes S Select this when the 4 hole S punch unit is installed 4 Auto Duplexer This sets whether or not the optional automatic duplexer is installed This is available only for e STUDIO280 Series None Select this when the optional automatic duplexer is not installed Installed Select this when the optional automatic duplexer is installed 5 Upper Drawer Paper Type This sets the paper size and paper type set in the upper drawer 6 Lower Drawer Paper Type This sets the paper size and paper type set in the lower drawer 7 Pedestal Upper Paper Type This sets the paper size and paper type set in the upper pedestal This can be set only when the upper pedestal is installed 8 Pedestal Lower Paper Type This sets the paper size and paper type set in the lower pedestal This can be set only when the lower pedestal is installed 9 Large Capacity Paper Type This sets the paper size and paper type set in the Large Capacity Feeder This can be set only when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed 1
389. s loaded in the Pedestal 2 when it is installed Large Capacity Paper Type Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the Large Capacity Feeder when it is installed Bypass Feeder Select the paper type of paper that is loaded in the Stack Feed Bypass Memory Select the size of memory For more information about each item see descriptions about the Configuration Tab P 246 Configuration Tab 3 Click Apply and OK to save settings Configuring the Options Automatically The following describes an instruction on Windows 2000 The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used Printing Guide Printing from Windows Setting the configuration tab using SNMP communication REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Select the printer driver in the Printers folder Then click File and select Properties ioi xj File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Open earch UyFolders 4 0 GS X wo EE Set as Default Printer Printing Preferences f a is tee S c Add Printer TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA ewe sm e STLIIDIO4 e STUDIO4 1 Series PCL5c Pause Printing Cancel All Documents Sharing Use Printer Offline T TopAccessDocMon Server Properties Create Short
390. s printed on the front side of the sheet and back side of the sheet will be blank UJ AIM e 9 Alo e If Print on 1 side of page is selected while 2 sided printing is performed and you enter an even numbered page printed on the back side of the paper for the Pages field the specified page will be blank The page is printed on the front side of the inserted sheet and the 2 sided printing continues from the next page UJ 5 z UJ 5 6 5 a 4 a 3 2 1 e If Print on both sides of page is selected while 2 sided printing is performed and you enter an even numbered page printed on the back side of the paper for the Pages field the specified page will be blank The specified page and the next page are printed on the inserted sheet and the 2 sided printing continues from the next page T 6 5 4 Bla 3 2 1 Printing Guide Printing from Windows 229 230 NOTE NOTES 4 Interleave Pages This sets the interleaving page feature that is useful when you want to insert paper of a dif ferent type or from another source between every page of your print job For example you could use this option to insert blank colored sheets between overhead transparencies To enable interleaving pages check on the box and select the location from where sheets are to be fed Source Select the location from where the interleaving sheet is to be fed The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary d
391. seeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseneeeseeeeeseneeesaes 358 TopAccessDocMon Notification MeSSages ccccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 358 TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages sseeeeeeseeereee 359 Device Status IDndieatO s orci ie o epu E RR EN tetas oec et eb ERU bos 364 POCO deett Cc 367 Managing Fonts with Font ManagGet ccccccceceseeceeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 368 Installing Font Manager uoi iecdiceo deru de etede tae0d c dre bed sbbe UD rec Perdu epe os Men UE 368 Searching Fons oou outta S M a 368 stalling T Ontesth VV IBIOOMS sseni treere a bd or cud ubeku RS DU cM COCA Irt mpeg o Ru 369 Bninstalling Fonts 1 NVINGOWS 3 vss dctagsux cune tucot atrae Paseo QE Fe Det eve d eaedem m Semi 369 Removing Fonts from the COMPUtED cccccceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 369 Displaying FONE PICVICW secus Avcpid oe ide res Sob acui sedet E DUM EU re 370 Creating a Font Group ierit ra ead estet eux eed VA a aca a pA e ves TRAN Raa 370 SOMING Fonts mihe LEISLU aedi o ire a Ese ce ur E Douai a EHI EE o e bre edes 371 Sorting by Name cccccccseceeccessscecceesececcesseeeceeeececcseeeeecsueueeeesaeseeessaaaeees 371 SOMing Dy FONE TV OC dom lalate 371 Inverting the alphabetical Order ccccececcceccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 371 ai darc FP OMUS E ETE 372 terials POL Ponts SC oii s etaed deiode eap ri ctun iem o doe brin des 3
392. select how the TrueType font is printed at the Printer Font For drop down box At the Printer Font For drop down box you can select Download as Soft Font to send the TrueType fonts in Type 42 format or other available printer fonts to be substituted The printer fonts displayed in the drop down box differ depending on the TrueType fonts 3 Run Font Manager Click this to run the Agfa Font Manager This is not available if the Agfa Font Manager is not installed P 368 Managing Fonts with Font Manager NOTE The Run Font Manager button is not displayed for the PCL5c and PCL6 printer driver Printing Guide Printing from Windows 245 Configuration Tab The Configuration Tab allows you to configure options When any optional unit is installed in this equipment set the configuration of the machine on this tab Configuration Tab for e STUDIO4511 Series and e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 2 x General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About Pedestal Pedestal 1 Finisher Finisher D Hole Punch Unit 2 Holes Upper Drawer Letter M Paper Type Plain m T Lower Drawer A3 m Paper Type Plain m T Pedestal Upper ad Y Paper Type Plain Y T Bypass Feeder Automatic Paper Type Plain Y Profile Ne e Memory 256MB Save As Delete m v Enable SNMP Communication Restore Defau
393. selects how you want to print on insertion sheets e Do not print on page Select this to insert blank sheets e Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the specified pages on the front side of the insertion sheets e Print on both sides of page Select this to print the specified pages on both sides of the insertion sheets This is available only when the 2 Sided Printing option is enabled on the Setup tab Pages Enter the page number where the sheet is to be inserted To enter multiple pages separate page numbers with commas When Do not print on page is selected from the Print Style drop down box the blank sheet is inserted before the entered pages When Print on 1 side of page is selected from the Print Style drop down box entered page will be printed on the inserted sheet When Print on both sides of page is selected from the Print Style drop down box entered page and the next page will be printed on both sides of the inserted sheet Printing Guide Printing from Windows NOTES If Do not print on page is selected while 2 sided printing is performed and you enter an even numbered page printed on the back side of the paper for the Pages field the specified page will be blank The desired blank sheet is inserted next and the 2 sided printing continues from the next page Blank Sheet e If Print on 1 side of page is selected while 2 sided printing is performed the spec ified page i
394. sheet 16 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged horizon tally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 2 Draw Border Around Pages Check this to print borders each page Printing Guide Printing from Windows 233 234 NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE 3 Use Front Cover This sets front cover printing for N up printing which allows you to insert or print a cover on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab To enable cover printing check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used Source Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Print Style This selects how you want to print a cover e Do not print on page Select this to insert a blank cover e Print on 1 side of page Select this to print the first page image on the front side of a cover e Print on both sides of page Select this to print the first two page images on both sides of a cover This is available only when the 2 Sided Printing option is enabled on the Setup tab If Print on 1 side of page is selected while 2 Sided Printing is performed the first page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back s
395. sheets that are inserted after the page check on Duplicate box T Set other print options you require and click OK 8 Click OK or Print to send a print job Multiple pages are printed per sheet Using Watermarks Watermarks overprint your document with useful information such as Confidential Draft or Original You can choose from several predefined watermarks or you can create and save your own custom watermarks Watermarks are text only To add graphics or other document elements use image overlays instead Printing a watermark 1 Display the Effect tab and select the watermark to be printed at the Watermark drop down box Watermark CONFIDENTIAL NOTE You can create a new watermark if the watermark that you prefer is not listed in the drop down box 2 If you want to print the watermark on only the first page check on the Print on first page only box Watermark CONFIDENTIAL Add Edi Dee v Print an First Page Only 3 Set other print options you require and click OK 4 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The print job is printed with the watermark Printing Guide Printing from Windows 265 Creating or editing a watermark 1 Click Add to create new watermark or select a watermark that you want to edit and click Edit to edit a watermark Watermark Add Edit Delete Print on First Page Only e The Waterm
396. source for a first page and remaining pages When this selected select the paper source or paper type to be used for a first page at the drop down menu 298 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 3 Remaining from Select the paper source or paper type to be used for remaining pages in the drop down menu This can be selected only when you select the option button of the First page from option Printer Features In the Printer Features menu you can set special printing features Booklet In the Booklet menu you can set booklet printing Printer MFP_0OC67861 Presets Standarda 8 Feature Sets Booklet HH Booklet Paper Size None Off H4 Mi Left to Right Page Layout Booklet Center Margin 0 points Booklet Outer Margin 0 points E Ge 9 93 09 See Preview Save As PDF b 1 Booklet Page Size Select a paper size for the booklet Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet which is then folded The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size that you specify 2 Left to Right Page Layout Check this to create a booklet can be read from left to right 3 Booklet Center Margin Select the width of space added to the center 4 Booklet Outer Margin Select the width of space added short edge side of a sheet Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 299 DC Department Code In the DC menu you can specify your departme
397. sseesssessene 170 Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10 2 4 or later eeeeeeeseeeesess 176 Installing the Macintosh PPD File cccccssccecssscecesseecsesseseeseesseneesseaees 176 Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X sssssssssseseenneeee mene nennen 177 Configuring the Installable Options ccccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeseeesaaeeees 182 Installing Client Software for UNIX 0 0 0 0 ccccecccseccseeeseeeese eee eeaeeeseeeeaeeeaees 185 About Client Software for UNIX 0 0 0 ccccccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeesaaeeeeeesaaeees 185 Planning Tor IristellatiOD c ue once te a a ina 186 System Requirements cese isses sessi cec esses ceeeeesiecseeeedcuseeresceeteetse 186 Installing the Printer on UNIX vds oer duse kal ond vest a c Aaa eens dues 186 Installing the UNIX FEIHGLES cix idi rei ambae ed x dier nte reiecta diffs 186 Contig ring the Print QUO cervicis tert oue eerie ed aetna 187 Creating a Print Queue Using est4511add estbwadd 188 Creating a Print Queue Manually esseeeeeeeeereeeee 188 Changing the Default Values eeeesssseesseseeennenenmen 192 Deleting the Print QUEUGC cccceccccscesseeeeceseeecseeueeeeceaeeecseuaeeessseseessaages 193 Deleting a Print Queue Using est4511rm estbwrm 193 Deleting a Print Queue Manually
398. stall the driver Windows found click Next Se e w2k_xp_2003 ps usahes4cps2k inf E Cancel e It starts copying files 10 Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Windows has finished installing the software for this device To close this wizard click Finish 11 The installation is completed NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Windows XP Server 2003 Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play REQUIREMENT You must log into Windows as a user who has the Administrators or Power Users privilege when using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com puter and then power on the equipment and your computer e The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 37 38 2 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wi
399. stall the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play differs depending on the version of Windows used LL LL LL P 54 Windows 98 Me P 60 Windows 2000 P 63 Windows XP Server 2003 Windows 98 Me Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play The following describes an installation on Windows 98 The procedure is the same when Win dows Me is used 1 Power on this equipment and your computer 2 Insert the Client CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation 3 Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer e The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears When you are installing the printer driver for USB printing on Windows Me the USB port driver automatically installed In that case please skip to step 11 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 4 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard This wizard searches for new drivers for e STUDIO Series device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work i Cancel D Select Search for the best driver for your device Recom mended and click Next Add New Hardware Wizard What do you want Windows to do X pmnstin M M C Display a list of all the driver
400. stalling Client Software for Windows 81 4 Select Local printer uncheck the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Local or Network Printer Is the printer attached to your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer Local printer Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer C Network printer lt Back Cancel D Select Create a new port and select Standard TCP IP Port in the Type drop down box Then click Next Add Printer Wizard f Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port C Use the following port Pot Description Hae Printer Port TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Seri LEIS Printer Port LPT3 Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM2 Serial Port PM Serial Part zi Note Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer Create a new port Type Standard TCP IP Port v lt Back Cancel he Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears 6 Click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port fo
401. subject to restrictions set forth in subdivision b 3 11 or c 1 i1 of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause set forth in 252 227 7013 or 52 227 19 c 2 of the DOD FAR as appro priate Contractor Manufacturer is TOSHIBA TEC Corporation 2 4 1 Shibakoen Minato ku Tokyo 105 8524 Japan General You may not sublicense lease rent assign or transfer this license or the Software Any attempt to subli cense lease rent assign or transfer any of the rights duties or obligations hereunder is void You agree that you do not intend to and will not ship transmit directly or indirectly the Software including any copies of the Software or any technical data contained in the Software or its media or any direct product thereof to any country or destination prohibited by the United States Government This license shall be governed by the laws of Japan or at the election of a Supplier of TTEC concerned with a dispute arising from or relating to this Agreement the laws of the Country designated from time to time by the relevant Supplier of TTEC If any provision or portion of this Agreement shall be found to be illegal invalid or unenforceable the remain ing provisions or portions shall remain in full force and effect YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDI TIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT C
402. t COM3 Local Port POMA Lacal Part zi Add Patt Delete Port Configure Port Enable bidirectional suppan Enable printer pooling Cancel Help e The Printer Ports dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 67 5 Select LPR Port and click New Port Printer Ports i2 x Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port Local Port New Monitor Cancel e The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears NOTE If LPR Port is not listed make sure the TCP IP Printing Service is installed on your Windows NT 4 0 LPR Port is not listed unless the TCP IP Printing Service is installed 6 Enter the IP address of this equipment in the Name or address of server providing Ipd field and Print in the Name of printer or print queue on that server field and click OK Add LPH compatible printer Ed Name or address of server providing Ipd E D 10 70 105 Name of printer or print queue on that server Print Cancel Help e When your network uses DNS or WINS server enter the printer name of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the Name or address of server providing Ipd field T Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box Printer Ports 24 x Available Printer Parts Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network P
403. t Overlay Image file and Store to e Filing Printing Scheduled Print Jobs The Print Scheduling feature allows you to specify the date and time to print your job This can be especially useful for delaying printing until off peak hours Printing on a specified data and time 1 Display the Print Job tab and select Scheduled Print Scheduled Print Time EA 072003 10 02 PM E dit 2 Click Edit e he Scheduled Time dialog box appears Printing Guide Printing from Windows 249 3 Click the arrow button at the Date drop down box to display the Calendar window and select the date that you want to print x Time 1 03 PM zm j ux 055 ca 8 9 Wb 11 15 15 17 18 22 23 24 2 29 30 1 2 c 3Today 6 10 2003 Inner Tray d 25 2b 27 28 DK L ancel 4 Select the time field and click the spin button to change the time Scheduled Time E X Date 6 10 2003 Time LE PM Em tees e To change the hour select the hour number and click the spin button e To change the time select the time number and click the spin button 5 Click OK e The specified date and time is displayed in the Time field 6 Set other print options you require and click OK T Click OK or Print to send a print job e The document will be queued to print at the specified time and date Printing Private Print Jobs The private print feature permits sensitive or confidential documents to be pr
404. t installed Installed Select this when the ADU is installed 12 Click OK Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing Before installing the printer driver for AppleTalk printing on Macintosh check with your system administrator to make sure of the following This equipment is connected to the network and turned on The AppleTalk settings is correct 1 Click Apple menu and select Chooser r CH File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer AirPort Apple DVD Player D Apple System Profiler Calculator f Chooser G Control Panels i Favorites Key Caps Network Browser G Recent Applications f Recent Documents Eg Recent Servers fm Remote Access Status Scrapbook 49 Sherlock 2 Speakable Items Stickies e The Chooser dialog box appears Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Macintosh 2 Select the LaserWriter 8 icon and select the AppleTalk zone if configured Then select this equipment displayed in the list and click Create Chooser amp Active 9 Inactive 7 6 2 AppleTalk e The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears 3 Select the PPD file for the equipment and click Select e The PPD file varies depending on the equipment TOSHIBA e STUDIOA4511Series for e STUDIO4511 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO450Series for e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA e STUDIO280Series for e STUDIO28
405. t job list without printing When you want to print the print job perform printing from the JOB STATUS button in the Control Panel by entering another department code of which the output limitation is more than the number of printed sheets How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job which no department code or invalid department code is specified varies depending on the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis trator mode and whether the SNMP Communication is enabled or not When the SNMP Communication and Department Code Enforcement are enabled an error message will be displayed when entering the invalid department code When the SNMP Communication is disabled and Department Code Enforcement is enabled the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled the invalid department code print job will be printed However when using Windows NT 4 0 and configure the connection through a Net Ware print server an error message for entering the invalid department code will not be displayed even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Commu nication is enabled Layout Tab Standard Window The standard window of the Layout tab allows you to enable Front Cover printing Back Cover printing Inserting Pages and Interleaving Pages for a normal layout print
406. t supported 3 Printer Profile Do not specify this because ColorSync Color Matching and PostScript Color Matching at the Print Color drop down box are not supported Cover Page In the Cover Page menu you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page The banner page includes information about owner of the job job name application name date and time printer name and number of copies E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Cover Page D Print Cover Page None 132 Before Document 2 After Document 2 Cover Page Paper Source Auto Default 1 Print Cover Page This sets how a banner page is inserted e None Select this not to print a banner page e Before Document Select this to print a banner page before the document When this is selected select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option 276 Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh e After Document Select this to print a banner page after the document When this is selected select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option 2 Cover Page Paper Source Select the paper source when you set to print a banner page Font Settings In the Font Settings menu you can set how the fonts are printed z2 8 7 Printer MFP Q0C67861 m Destination r Font Settings r Font Documentation D Annotate
407. t the selected paper size automatically and printed 2 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged left to right when the orientation is portrait or from top to bottom when the orientation is land scape on one sheet 2 pages Right to Left Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged right to left when the orientation is portrait or from bottom to top when the orientation is land scape on one sheet 4 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 4 pages Right to Left Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally from the right and printed top to bottom on one sheet 4 pages Left to Right by Column Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged vertically from the top and printed left to right on one sheet 4 pages Right to Left by Column Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged vertically from the top and printed right to left on one sheet 6 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 8 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 8 pages arranged horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet 9 pages Left to Right Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one
408. t the inner output tray binl Select the upper output tray of the finisher bin2 Select the lower output tray of the finisher jsp Select the upper output tray of the Job Separator jsp2 Select the lower output tray of the Job Separator Printing Guide Printing from UNIX 311 312 If the finisher option is not installed on the equipment the default output tray will be used inner If the finisher option is not installed on the equipment the default output tray will be used bin 2 Example The command to specify output bin 1 is lp o binl filename For e STUDIO4511 Series jspl and jsp2 are not available for e STUDIO4511 Series Hole Punching When the hole punch option is installed it can be activated using the following option Option Value Alternate Description Value nopunch Hole punching is turned off Hole punch long edge without rotation Hole punch short edge without rotation Hole punch long edge with 180 degree rotation Hole punch short edge with 180 degree rotation If this option is not specified the default value of nopunch will be used This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the copier manual for a list of compatible paper sizes In particular A5 A6 and statement paper sizes will not work with this function Example The command to hole punch the long edge feed portrait page 1s lp o punch 1 f
409. tation Select this to punch holes on the right side for a portrait document or on the bottom for a landscape document o m o e Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation Select this to punch holes on the bot tom for a portrait document or on the left for a landscape document T WI NOTE This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed 3 Stapling This sets whether a print job is stapled e Off Select this to print without staples 1 e Upper Left Portrait Upper Right Landscape Select this to staple in the upper left for a portrait document or in the upper right a the landscape document 4 T e Middle Left Portrait Middle Top Landscape Select this to staple double in the left for a portrait document or in the top for a landscape document eu Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 303 e Lower Left Portrait Upper Left Landscape Select this to staple in the lower left for a portrait document or in the upper left for a landscape document T x T e Upper Right Portrait Lower Right Landscape Select this to staple in the upper right for a portrait document or in the lower right for a landscape document aul e Middle Right Portrait Middle Bottom Landscape Select this to staple double in the right for a portrait document or in the bottom for a landscape document eu e
410. tep 10 on page 94 Specifying the IP address manually 1 Click Discovery TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client InstallShield Wizard x Select Port Select the part for Printer a Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name LPT1 Discovery Browse lt Back Cancel e he TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears 98 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 2 Click Manual Selection xl Name IPAPX Address Location Model Er Select Start Discovery to begin the discovery process Start Discovery Advanced Manual Selection Device Information Gk Cancel e The Manual Selection dialog box appears 3 Enter each item to specify the printer address and click OK x IP Address 10 10 70 105 IP Address Name MFP 00C67861 Location ees IP Address Enter the IP address of the printer IPX Address Enter the IPX address of the printer This is available only when the IPX SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer and the computer is connected to the NetWare server Name Enter the printer name Location Enter the location of the printer NOTE You must enter Name and either IP Address or IPX Address Printing Guide Instal
411. ter Double Select this to fold and staple double in the center and print e The selectable options vary depending on the paper size Printing Guide Printing from Windows e Upper Left and Upper Right can be selected only when the Single staple Fin isher Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab e Center Top and Middle Left can be selected only when the Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e The output is stapled for each copy Punching holes 1 Display the Setup tab and select how to punch holes at the Hole Punch drop down box r Hale Punch 2 Sided Printing Middle Left Center Top Select this to create holes on the upper side Middle Left Select this to create holes on the left side 2 Set other print options you require and click OK 3 Click OK or Print to send a print job e he output is hole punched Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet You can print on both sides of the paper Printing both sides of paper 1 Display the Setup tab and select the direction to be printed at the 2 Sided Printing drop down box 2 Sided Printing None bd None Br Help Book Select this to print on both sides of the paper
412. ter a port name field and click OK If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode enter as the following in the Network path or queue name field lt NetWare file server name gt lt queue name gt Example NetWare file server name Nwsrv queue name mfp 00c67861 Nwsrv mfp 00c67861 Enter a port name Nwsrv Mip_queue Cancel Help If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode enter as the follow ing in the Network path or queue name field lt Tree gt lt queue name gt lt Context gt lt Tree gt Example Tree ORG queue name mfp_00c67861 Context Dept1 NAOEg NN mp 0066786l deptl org Enter a port name M rg mfp queue deptl org Cancel Help 152 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows SUPPLEMENT The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator If you do not know the queue for this equipment ask your administrator T Click Close Printer Ports i21 x Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port New Monitor Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Printer C come Local Port C COM3 Local Port C coma Local Port Cl NMFP DDC Local Port l vi 0rg Mfp Local Port Add Port Configure Port Enable printer
413. ter to use pra Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation NT disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows Update Have Disk Besc 160 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows NOTE If the same printer driver has been installed the following dialog box appears If it appears select Replace existing driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Use Existing Driver driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Do you want to keep the existing driver or use the new one C Keep existing driver recommended Replace existing driver lt Back Cancel 13 Change the name if desired and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Name Your Printer You must assign a name for this printer Supply a name for this printer Some programs do not support server and printer name combinations of more than 31 characters Printer name TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5Sc Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer Yes C No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default print
414. th of space added to the center If there is not a preferred width in the list enter the width by points You can enter from 0 point to 300 points in units of 1 point 4 Booklet Outer Margin Select the width of space added in the short edge side on a sheet If there is not a preferred width in the list enter the width by points You can enter from 0 point to 18 points in units of 1 point Watermark Options In the Watermark Options A and Watermark Options B menu you can enable watermark printing E2 8 T Printer MFP 00C67861 Destination Watermarking om Watermark Text Watermark Text 5ize 72points a we a r Watermark Text Angle Watermark Gray Level 20 black T OOOO E2 8 T Printer MFP Q0C67861 Destination Watermark Options B Watermark Font Helvetica Bold T Watermark Position Center 4 Watermark Outline 1 Watermarking This sets the printing of a watermark 2 Watermark Text Select the watermark text to be printed If there is not a preferred watermark in the list enter the watermark text in the field displayed Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 285 3 Watermark Text Size Select the font size of watermark text If there is not a preferred font size in the list enter the font size by points You can enter from 4 points to 400 points in units of 1 point 4 Watermark Text Angle Select the degree of
415. that are displayed in the Available Font List and the installed fonts list Previewing fonts 1 Highlight a font you want to preview from the Available Font List or the installed fonts list 2 Click Fonts menu and select Preview 3 The Preview dialog box appears The sample font is dis played on the dialog box Point Size You can select the point size of the sample font displayed Normal Styles When this is selected the font is displayed in the normal face on the dialog box All Styles When this is selected the font is displayed in all of its available font faces in the dialog box Creating a Font Group You can create a group of fonts and give a descriptive name to the group The created group can be used to install or uninstall the fonts in Windows This function can be used to configure the different working scenarios of the fonts for each user Creating a font group 1 Select the Font Groups folder and click the Fonts menu and select New Group e The New Group dialog box appears 2 Enter the group name in the Group Name field 3 In the All Available Fonts expand each folder and select the fonts that you want to add to the group 4 Click Add gt gt e The selected fonts are added to the Fonts in Group list 5 Click OK 370 Printing Guide Managing Fonts with Font Manager 6 The created group is added to the Font Groups list Sorting Fonts in the List You can sort and
416. the components setup will install P f Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install Top ccessDocMon r Description ivi TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCLE Setup will install the TOSHIBA a TOSHIBA e S 280 Series PSL3 e STUDIO280 Series PSL3 printer driver on your computer 78 34 MB of space required on the C drive 14753 23 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield TN TopAccessDocMon Check this to install the Document Monitor TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PCL6 Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO280 Series PSL3 Check this to install the PS3 printer driver The Select Port dialog box appears For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series e The PCLSc printer driver is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series e Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 137 8 Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net Ware file server in the Network path or queue name field and click Next If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode enter as the following in the Network path or queue name field lt NetWare file server name gt lt queue name gt Example NetWare file server name Nwsrv
417. the device TOSHIBA e STUDIO USB Printing Support Windows is now ready to install the best driver for this device Click Back to select a different driver or click Next to continue Location of driver f E USBSTTECUSB INF i Cancel e t starts copying files 56 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 10 Click Finish Add New Hardware Wizard TOSHIBA e STUDIO USB Printing Support Windows has finished installing the software that your new hardware device requires i Cancel e The USB printer port driver is installed and the Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears again 11 Click Next Add New Hardware Wizard This wizard searches for new drivers for TOSHIBAe STUDIO4511 A device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work E Cancel 12 Select Search for the best driver for your device Recom mended and click Next Add New Hardware Wizard What do you want Windows to do pmnsteti A X C Display a list of all the drivers in a specific location so you can select the driver you want Back Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows of 13 Check only the Specify a location check box and click Browse Add New Hardware Wizard Wi
418. ting size e Automatic Automatically selects the paper set in this equipment according to the printed document size Upper Drawer Paper is fed from the Upper Drawer e Lower Drawer Paper is fed from the Lower Drawer e Pedestal Upper Drawer Paper is fed from the Pedestal Upper Drawer This cannot be selected if a Pedestal 1 or 2 are not installed e Pedestal Lower Drawer Paper is fed from the Pedestal Lower Drawer This cannot be selected if a Pedestal 2 1s not installed e Large Capacity Feeder Paper is fed from the Large Capacity Feeder This cannot be selected if a Large Capacity Feeder is not installed e Sheet Feed Bypass Paper is fed from the Bypass Tray The selectable values vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab 5 Paper Type This sets the media type of the paper e Plain Select this when printing on 20 lbs plain paper 64 80 g m plain paper e Thick1 Select this when printing on 24 28 lbs thick paper 81 105 g m thick paper e Thick2 Select this when printing on 32 90 Ibs thick paper 106 163 g m thick paper e Thick3 Select this when printing on 110 Ibs thick paper 164 209 g m thick paper Printing Guide Printing from Windows e Transparency Select this when printing on transparent sheets e Envelope This is selected when you select the Envelope paper size at the Original
419. tion Color High res LineArt or Color High res Transparency For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Color Resolution Type option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 2 Pure Black amp Gray Select whether printing the document in gray scale e Off Select this to print the document in color mode e Pure Black only Select this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all colors cyan magenta and yellow is 10096 e Pure Black and Pure Gray Select this to print the contents in black where the per centage of all color cyan magenta and yellow is 100 C 100 gt K 100 M 100 gt K 100 Y 100 gt K 100 and print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color cyan magenta and yellow is the same percentage C M Y n gt K n For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Pure Black amp Gray option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 287 3 Black Over Print Select this when printing background content that has black text overlayed on it If this is not enabled the background of the black content will not print When you print a document that has any of its content on background with black text overlayed enable this option For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Black Over Print option is not available for e STUDIO450
420. to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D W2K_XP_2008 PCL5C USA Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware e It starts copying files 8 Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for my TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c tem Click Finish to close the wizard Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 65 NOTE 9 The installation is completed Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installing the Client Software for LPR Printing PREPARATION NOTES REQUIREMENT 66 This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for LPR printing which is available for the local area network over TCP IP There are Two ways to set up the printer drivers for LPR printing Using the installer in the Client CD ROM You can set up the printer drivers for LPR printing by installing the printer drivers using the
421. tput to the lower tray of the Finisher NOTE Tray 1 and Tray 2 are only available when the Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Saddle stitch Finisher are installed e When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration tab you can select Job Separator Upper and Job Separator Lower instead of Inner Tray 2 Hole Punch This sets whether or not a print job is hole punched e Off Select this to print without hole punches e Long Edge Punch without rotation Select this to create holes on the left side for the portrait document or on the top for the landscape document o o Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh e Short Edge Punch without rotation Select this to create holes on the top for the por trait document or on the right for the landscape document T e Long Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation Select this to create holes on the right side for the portrait document or on the bottom for the landscape document o m o e Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation Select this to create holes on the bot tom for the portrait document or on the left for the landscape document T WI NOTE This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed 3 Stapling This sets whether a print job is stapled e Off Select this to print without stapling 1 e Upper Left Po
422. trol Panel 2 Right click the printer driver icon 3 Select Properties from the shortcut menu 4 Depending on the operating system select the following tab In Windows 98 Me Select Details Browse to select the printer or Novell queue e In Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 Select Ports Add a new port and map it to the printer 5 Make sure that the path to the printer and the device name are correct lt device name gt print e Where device name gt is the same as the device name set from the Touch Panel Display 6 Click the General Tab and click Print Test Page to confirm that the settings are correct Command Line Options Not Processed Problem Description All print options are sent to this equipment at the start of the print job If the print file already contains print commands they override the command line options you set For example if the print file specifies the Letter media and you specify the A4 media option with the lp command the document is output on letter size paper provided of course that all copier related restric tions have been met Corrective Action Change the properties in the document you want to print and recreate the print file Submit the print job using the LP command without setting additional parameters Printing Guide Printer Driver Errors 355 356 Cannot Remember Document Password Problem Description There is no way to obtain the Document Identification Number DIN f
423. ttings in the print options that are shown in the Printing Default button in the Advanced tab for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 or the Document Default command in the File menu for Windows NT 4 0 After you change one of the settings the changes that you made in the Configuration tab will be correctly applied The following procedure describes how to make the changes that you made in the Configuration tab available from the application The operation varies depending on the operating system For Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Printing Guide Printing from Windows After you change the option settings in the Configuration tab display the Advanced tab and click Printing Default Change one of the settings For example change Number of Copies Click OK to save changes Now the changes that you made in the Configura tion tab apply correctly in the printer driver If required click Printing Default in the Advanced tab and restore the setting that you changed in Step 2 to the original value and click OK For Windows NT 4 0 1 9 After you change the option settings in the Configuration tab click OK to close the Properties dialog box Select the printer driver and select Document Defaults in the File menu Change one of the settings For example change Number of Copies Click OK to save changes Now the changes that you made in the Configura tion tab apply correctly in the pr
424. turned on so the paper size has priority over the paper source In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the paper source If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer s default value will be used Example The command to specify the LCF paper source is lp o Icf filename Duplexing The current duplex mode can be specified using the following options NOTE 2 sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed Option Value Alternate Description Value simplex Turn duplexing off duplex Iduplex Turn duplexing on with long edge binding duplex_long duplex long hduplex sduplex duplex short Turn duplexing on with short edge binding duplex short vduplex If this option is not specified the default value simplex will be used It is not necessary to specify duplexing for Booklet Mode sduplex Setting duplexing sepa rately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing Example The command to specify long edge duplexing is Ip o duplex filename Paper Sizes The current paper size can be specified using the following options Option Value Alternate Description Value letter Select letter size paper A4 Select A4 size paper Printing Guide Printing from UNIX 313 Option Value legal Alternate Value lg LG Description Select legal size paper statement st ST Select state
425. tware for Macintosh 171 TOSHIBA_e STUDIO450Series for e STUDIO450 Series TOSHIBA_e STUDIO280Series for e STUDIO280 Series Select a PostScript Printer Description File Cg Printer Descriptions c MacOS English LaserWriter Pro 405v2011 110 LaserWriter Pro 600v2010 130 LaserWriter Pro 630v2010 130 LaserWriter Pro 810 LaserWriter Pro 810f Laserwriter Select 360 Laserwriter Select 360f Laserwriter Select 610 TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 Series Printer Model TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 1 Series PS 1 Untitled 1 E PostScript Printer Description PPD File TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511Series Change LPR Printer Selection Change Desktop Printer Usage Print to LPR lt lt unspecified gt gt With Printer Driver Laser Writer 8 The Internet Printer dialog box appears 6 Enter the IP Address of this equipment in the Printer Address field and Print in the Queue field Then click OK Internet Printer Specify the Internet printer you are printing to using domain name or IP address Printer Address 10 10 70 105 Queue Cx T Click Create 1 Untitled 1 E PostScript Printer Description PPD File TOSHIBA e STUDIO451 1 Series Change LPR Printer Selection 10 10 70 105 Change
426. tween overhead transparencies To enable interleaving pages check on the box and select the location from where sheets are to be fed Source Select the location from where a interleaving sheet is to be fed Printing Guide Printing from Windows NOTE The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab Duplicate When you check on this you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet Effect Tab The Effect Tab contains print options that add effects to your print jobs such as Watermarks Overlay Image printing Rotate printing Mirror printing and Negative printing Also it lets you enable Toner Save and Smoothing functions Effect Tab for PCL5c and PCL6 TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printing Preferences 2 xl Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About None v Add Edit Delete Print on First Page Only Use Overlay Image Letter Rotate 180 degrees a a e 00O ZOOM Toner Save Graphics Text Do not Print Blank Pages Profile None Save As Delete Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Help Effect Tab for PS3 f TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Printing Preferences 7 3 xl Setup PrintJob Layout Effect Image Quality About O Add Edit Print on First Page Only Use Overl
427. u can specify the Document ID number for the private job It is recom mended to specify the DIN when you select to print a private job If you do not specify the DIN the private job uses default DIN 00000 Printer MFP 00C67861 HH Presets Standard Hd l Printer Features re Feature Sets DIN H Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 1 0 E Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 2 0 s Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 3 0 E Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 4 0 E Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 5 0 E amp G9 9 Q 9 Preview Save As PDF J C Cancel 7 1 Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 1 Select the first digit of the Document ID 2 Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 2 Select the second digit of the Document ID 3 Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 3 Select the third digit of the Document ID 4 Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 4 Select the forth digit of the Document ID 5 Private Print Document ID DIN Digit 5 Select the fifth digit of the Document ID Printing Guide Printing from Macintosh 301 Finishing In the Finishing menu you can set destination hole punching and stapling Printer MFP 00C67861 Presets Standard Printer Features HH Feature Sets l Finishing S Destination l Tray 2 HolePunch Off Hd Stapling Off KH e 9o Preview Save As P
428. uage gt e To install the PS3 printer driver locate CD ROM drive W2K_XP_2003 PS lt language gt 10 Click OK Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive cas selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from E3w2K XP 2003NPCLSCAU SA Browse Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 51 11 Select the printer driver and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use xg Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation a disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Windows Update Have Disk tees 12 Change the name if desired and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Name Your Printer You must assign a name for this printer Supply a name for this printer Some programs do not support server and printer name combinations of more than 31 characters Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer Yes C No lt Back Cancel SUPPLEMENT f any printer drivers have installed on the computer select whether using this printer as a default printer 13 Select whether this printer is shared or not and click Next Add Printer Wizard
429. ument displays the name of the document e Message displays the event notification message e Notification Number displays the sequential order of the current message in the notifica tion queue For example 3 8 indicates that it 1s the third message in a queue of eight notifi cations I4 Click this to display the first notification dialog box in the queue 4 Click this to display the previous notification dialog box in the queue gt Click this to display the next notification dialog box in the queue Click this to display the last notification dialog box in the queue e Close closes the window Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Printing Guide 5 Troubleshooting 351 When Printing cannot be Performed NOTE This problem can arise as the result of a hardware malfunction a network communi cation or configuration problem Before troubleshooting the client error ask your administrator to troubleshoot the hardware or network errors Those troubleshoot ing are described in the Network Administrator s Guide The following checklist helps you identify the source of the error and directs to you where you can find more information about resolving it Client Error for Windows Platform For Instruction Go To 1 Have you ever printed suc Next Step P 355 Driver Mapped to cessfully from this client B gt Wrong P
430. ure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Point and Print differs depend ing on the version of Windows used LO P 141 Windows 98 Me LL P 145 Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 e TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing To install TopAccessDoc Mon you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately e The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your computer To install the Agfa Font Manager you must install it from the Client CD ROM separately For e STUDIOA450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client CD ROM You must install it from the Font CD ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Windows 98 Me Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print 1 Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network with Windows Explorer and double click a queue When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode open the NetWare file server and double click the queue for the equipment Nwsrv OY x File Edit View Go Favorites Help e gt fd B amp ud t Back Forward Up Map Drive Disconnect Cut Copy Address Ea Network Neighborhood R1 Nwsrvmf ueu When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode browse the NDS tree and context and double click the queue for
431. ve Uninstalling the TrueType fonts 1 Highlight the fonts you want to uninstall from Windows from the installed fonts list 2 Click the Fonts menu and select Un install 3 The fonts are uninstalled from Windows The uninstalled fonts are added to the Available Fonts List Removing Fonts from the Computer You can remove from your computer the fonts that no longer be required Even if you uninstall the fonts from Windows the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the hard drive You can remove the sources of the uninstalled fonts from your computer by this function Before removing the fonts the fonts must be uninstalled from Windows first Removing the TrueType font files from your computer 1 Highlight the fonts you want to remove from your computer in the installed fonts list 2 Click the Fonts menu and select Remove Font 3 The Remove Fonts dialog box appears Printing Guide Managing Fonts with Font Manager 369 4 Check on the box for Delete font s from the hard disk and click OK e f you do not check on the checkbox for Delete font s from the hard disk the source of the fonts are not deleted from the hard disk If you want to remove the fonts from the Available Font List but do not want to delete the source file do not check this checkbox 5 The source files of the fonts are deleted from the hard drive Displaying Font Preview You can preview the fonts
432. ve jammed paper Paper Jam in Stack Feed Bypass Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Upper Drawer Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Large Capacity Feeder Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Pedestal Upper Drawer Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Pedestal Lower Drawer Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Finisher Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Printer Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Job Separator Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam in Offset Tray Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Ejection Jam Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Insertion Jam Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to remove jammed paper Paper Jam
433. with TopAccessDocMon 347 2 Click Document menu and select Cancel ini x Administrator 0758 10 3 2003 12 32 4 1 Job Held 10 10 70 105 p ci 1 document s in queue e The selected job is deleted Releasing proof print documents 1 Display the Proof Print tab and select a proof print job that you want to print of remaining copies NOTE Youcan release the proof print job only that you originally submitted 2 Click Document menu and select Release Proof f TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c m 10 x Printer Document View Help UserName Pages Submitted 9 Administrator 0 10 10 3 2003 1 24 06 10 10 70 105 p g e The Release Proof dialog box appears 3 Enter the number of copies and click OK e The remaining copies of the proof print job are printed 348 Printing Guide Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon Releasing scheduled print documents immediately 1 Display the Scheduled Print tab and select a scheduled print job that you want to print immediately NOTE Youcan release the scheduled print job only that you originally submitted 2 Click Document menu and select Print Now rd TopAccessDocMon TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Printer Document View Help 11 12 20 Administr 0 9 10 3 2003 12 55 59 10 10 70 105 4p i The selected scheduled print job is immediately
434. xample Tree ORG queue name mfp_00c67861 Context Dept1 Org mip 00667 eel deptluworg Port Name HEI Enter 4 port name Org mfp_ queue dept org Cancel SUPPLEMENT The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator If you do not know the queue for this equipment ask your administrator T Click OK to save settings TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Properties 24x Layout Effect Image Quality Fonts Configuration About General Details Color Management Sharing Capture Settings Setup Print Job TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c Print to the following port Mfp_queue deptt org Unknown local por i 5 Delete Port Print using the following driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c x New Driver Capture Printer Port End Capture Timeout settings Not selected 15 seconds Transmission retry 5 seconds Spool Settings Port Settings DK Cancel Apply Help 150 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows Windows NT 4 0 You must log into Windows NT 4 0 as a user who has the Administrators or Power REQUIREMENT Users privilege Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start select Settings and click Printers to open the Printers folder Ls Printers of Xx File Edi View Help C Printers Hae xe ext d Pr
435. xt Bach Cancel Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 113 4 Select Local printer uncheck the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer and click Next Add Printer Wizard E Local or Network Printer Is the printer attached to your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer Local printer Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer C Network printer lt Back Cancel 5 Select Create a new port and select Local Port in the Type drop down box Then click Next Add Printer Wizard 1 f Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port C Use the following port Port Description LETI Printer Port TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Seri DEDE Printer Port LPT3 Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM2 Serial Port FAMI Serial Part zi Note Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer Create a new port Type lt Back Cancel e The Port Name dialog box appears 6 Enter lt NetBIOS Name gt print in the field and click OK Enter a port name SMFP 00C67861 print Cancel Example NetBIOS Name MFP 00C6
436. y scale where the percentage of each color cyan magenta and yellow is the same percentage C M Y n gt K n NOTE The Pure Gray option is not available when Mono is selected at the Color drop down box in the Setup tab e The Pure Gray option is not available when the Pure Black option is not enabled Printing Guide Printing from Windows 243 For e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series The Pure Gray option is not available for e STUDIO450 Series and e STUDIO280 Series 9 Use Black for All Text Check this to print all texts in 100 black except white texts Font Tab The Fonts tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed The following figure 1s the Font Tab for the PS3 printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 Properties 2 xl General Sharing Parts Advanced Color Management Security Fonts Configuration About Use Font Substitution T able TrueType Options TrueType Font Use Printer Font 2 rial Unicode MS Download as Soft Font Download as Soft Font Download as Soft Font Download as Soft Font Letter Download as Soft Font Download as Soft Font E E i Download as Soft Font Download as Soft Font DUAS Download as Soft Font z Test Profile None Substitute Printer Font For Download as Soft Font set Save As Delete Restore Defaults Graphics Run Font Manager NOTE The Fonts ta
437. yed when copying is completed Skip to Step 12 11 If the following message appears click Yes to set the indi cated printer driver to be the default printer driver or click No to not change the default printer driver TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client x P Do you want to set the Following Printer as the Default Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 mm CN 12 Click Finish InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing TOSHIBA e STUDIO4511 Series Client on your computer IV Yes want to view the Read Me file e Ifyou selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation the system may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAccessDocMon NOTE The Installer may ask you to restart your computer If it does select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish to restart your computer 13 The installation is completed 30 Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows NOTE Before using the printer driver for printing please configure the installed options of the equipment and department code if required on the printer driver P 204 Before Using the Printer Driver Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play The procedure to install the printer driver for Parallel printing by Plug and Play differs depend ing on the version of the Windows being used LL P 31 Windows 98 Me P 34 Windows 2000 P 37
438. zard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 3 Select Search for the best driver in these locations and check only the Include this location in the search check box Then click Browse Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options So S Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search CAI386 v Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware e The Browse For Folder dialog box appears 4 Insert the Client1 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive e When inserting the Client CD ROM the installer may automatically start Click Cancel to exit the installer and continue the operation Printing Guide Installing Client Software for Windows 5 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows XP Server 2003 is located and click OK Browse For Folder Select the folder that contains drivers for your hardware USB 3 Cy wzk xP 2003 3 Pasc FRE D GER
439. ze paper for booklet printing mode B4 Select JIS B5 size paper for booklet printing mode 316 Printing Guide Printing from UNIX Option Value booklet computer Alternate Value CO CO Description Select computer size paper for booklet printing mode booklet legal13 lg13 LG13 Select legal 13 size paper for booklet printing mode booklet SQ85 sq85 letter square Select 8 5 inch square size paper for booklet printing mode booklet 8K 8k Select 8K size paper for booklet printing mode booklet 16K Select 16K size paper for booklet printing mode In a job if this value is LT and in PDL too the data is for LT paper size this will result in a scaled booklet on Letter paper In a job if this value is A3 and in PDL the data is for A4 paper size this will result in a tiled booklet on A3 paper When the Booklet Mode options is selected the paper size is automatically set to the same size as for Booklet Mode This function is only available for A3 A4 B4 Letter and Ledger paper sizes If booklet mode is selected then duplexing is also selected automatically sduplex Setting duplexing separately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing Example The command to select the letter size paper for booklet printing mode is lp o booklet letter filename Page Layout The booklet mode page layout can be selected using the following

Toshiba 200L Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents